-------
282 dibenzo(a,h)anthraeene-d14 (5) 2649 164 2.107 - 2.445 20
382 dibenzo(a,h)anthracen« (5) 2660 282 1.000 • ,1.007 20 49 125
279 benzo(ghi)p«rylen«-d12 2741 i64 2.187 • 2.524 20
379 b*nzo(ghi)p«rylene 2750 279 1.001 • 1.006 20 44 nd
(1) Reference numbers beginning with 0, 1, 5, or 9 indicate a pollutant
quantified by the internal standard method; reference numbers beginning
with 2 or 6 indicate a labeled compound quantified by the internal standard
method; reference numbers beginning with 3 or 7 indicate a pollutant quan-
tified by isotope dilution.
(2) Single values in this column are based on single laboratory data.
(3) This is a minimum level at which the analytical system shall give
recognizable mass spectra (background corrected) and acceptable calibration
points. The concentration in the aqueous or solid phase is determined
using the equations in section 14.
(4) Method detection limits determined in digested sludge (low solids) and
in filter cake or compost (high solids).
(5) Specification derived from related compound.
(6) Detected as azobenzene
(7) Detected as diphenylamine
nd - not detected when spiked into the sludge tested
*Background levels of these compounds were present in the sludge tested,
resulting in higher than expected MDL's. The MDL for these compounds is
expected to be approximately 50 ug/kg with no interferences present.
Column: 30 +/- 2 m x 0.25 +/- 0.02 mm i.d. 94% methyl, 4% phenyl, 1% vinyl
bonded phase fused silica capillary
Temperature program: 5 min at 30 °C; 30 - 280 °C at 8 °C per min; iso-
thermal at 280 °C until benzo(ghi)perylene elutes
Gas velocity: 30 +/- 5 cm/sec at-30 °C
1625C D-187
-------
Table 6
Gas chromatography of Acid Extractable
Compounds
Mini- Method Detection
nun Limit (4)
ECO
No.
in
164
224
324
947
944
257
357
231
331
943
946
222
322
221
321
631
731
530
259
359
258
358
948
260
360
945
264
364
Retention time
Mean
Comoound (sec)
2,2'-difluorobiphenyl (int std)
2-chlorophenol -64
2-chlorophenol
hexanoic acid
p-cresol
2-ni trophenol -d4
2-nitrophenol
2,4-dichlorophenel-d3
2,4-dichlorophenol
benzoic acid
2,6-dichlorophenol
4-chloro-3-methylphenol-d2
4-chloro-3-methylphenol
2,4,6-trichlorophenol-d2
2.4,6-trichlorophenol
2,4,5-trichlorophenol-d2 (5)
2,4,5-trichlorophenol
2,3,6-trichlorophenol
2,4-dinitrophenel-o3
2,4-dini trophenol
4-ni trophenol -d4
4-nitrophenol
2,3,4,6-tetrachlorophenol
2-methyl -4,6-dini trophenol -d2
2-Mthyl -4,6-dfnf trophenol
3,5-dibrc*o-4-hydroxybenxonitrile
pentachlorophenol- 13C6
pentach lorophenol
1163
701
705
746
834
898
900
944
947
971
981
1086
1091
1162
1165
1167
1170
1195
1323
1325
1349
1354
1371
1433
1435
1481
1559
1561
EGO
Ref
164
164
224
164
164
164
257
164
231
164
164
164
222
164
221
164
631
164
164
259
164
258
164
164
260
164
164
264
Relative
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
.000
.587
.997
0.
0.
.761
.994
.802
.997
0.
0.
.930
.998
.994
.998
.998
.998
1.
.127
.000
.147
0.997
1
1
1
1.
.216
.000
1.
.320
0.998
• 1
- 0
• 1
641
717
• 0
• 1
• 0
• 1
835
844
• 0
- 1
• 1
• 1
• 1
• 1
028
• 1
• 1
• 1
• 1
179
• 1
• 1
273
• 1
• 1
Level
(3)
(?) (ug/ml)
.000
.618
.010
.783
.009
.322
.006
.943
.003
.005
.004
.009
.004
.149
.005
.175
.006
.249
.002
.363
.002
10
10
10
20
20
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
50
SO
50
50
20
20
50
50
low
solids
(ug/kg)
18
39
24
41
46
32
58
565
287
385
51
high
solids
(U9/lt9
10
44
116
62
111
55
37
642
11
83
207
(1) Reference numbers beginning with 0, 1, 5, or 9 indicate a pollutant
quantified by the internal standard method; reference numbers beginning
with 2 or 6 indicate a labeled compound quantified by the internal standard
method; reference numbers beginning with 3 or 7 indicate a pollutant quan-
tified by isotope dilution.
(2) Single values in this column are based on single laboratory data
(3) This is a minimum level at which the analytical system shall give
recognizable mass spectra (background corrected) and acceptable calibration
points. The concentration in the aqueous or solid phase is determined
using the equations in section 14.
(4) Method detection limits determined in digested sludge (low solids) and
in filter cake or compost (high solids).
*Background levels of these compounds were present in the sludge resulting
in higher than expected MDL's. The MOL for these compounds is expected to
be approximately 50 ug/kg with no interferences present.
(5) Specification derived from related compound.
Column: 30 +/- 2 m x 0.25 +/- 0.02 mm i.d. 94% methyl, 4% phenyl, 1% vinyl
bonded phase fused silica capillary
Temperature program: 5 min at 30 °C; 30 - 250 °C or until pentachlorophenol
elutes
1625C D-188
-------
Gas velocity: 30 +/- 5 cm/sec at 30 °C
1625C D-189
-------
Table 7
DFTPP Mass-intensity Specifications*
Mass Intensity required
51 8-82 percent of m/z 198
68 less than 2 percent of m/z 69
69 11 - 91 percent of m/z 198
70 less than 2 percent of m/z 69
127 32 - 59 percent of m/z 198
197 less than 1 percent of m/z 198
198 base peak, 100 percent abundance
199 4-9 percent of m/z 198
275 11 - 30 percent of m/z 198
441 44 - 110 percent of m/z 442
442 30 - 86 percent of m/z 198
443 14 - 24 percent of m/z 442
^Reference 6
1625C D-190
-------
Table 8
Base/neutral Extractable Compound Characteristic m/z's and Response
Factors
Labeled Primary Response
Compound analog m/z Factor U
acenaphthene dlO 154/164
acenaphthylene d8 152/160
acetophenone 105* 0.79
4-aminobiphenyl 169 0.81
aniline 93 1.04
o-anisidine 108 0.43
anthracene dlO 178/188
aramite 185 0.19
benzanthrone 230 0.15
1,3-benzenediol 110 0.78
benzenethiol 110 0.18
benzidine d8 184/192
benzo(a)anthracene d!2 228/240
benzo(b)fluoranthene dl2 252/264
benzo(k)fluoranthene d!2 252/264
benzo(a)pyrene d!2 252/264
benzo(ghi)perylene d!2 276/288
2,3-benzofluorene 216 0.35
benzoic acid 105 0.16
benzyl alcohol 79 0.47
biphenyl dlO 154/164
bis(2-chloroethyl) ether d8 93/101
iis(2-chloroethoxy)methane d8 93/97
bis(2-chloroisopropyl) ether dl2 121/131
bis(2-ethylhexyl) phthalate d4 149/153
2-bromochlorobenzene 111 0.33
3-bromochlorobenzene 192 0.40
4-bromophenyl phenyl ether d5 248/255
butyl benzyl phthalate d4 149/153
n-CIO d22 55/66
n-C12 d26 55/66
n-C14 55
n-C16 d34 55/66
n-C18 55
n-C20 d42 55/66
n-C22 55
n-C24 d50 55/66
n-C26 55
n-C28 55
n-C30 d62 55/66
carbazole d8 167/175
4-chloro-2-nitroaniline 172 0.20
5-chloro-o-toluidine 106 0.50
4-chloroaniline 127 0.73
2-chloronaphthalene d7 162/169
3-chloronitrobenzene 157 0.18
4-chlorophenyl phenyl ether d5 204/209
3-chloropropionitrile 54 0.42
chrysene d!2 228/240
o-cresol 108 0.59
crotoxyphos 127 0.017
1625C D-191
-------
p-cymene dl4
2,6-di-tert-butyl-p-benzoquinone
di-n-butyl phthalate d4
2,4-diaminotoluene
dibenzo(a,h)anthracene d!4
dibenzofuran da
dibenzothiophene d8
1,2-dibromo-3-chloropropane
2,6-dichloro-4-nitroaniline
1,3-dichloro-2-propanol
2,3-dichloroaniline
1,2-dichlorobenzene d4
1,3-dichlorobenzene d4
1,4-dichlorobenzene d4
3,3'-dichlorobenzidine d6
2,2'-difluorobiphenyl (int std)
2,3-dichloronitrobenzene
1,2:3,4-diepoxybutane
diethyl phthalate d4
3,3'-dimethoxybenzidine
dimethyl phthalate d4
dimethyl sulfone
p-dimethylaminoazobenzene
7,12-dimethylbenz(a)anthracene
N,N-dimethylfonnamide
3,6-dimethylphenanthrene
2,4-dimethylphenol d3
1,3-dinitrobenzene
2,4-dinitrotoluene d3
2,6-dinitrotoluene d3
di-n-octyl phthalate d4
diphenylamine dlO
diphenyl ether dlO
diphenyldisulfide
1,2-diphenylhydrazine (2) dlO
ethyl methanesulfonate
ethylenethiourea
ethynylestradiol 3-methyl ether
fluoranthene dlO
fluorene dlO
hexachlorobenzene 13C6
hexachlorobutadiene 13C4
hexachloroethane 13C
hexachlorocyclopentadiene 13C4
hexachloropropene
indeno(1,2,3-cd)pyrene
isophorone d8
2-isopropyInaphthalene
isosafrole
longifolene
malachite green
methapyrilene
methyl methanesulfonate
2-methylbenzothiazole
3-methylcholanthrene
4,4'-methylenebis(2-chloroaniline)
4,5-methylenephenanthrene
1-methylfluorene
119/130
220
149/153
122
278/292
168/176
184/192
157
124
79
161
146/152
146/152
146/152
252/258
190
191
55
149/153
244
163/167
79
120
256
73
206
122/125
168
165/168
165/167
149/153
169/179
170/180
218
77/82
109
102
227
202/212
166/176
284/292
225/231
201/204
237/241
213
276
82/88
170
162
161
330
97
80
149
268
231
190
180
0.078
0.059
0.22
0.019
0.68
0.47
0.11
0.27
0.19
0.40
0.23
0.58
0.51
0.72
0.24
0.25
0.28
0.22
0.28
0.23
0.32
0.33
0.14
0.43
0.20
0.59
0.59
0.21
0.44
0.37
1625C D-192
-------
2-methylnaphthalene 142
1-methylphenanthrene 192
2-(methylthio)benzothiazole 181
naphthalene d8 128/136
1,5-naphthalenediamine 158
1,4-naphthoquinone 158
alpha-naphthylamine 143
beta-naphthylamine d7 143/150
5-nitro-o-toluidine 152
2-nitroaniline 138
3-nitroaniline 138
4-nitroaniline 138
nitrobenzene d5 128/128
4-nitrobiphenyl 199
N-nitrosodi-n-butylamine 84
N-nitrosodi-n-propylamine dl4 70/78
N-nitrosodiethylamine 102
N-nitrosodimethylamine d6 74/80
N-nitrosodiphenylamine (3) d6 169/175
N-nitrosomethylethylamine 88
N-nitrosomethylphenylamine 106
N-nitrosomorpholine 56
N-nitrosopiperidine 114
pentachlorobenzene 248
pentachloroethane 117
pentamethylbenzene 148
perylene 252
phenacetin 108
phenanthrene dio 178/188
phenol d5 94/71
phenothiazine 199
1-phenylnaphthalene 204
2-phenylnaphthalene 204
alpha-picoline d7 93/100
pronamide 173
pyrene dlO 202/212
pyridine 79
safrole 162
squalene 69
styrene d5 104/109
alpha-terpineol d3 59/62
1,2,4,5-tetrachlorobenzene 216
thianaphthene 134
thioacetamide 75
thioxanthone 212
o-toluidine 106
1,2,3-trichlorobenzene d3 180/183
1,2,4-trichlorobenzene d3 180/183
1,2,3-trimethoxybenzene 168
2,4,5-trimethylaniline 120
triphenylene 228
tripropylene glycol methyl ether 59
1,3,5-trithiane 138
(1) referenced to 2,2'-difluorobiphenyl
(2) detected as azobenzene
(3) detected as diphenylamine
0.99
0.65
0.42
0.085
0.021
0.89
0.31
0.39
0.27
0.11
0.35
0.47
0.45
0.33
0.024
0.49
0.41
0.25
0.20
0.42
0.30
0.38
0.15
0.48
0.73
0.31
0.
0.
68
45
0.042
0.43
1.52
0.28
0.23
1.04
0.48
0.28
1.32
0.092
0.15
1625C D-193
-------
Table 9
Acid Extractable Compound Characteristic m/z's
Compound
benzoic acid
4-chloro-3-methylphenol
2-chlorophenol
p-cresol
3,5-dibromo-4-hydroxybenzonitrile
2,4-dichlorophenol
2,6-dichlorophenol
2,4-dinitrophenol
hexanoic acid
2-methyl-4,6-dinitrophenol
2-nitrophenol
4-nitrophenol
pentachlorophenol
2,3,4,6-tetrachlorophenol
2,3,6-trichlorophenol
2,4,5-trichlorophenol
2,4,6-trichlorophenol
Labeled
analog
d2
d4
d3
d3
d2
d4
d4
d2
d2
d2
Primary m/z
105
107/109
128/132
108
277
162/167
162
184/187
60
198/200
139/143
139/143
266/272
232
196/200
196/200
196/200
Response
Factor
0.16
0.61
0.12
0.42
0.62
0.17
(1) referenced to 2,2'-difluorobiphenyl
1625C D-194
-------
Table 10
Acceptance Criteria for Performance Tests
Acceptance criteria
EGD
No.
( 1 ) Comnound
301 acenaphthene
201 acenaphthene-dlO
377 acenaphthylene
277 acenaphthylene-d8
378 anthracene
278 anthracene-dlO
305 benzidine
205 benzidine-d8
372 benzo( a) anthracene
272 benzo(a) anthracene-d!2
374 benzo(b) fluoranthene
274 benzo(b) fluoranthene-d!2
375 benz o ( k ) f luor anthene
275 benzo(k) fluoranthene-d!2
373 benzo(a)pyrene
273 benzo(a)pyrene-d!2
379 benzo(ghi)perylene
279 benzo(ghi)perylene-d!2
712 biphenyl (Appendix C)
612 biphenyl-dlO
318 bis(2-chloroethyl) ether
218 bis(2-chloroethyl) ether-d8
343 bis (2-chloroethoxy ) methane
Initial
precision
and accuracy
Section 8.2.3
rucr/IO
labeled
compound
recovery
Sec 8.3
and 14.2
s X P (%)
21
38
38
31
41
49
119
269
20
41
183
168
26
114
26
24
21
45
41
43
34
33
27
243 bis ( 2-chloroethoxy )methane-d8 (3) 33
342 bis (2-chloroisopropyl) ether
242 bis (2-chloroisopropyl) ether-d!2
366 bis(2-ethylhexyl) phthalate
266 bis(2-ethylhexyl) phthalate-d4
341 4-bromophenyl phenyl ether
241 4-bromophenylphenyl ether-d5(3)
367 butyl benzyl phthalate
267 butyl benzyl phthalate-d4 (3)
717 n-ClO (Appendix C)
617 n-C10-d22
706 n-C12 (Appendix C)
606 n-C12-d26
518 n-C14 (Appendix C) (3)
719 n-C16 (Appendix C)
619 n-C16-d34
520 n-C18 (Appendix C) (3)
721 n-C20 (Appendix C)
621 n-C20-d42
522 n-C22 (Appendix C) (3)
723 n-C24 (Appendix C)
623 n-C24-d50
524 n-C26 (Appendix C) (3)
525 n-C28 (Appendix C) (3)
17
27
31
29
44
52
31
29
51
70
74
53
109
33
46
39
59
34
31
11
28
35
35
79
38
69
39
58
31
16
ns
65
25
32
11
59
15
62
35
72
29
75
28
55
29
43
29
81
35
69
32
44
40
19
32
24
ns
35
ns
ns
30
37
42
53
34
45
80
27
35
35
-
-
-
-
—
-
-
(2)
-
-
-
-
-
-
—
—
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
—
—
-
—
-
-
—
-
-
—
-
-
—
-
—
134
147
186
146
174
194
518
ns
168
298
545
577
143
514
195
181
160
268
148
165
196
196
153
196
138
149
220
205
140
161
233
205
195
298
369
331
ns
162
162
131
263
172
152
139
211
193
193
20
23
14
ns
12
ns
ns
21
14
ns
15
15
20
18
19
18
ns
ns
18
19
15
- 270
- 239
- 419
ns
- 605
- ns
ns
- 290
- 529
- ns
- 372
- 372
- 260
- 364
- 325
- 364
ns
- ns
- 308
- 306
- 376
calibra-
tion
verifi-
cation
Sec 12.5
(ua/mL)
80
71
60
66
60
58
34
ns
70
28
61
14
13
13
78
12
69
13
58
52
61
52
44
52
67
44
76
43
52
57
22
43
42
44
60
41
37
72
54
40
54
62
40
65
50
26
26
-
—
—
—
—
-
-
-
-
-
—
—
-
-
—
—
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
—
—
—
-
-
—
—
-
—
-
-
—
-
-
—
-
-
—
-
—
125
141
166
152
168
171
296
ns
142
357
164
ns
ns
ns
129
ns
145
ns
171
192
164
194
228
194
148
229
131
232
193
175
450
232
235
227
166
242
268
138
186
249
184
162
249
154
199
392
392
On-going
accuracy
Sec 12.7
R (ua/L)
72
30
61
33
50
23
11
ns
62
22
20
ns
53
ns
59
32
58
25
62
17
50
25
39
25
77
30
64
28
35
29
35
28
19
ns
29
ns
ns
71
28
35
46
29
39
78
25
31
31
- 144
- 180
- 207
- 168
- 199
- 242
- 672
ns
- 176
- 329
- ns
ns
- 155
- 685
- 206
- 194
- 168
- 303
- 176
- 267
- 213
- 222
- 166
- 222
- 145
- 169
- 232
- 224
- 172
- 212
- 170
- 224
- 237
- 504
- 424
- 408
ns
- 181
- 202
- 167
- 301
- 198
- 195
- 142
- 229
- 212
- 212
1625C D-195
-------
726 n-C30 (Appendix C)
626 n-C30-d62
728 carbazole (4c)
628 carbazole-d8 (3)
320 2-chloronaphthalene
220 2-chloronaphthalene-d7
322 4-chloro-3-methyIphenol
222 4-chloro-3-methylphenol-d2
324 2-chlorophenol
224 2-chlorophenol-d4
340 4-chlorophenyl phenyl ether
240 4-chlorophenyl phenyl ether-d5
376 chrysene
276 chrysene-d!2
713 p-cymene (Appendix C)
613 p-cymene-d!4
332 dibenzo(a,h)anthracene
282 dibenzo(a,h)anthracene-d!4 (3)
705 dibenzofuran (Appendix C)
605 dibenzofuran-d8
704 dibenzothiophene (Synfuel)
604 dibenzothiophene-d8
368 di-n-butyl phthalate
268 di-n-butyl phthalate-d4
325 1,2-dichlorobenzene
225 l,2-dichlorobenzene-d4
326 1,3-dichlorobenzene
226 l,3-dichlorobenzene-d4
327 1,4-dichlorobenzene
227 l,4-dichlorobenzene-d4
328 3,3'-dichlorobenzidine
228 3,3'-dichlorobenz idine-d6
331 2,4-dichlorophenol
231 2,4-dichlorophenol-d3
370 diethyl phthalate
270 diethyl phthalate-d4
334 2,4-dimethyIphenol
234 2,4-diaethyIphenol-d3
371 dimethyl phthalate
271 dimethyl phthalate-d4
359 2,4-dinitrophenol
259 2,4-dinitrophenol-d3
335 2,4-dinitrotoluene
235 2,4-dinitrotoluene-d3
336 2,6-dinitrotoluene
236 2,6-dinitrotoluene-d3
369 di-n-octyl phthalate
269 di-n-octyl phthalate-d4
707 diphenylamine (Appendix C)
607 diphenylamine-dlO
708 diphenyl ether (Appendix C)
608 diphenyl ether-dlO
337 1,2-diphenylhydrazine
237 1,2-diphenylhydrazine-dlO
339 fluoranthene
239 fluoranthene-dio
380 fluorene
280 fluorene-dlO
32
41
38
31
100
41
37
111
13
24
42
52
51
69
18
67
55
45
20
31
31
31
15
23
17
35
43
48
42
48
26
80
12
28
44
78
13
22
36
108
18
66
18
37
30
59
16
46
45
42
19
37
73
35
33
35
29
43
61 -
27 -
36 -
48 -
46 -
30 -
76 -
30 -
79 -
36 -
75 -
40 -
59 -
33 -
76 -
ns -
23 -
29 -
85 -
47 -
79 -
48 -
76 -
23 -
73 -
14 -
63 -
13 -
61 -
15 -
68 -
ns -
85 -
38 -
75 -
ns -
62 -
15 -
74 -
ns -
72 -
22 -
75 -
22 -
80 -
44 -
77 -
12 -
58 -
27 -
82 -
36 -
49 -
31 -
71 -
36 -
81 -
51 -
200
242
165
130
357
168
131
174
135
162
166
161
186
219
140
359
299
268
136
136
150
130
165
195
146
212
201
203
194
193
174
562
131
164
196
260
153
228
188
640
134
308
158
245
141
184
161
383
205
206
136
155
308
173
177
161
132
131
13
29
15
ns
23
19
13
ns
14
28
29
13
ns
ns
ns
ns
24
ns
ns
ns
ns
10
17
ns
11
19
17
20
27
- 479
- 215
- 324
- 613
- 255
- 325
- 512
ns
- 529
- 220
- 215
- 346
- 494
- 550
- 474
- ns
- 260
ns
- 449
- ns
- ns
- 514
- 442
- ns
- 488
- 281
- 316
- 278
- 238
66 -
24 -
44 -
69 -
58 -
72 -
85 -
68 -
78 -
55 -
71 -
57 -
70 -
24 -
79 -
66 -
13 -
13 -
73 -
66 -
72 -
69 -
71 -
52 -
74 -
61 -
65 -
52 -
62 -
65 -
77 -
18 -
67 -
64 -
74 -
47 -
67 -
58 -
73 -
50 -
75 -
39 -
79 -
53 -
55 -
36 -
71 -
21 -
57 -
59 -
83 -
77 -
75 -
58 -
67 -
47 -
74 -
61 -
152
423
227
145
171
139
115
147
129
180
142
175
142
411
127
152
761
ns
136
150
140
145
142
192
135
164
154
192
161
153
130
558
149
157
135
211
150
172
137
201
133
256
127
187
183
278
140
467
176
169
120
129
134
174
149
215
135
164
56
23
31
40
35
24
62
14
76
33
63
29
48
23
72
ns
19
25
79
39
70
40
74
22
70
11
55
ns
53
11
64
ns
83
34
65
ns
60
14
67
ns
68
17
72
19
70
31
74
10
51
21
77
29
40
26
64
30
70
38
- 215
- 274
- 188
- 156
- 442
- 204
- 159
- 314
- 138
- 176
- 194
- 212
- 221
- 290
- 147
- 468
- 340
- 303
- 146
- 160
- 168
- 156
- 169
- 209
- 152
- 247
- 225
- 260
- 219
- 245
- 185
ns
-135
- 182
- 222
ns
- 156
- 242
- 207
ns
- 141
- 378
- 164
- 275
- 159
- 250
- 166
- 433
- 231
- 249
- 144
- 186
- 360
- 200
- 194
-•187
- 151
- 172
1625C D-196
-------
309 hexachlorobenzene
209 hexachlorobenzene-13C6
352 hexachlorobutadiene
252 hexachlorobutadiene-13C4
312 hexachloroethane
212 hexachloroethane-13Cl
353 hexachlorocyclopentadiene
253 hexachlorocyclopentadiene-13C4
083 ideno(l,2,3-cd)pyrene (3)
354 isophorone
254 isophorone-d8
360 2-methyl-4,6-dinitrophenol
260 2-methyl-4,6-dinitrophenol-d2
355 naphthalene
255 naphthalene-dS
702 beta-naphthylamine (Appendix C)
602 beta-naphthylamine-d7
356 nitrobenzene
256 nitrobenzene-d5
357 2-nitrophenol
257 2-nitrophenol-d4
358 4-nitrophenol
258 4-nitrophenol-d4
361 N-nitrosodimethylamine
261 N-nitrosodimethylamine-d6 (3)
363 N-nitrosodi-n-propylamine
263 N-nitrosodi-n-propylamine (3)
362 N-nitrosodiphenylamine
262 N-nitrosodiphenylamine-d6
364 pentachlorophenol
264 pentachlorophenol-13C6
381 phenanthrene
281 phenanthrene-dlO
365 phenol
265 phenol-d5
703 alpha-picoline (Synfuel)
603 alpha-picoline-d7
384 pyrene
284 pyrene-dlO
710 styrene (Appendix C)
610 styrene-d5
709 alpha-terpineol (Appendix C)
609 alpha-terpineol-d3
729 i,2,3-trichlorobenzene (4c)
629 l,2,3-trichlorobenzene-d3 (3)
308 1,2,4-trichlorobenzene
208 l,2,4-trichlorobenzene-d3
530 2,3,6-trichlorophenol (4c) (3)
731 2,4,5-trichlorophenol (4c)
631 2,4,5-trichlorophenol-d2 (3)
321 2,4,6-trichlorophenol
221 2,4,6-trichlorophenol-d2
(1) Reference numbers beginning with 0, 1 or 5 indicate a pollutant quan-
tified by the internal standard method; reference numbers beginning with 2
or 6 indicate a labeled compound quantified by the internal standard
method; reference numbers beginning with 3 or 7 indicate a pollutant quan-
tified by isotope dilution.
16
81
56
63
227
77
15
60
55
25
23
19
64
20
39
49
33
25
28
15
23
42
138
49
33
45
37
45
37
21
49
13
40
36
161
38
138
19
29
42
49
44
48
69
57
19
57
30
30
47
57
47
90
36
51
ns
21
ns
69
ns
23
76
49
77
36
80
28
10
ns
69
18
78
41
62
14
10
ns
65
54
65
54
76
37
93
45
77
21
59
11
76
32
53
ns
42
22
15
15
82
15
58
58
43
59
43
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
124
228
251
316
ns
400
144
ns
299
156
133
133
247
139
157
ns
ns
161
265
140
145
146
398
ns
ns
142
126
142
126
140
212
119
130
127
210
149
380
152
176
221
281
234
292
229
212
136
212
137
137
183
205
183
13
ns
ns
ns
33
16
14
ns
ns
27
ns
ns
26
26
18
24
ns
ns
18
ns
ns
ns
ns
21
21
- 595
ns
ns
ns
- 193
- 527
- 305
- ns
ns
- 217
ns
ns
- 256
- 256
- 412
- 241
ns
ns
- 303
- ns
- 672
- 592
- 592
- 363
- 363
78
33
74
68
71
47
77
47
13
70
52
69
56
73
71
39
44
85
46
77
61
55
35
39
44
63
59
63
59
77
42
75
67
65
48
60
31
76
43
65
44
54
20
60
61
78
61
56
56
69
81
69
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
128
265
135
148
141
212
129
211
761
142
194
145
177
137
141
256
230
115
219
129
163
183
287
256
230
148
170
148
170
130
237
133
149
155
208
165
324
132
210
153
223
186
502
167
163
128
163
180
180
144
123
144
85
23
43
ns
13
ns
67
ns
19
70
44
72
28
75
22
ns
ns
65
15
75
37
51
ns
ns
ns
53
40
53
40
71
29
87
34
62
ns
50
ns
72
28
48
ns
38
18
11
10
77
10
51
51
34
48
34
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
132
321
287
413
ns
563
148
ns
340
168
147
142
307
149
192
ns
ns
169
314
145
158
175
ns
ns
ns
173
166
173
166
150
254
126
168
154
ns
174
608
159
196
244
348
258
339
297
282
144
282
153
153
226
244
226
1625C D-197
-------
(2) ns = no specification: limit is outside the range that can be measured
reliably.
(3) This compound is to be determined by internal standard; specification
is derived from related compound.
10-
ui
K
IU
> 1.0-
0.1-
I I I I
2 10 20 90 100 200
CONCENTRATION (ug/mU
<3A)
AREA -48100
AREA -4780
(3Q
AREA. 49800
AREA .43600
AREA-48300
FIGURE 1 Relative Response Calibration Curve
for Phenol. The Dotted Lines Enclose a ± 10
Percent Error Window.
FIGURE 3 Extracted Ion Current Profiles for (3A)
Unlabeled Compound, (38) Labeled Compound,
and (3C) Equal Mixture of Unlabeled and Labeled
Compounds.
FIGURE 2 Extracted Ion Current Profiles for
Chromatographically Resolved Labeled (m^z) and
Unlabeled (mjz) Pairs.
1625C D_198
-------
[10.2.1 &
10.2.3]
[10.2.1.3 &
10.2.3.2]
[10.2.3.3]
[10.2.4]
STANDARD
1 L REAGENT
WATER
BLANK
SPIKE 500 uL
OF 200 ug/mL
ISOTOPES
[10.3 &
10.3.2]
[10.3.4]
[10.5]
[10.6]
111.31
[11.41
SPIKE 1.0 mL
OF STANDARDS
STIR AND
EQUILIBRATE
1 L REAGENT
WATER
«!
s
SPIKE 500 uL
OF 200 ug/mL
ISOTOPES
\
t
STIR AND
EQUILIBRATE
SAMPLE
1 L ALIQUOT
SPIKE 500 uL
Of 200 pg/mL
ISOTOPES
STIR AND
EQUILIBRATE
STANDARDOR BLANK
EXTRACT BASE/
NEUTRAL
EXTRACT BASE/
NEUTRAL
ORGANIC I AQUEOUS
ORGANIC
AQUEOUS
EXTRACT ACID
CONCENTRATE
TO 2-4 mL
CONCENTRATE
TO 2-4 mL
CONCENTRATE
TO 1.0 mL
EXTRACT ACID
CONCENTRATE
TO 1.0 mL
ADD INTERNAL
STANDARD
CONCENTRATE
TOLOmL
ADD INTERNAL
STANDARD
INJECT
ADO INTERNAL
STANDARD
INJECT
INJECT
FIGURE 4 Flow Chart for Extraction/Concentration of Precision and Recovery Standard, Blank,
and Sample by Method 1629. Numbers In Brackets [ ] Refer to Section Numbers in the Metnod.
1625C D-199
-------
MWM
1 1 1 1 1 I 1 1 1
, ANTHRACENE-OW
> * * *
•
K
2*000
123456789 10
ANALYSIS NUMBER
O
3
ui ui 1.10-
II
C X 0-M
ANTHRACENE
I I I I I I I I I
an an an an as a/2 aa aa SM ass
DATE ANALYZED
+ 3»
-3»
FIGURE 5 Quality Control Charts Showing Area (top graph) and
Relative Response of Anthracene to Anthracene-d10 (lower graph)
Plotted as a Function of Time or Analysis Number.
»IC 0»T(N aWIOtlCC II SCCMC 1 TO
H-lSs* Jl24tW Cm.li iMMIOUiC II
»4»LEl W.C.UO.MIN.W.C.NMW.NM
COOS.: IS25«.».».»• »3t,*-2MM.I3tMi.3«^f
MWCl C 1.33W UHLt H :. J.t MM * 2. 2.» J « IMSt U 2t. 3
I
,
ISlW
MM SCW
47:3* TII«
FIGURE 6 Chromatogram of Combined Acid/base/neutral Standard.
1625C D-200
-------
Appendix A: Mass Spectra in the Form of Mass/Intensity Lists
555
m/z
42
61
75
105
acetophenone
int. m/z
21 43
13
36
1000
62
76
106
int.
245
26
62
87
m/z
49
63
77
120
int.
19
422
941
479
m/z
50
65
78
121
int.
221
31
11
38
m/z
51
73
89
int.
524
13
12
m/z
52
74
91
int.
75
64
22
556 4-aminobiphenyl
m/z int. m/z int.
51 55 63 65
139 65 141 132
557 aniline
m/z int.
72 82
167 163
m/z int.
83 73
168 280
/z int.
40 65
51
63
91
47
59
10
m/z
41
52
64
92
int.
66
54
33
136
m/z
42
53
65
93
int.
16
12
226
1000
m/z
46
54
66
94
int.
11
40
461
73
IDZ2. .
47
61
74
int.
75
17
11
m/z
50
62
78
int.
40
28
14
558 o-anisidine
m/z
40
53
65
80
108
int.
22
286
142
915
1000
m/z
41
54
66
81
109
int.
43
39
20
41
55
m/z
42
61
76
92
122
int.
10
12
13
47
123
m/z
50
62
77
93
844
int.
60
25
36
14
124
m/z
51
63
68
94
56
int.
106
43
32
18
m/z
52
64
79
105
int.
202
24
25
18
559 aramite
m/z int. m/z int.
41 606 57 758
77 155 91 339
163 143 175 182
319 270 334 137
560 benzanthrone
m/z int. m/z int.
74 69 75 71
101 278 150 58
202 762 203 126
561 1,3-benzenediol
m/z
59
105
185
int.
328
153
1000
m/z
63
107
187
int.
782
239
328
m/z
65
121
191
int.
235
107
346
m/z
74
123
197
int.
113
120
191
m/z
87
174
230
int.
97
67
1000
m/z
88
199
231
int.
160
63
177
m/z
99
200
int.
69
350
m/z
100
201
int.
215
236
m/z
40
51
62
71
111
int.
64
54
27
16
51
m/z
41
52
63
81
int.
19
29
74
201
m/z
52
53
64
32
int.
42
184
61
251
m/z
43
54
65
95
int.
36
89
13
13
m/z
49
55
68
109
int.
11
97
56
11
m/z
50
61
69
110
int.
43
15
119
1000
m/z
51
73
89
m/z
85
169
m/z
47
61
74
m/z
51
63
68
94
56
m/z
65
121
191
m/z
99
200
m/z
49
55
68
109
int.
524
13
12
int.
163
1000
int.
75
17
11
int.
106
43
32
18
int.
235
107
346
int.
69
350
int.
11
97
56
11
562 benzenethiol
m/z int. m/z int. m/z int. m/z int. m/z int.
45 128 50 149 51 205 65 175 66 505
77 161 84 259 109 316 110 1000 111 102
m/z int.
115 142
170 216
m/z int.
69 114
1625C D-201
-------
563 2,3-benzofluorene
m/z int. m/z int. m/z int. m/z int. m/z int. m/z int.
74 52 81 69 94 143 95 253 106 60 107 205
108 491 187 75 189 90 213 233 214 60 215 987
216 1000 217 166
943 benzoic acid
m/z int. m/z int. m/z int. m/z int. m/z int. m/z int.
45 29 50 221 51 413 52 45 66 11 74 53
75 25 76 81 77 778 78 76 105 1000 122 868
564 benzyl alcohol
m/z
40
61
75
89
108
int.
17
11
13
65
737
m/z
59
62
76
90
109
int.
16
31
18
64
43
m/z
50
63
77
91
int.
155
70
565
125
m/z
51
64
78
105
int.
319
12
116
38
m/z
52
65
79
106
int.
78
75
1000
18
m/z
53
74
80
107
int.
84
35
73
523
565 2-bromochlorobenzene
m/z. int. 2L/2. int. m/£ int.
49 237 50 890 51 183
76 202 111 961 113 287
566 3-bromochlorobenzene
m/z int. m/z int. m/z int.
49 201 50 834 51 174
76 197 111 1000 113 301
567 4-chloro-2-nitroaniline
m/z int. m/z int. m/z int.
49 119 50 174 51 260
63 1000 64 315 65 192
76 127 78 152 90 724
126 766 128 234 142 211
568 5-chloro-o-toluidine
m/z int. m/z int. m/z int.
50 115 51 261 52 257
79 140 89 152 106 1000
143 313
569 4-chloroaniline
m/z int. m/z int. m/z int.
41 60 62 55 63 147
91 63 92 186 99 67
129 292
570 3-chloronitrobenzene
m/2L int. m/z int. i/i int.
50 619 51 189 73 144
85 101 99 258 111 851
571 o-cresol
m/z int. m/z int. m/z int.
50 102 51 181 53 144
89 114 90 231 107 783
m/z. int.
73 158
190 638
m/z int.
73 169
190 625
m/z int.
53 137
140 599
m/z int.
64 135
100 115
int.
74 330
113 266
m/z int.
77 358
108 1000
m/z
74
192
m/z
74
192
int.
506
809
int.
509
802
m/z
75
194
m/z
75
194
int.
1000
193
int.
914
191
m/z
52
73
91
172
int.
531
290
253
915
m/z
61
74
101
174
int.
205
105
232
289
m/z
62
75
114
int.
394
156
312
m/z
77
141
int.
420
964
m/z
78
142
int.
134
265
m/z int.
65 329
127 1000
m/z int.
75 1000
157 424
m/z int.
79 380
m/z int.
73 51
128 81
m/z int.
76 169
159 137
m/z int.
80 159
1625C D-202
-------
944 p-cresol
m/z int. m/z int. m/z int. m/z int.
50 136 51 224 52 106 53 196
80 145 90 122 107 822 108 1000
572 crotoxyphos
m/z int. m/z int. m/z int.
40 633 44 448 67 42
105 484 109 21 127 1000
573 2,6-di-t-butyl-p-benzoquinone
m/z int. m/z int. m/z int.
51 392 53 586 55 325
77 376 79 308 91 456
135 538 136 240 149 429
220 410
574 2,4-diaminotoluene
m/z int. m/z int. m/z int.
40 70 42 55 51 76
67 50 77 147 78 69
105 134 106 67 121 958
575 1,2-dibromo-3-chloropropane
m/z int.
77 420
m/z int.
79 308
m/z int.
104 100
194 20
m/z
57
95
163
int.
668
322
292
m/z
65
107
177
int.
416
248
1000
m/z
67
121
205
int.
927
255
203
m/z int.
52 70
93 63
122 1000
m/z
53
94
123
int.
51
224
79
m/z int.
61 91
104 128
m/z
42
77
106
159
int.
38
331
17
204
m/z
59
81
119
187
int.
341
43
74
10
m/z
51
93
121
int.
104
117
66
m/z
61
95
155
int.
38
106
635
m/z
75
97
157
int.
1000
12
784
m/z
76
105
158
int.
75
67
20
m/z
62
97
178
int.
328
458
134
m/z
63
124
206
int.
588
954
378
m/z
73
126
int.
470
401
945 3,5-dibromo-4-hydroxybenzonitrile
m/z int. m/z int. m/z int. m/z int. m/z int. m/z int.
53 148 61 193 62 222 88 632 117 137 168 152
170 141 275 489 277 1000 279 451
576 2,6-dichloro-4-nitroaniline
m/z int. m/z int. m/z int.
41 206 52 1000 61 523
65 137 89 218 90 443
133 218 160 401 176 431
577 l,3-dichloro-2-propanol
m/z int. m/z int. m/z int.
40 14 42 55 43 503
49 113 50 15 51 37
78 11 79 1000 80 25
578 2,3-dichloroaniline
m/z int. m/z int. m/z int. m/z int. m/z int. m/z
52 138 61 151 62 265 63 455 64 142 65
73 130 90 460 99 202 125 108 126 149 161
163 626 165 101
m/z
44
57
81
int.
22
10
310
m/z
47
61
int.
12
12
m/z
58
75
int.
15
14
int.
105
1000
1625C D-203
-------
579 2,3-dichloronitrobenzene
m/z int.
49 220
74 976
110 204
161 190
m/z int.
50 257
75 743
111 303
163 121
946 2,6-dichlorophenol
m/z int. m/z int.
49 111 62 160
126 260 162 1000
m/z int.
61 150
84 351
133 701
191 411
m/z int.
63 714
164 613
580 l,2:3,4-diepoxybutane
m/z int. m/z int. m/z int.
40 37 41 29 42 83
57 155 58 16 85 13
581 3,3'-dimethoxybenz idine
m/z int. m/z int. m/z int.
65 44 79 222 85 69
122 115 158 154 186 144
245 152
582 dimethyl sulfone
m/z int. m/z int. m/z int.
44 10 45 94 46 29
63 69 64 22 65 19
96 23
583 p-dimethylaminoazobenzene
m/z int. m/z int. m/z int.
42 483 51 181 77 447
104 142 105 190 120 1000
584 7,12-dimethylbenzo(a)anthracene
m/z int. m/z int. m/z int.
101 24 112 34 113 112
125 46 126 81 127 60
237 23 239 313 240 230
252 68 253 33 255 84
585 N,N-dimethylformamide
m/z int. m/z int. m/z int.
40 58 41 79 42 497
57 17 58 83 72 89
586 3,6-dimethyIphenanthrene
m/z int. m/z int. m/z int.
76 113 89 129 94 179
190 193 191 430 205 246
587 1,3-dinitrobenzene
m/z int. m/z int. m/z int.
50 1000 51 131 63 228
76 664 92 240 122 166
m/z int.
62 120
85 166
135 435
193 263
m/z int.
73 132
166 101
m/z int.
43 60
m/z int.
93 84
201 552
m/z int.
47 18
79 1000
m/z int.
78 120
148 160
m/z int.
114 38
128 76
241 433
256 1000
m/z int.
43 115
73 994
m/z int.
101 142
206 1000
m/z int.
64 218
168 399
m/z int.
63 173
86 125
145 580
m/z int.
98 293
m/z int.
55 1000
m/z int.
107 46
229 162
m/z int.
48 69
81 36
m/z int.
79 147
225 676
m/z int.
119 212
215 24
242 61
257 180
m/z int.
44 1000
74 35
m/z int.
102 151
207 159
m/z int.
74 311
m/z int.
73 336
109 1000
147 368
m/z int.
99 117
m/z int.
56 67
m/z int.
115 110
244 1000
m/z
62
94
m/z
91
m/z
120
226
250
m/z
45
m/z
189
int.
14
528
int.
109
int.
296
47
32
int.
19
int.
388
m/z int.
75 623
1625C D-204
-------
588 diphenyldisulfide
m/z int. m/z int. m/z i,nt.
50 153 51 293 65 671
110 132 154 191 185 117
589 ethyl methanesulfonate
m/z int. m/z int. m/z int.
42 16 43 72 45 208
64 22 65 93 79 1000
97 206 109 579 111 18
590 ethylenethiourea
m/z int. m/z int. m/z int.
41 46 42 126 45 97
73 151 102 1000
591 ethynylestradiol 3-methyl ether
m/z int. m/z int. m/z int.
41 155 53 101 91 157
160 115 173 199 174 313
310 516 '
592 hexachloropropene
m/z int. m/z int. m/z int.
47 131 71 333 106 334
141 206 143 196 211 631
947 hexanoic acid
m/z int. m/z int. m/z int.
41 627 42 535 43 214
56 90 57 102 60 1000
73 412 74 56 87 98
593 2-isopropylnaphthalene
m/z int. m/z int. m/z int.
51 100 63 111 76 157
128 216 152 133 153 184
170 368
594 isosafrole
m/z int. m/z int. m/z int.
50 110 51 222 63 127
104 441 131 371 132 107
595 longifolene
m/z int. m/z int. m/z int.
53 438 55 719 65 346
91 1000 93 611 94 546
119 394 133 338 161 568
596 malachite green
m/z int. m/z int. m/z int.
118 113 126 313 165 369
237 158 253 1000 254 160
m/z int.
46 42
m/z int.
115 143
227 1000
m/z int.
108 200
213 1000
m/z int.
45 186
61 66
m/z int.
77 129
154 114
m/z int.
77 277
135 129
m/z int.
67 453
95 404
204 172
m/z int.
208 135
329 189
m/z int.
77 141
m/z int.
59 19
81 42
124 33
m/z int.
59 14
m/z int.
147 226
228 149
m/z int.
117 329
215 623
m/z int.
46 19
69 21
m/z int.
115 147
155 1000
m/z int.
78 208
161 250
m/z int.
77 566
105 614
m/z int.
209 233
330 775
m/z
109
int.
63 23
96 16
m/z int.
72 89
m/z int.
159 132
242 153
m/z int.
119 320
217 186
m/z int.
55 128
70 20
m/z int.
127 131
156 139
m/z int.
103 355
162 1000
m/z int.
69 713
107 475
m/z int.
210 181
331 170
1625C D-205
-------
597 methapyriline
m/z int. m/z int. m/z int. m/z int.
42 72 45 47 53 40 58 1000
78 54 79 48 97 516 190 40
598 methyl methanesulfonate
m/z int. m/z int. m/z int. m/z int.
45 178 56 15 48 108 50 26
65 285 78 27 79 821 80 1000
95 137 109 59 110 60
599 2-methylbenzothiozole
m/z int. m/z int. m/z int. m/z int.
45 152 50 133 58 153 62 106
82 204 108 392 109 102 148 279
900 3-methylcholanthrene
m/z int. m/z int. m/z int. m/z int.
113 58 ' 119 55 125 83 126 305
134 160 250 56 252 322 253 271
266 50 267 192 268 1000 269 185
901 4,4'-methylenebis(2-chloroaniline)
m/z int. m/z int. m/z int. m/z int.
77 190 84 107 98 299 104 133
195 352 229 228 231 1000 233 227
267 144 268 358
902 4,5-methylenephenanthrene
m/z int. m/z int. m/z int.
50 50 62 55 63 95
87 60 94 255 95 659
189 900 190 1000
903 1-methylfluorene
m/z
71
191
133
67
m/z int.
63 35
81 44
m/z
63
149
m/z
132
263
m/z
115
265
int.
309
1000
int.
99
59
int.
226
171
m/z
50
76
139
166
181
intT
66
196
54
136
99
m/z
51
83
151
176
int.
87
135
73
96
m/z
62
87
152
177
int.
57
53
124
52
m/z
63
88
163
178
int.
137
78
57
202
m/z
74
89
164
179
int.
64
203
58
182
m/z
75
90
165
180
int.
85
58
1000
686
904 2-methylnaphthalene
m/z
50
65
76
114
141
int.
29
19
14
13
748
m/z
51
69
77
115
142
int.
39
56
15
303
1000
m/z
57
70
36
116
143
int.
28
25
13
25
105
m/z
58
71
87
126
int.
47
126
18
13
SL/s
62
74
89
139
int.
26
25
42
98
m/z
63
75
113
140
int.
65
23
19
24
905 1-methylphenanthrene
m/z int. m/z int. m/z int.
51 54 63 86 70 62
96 132 163 55 165 217
193 152
m/z
74
163
m/z
63
88
163
178
m/z
58
71
87
126
m/z
74
189
int.
69
80
int.
137
78
57
202
int.
47
126
18
13
int.
51
165
m/z int.
81 145
187 213
m/z
81
191
int.
52
532
m/z int.
72 225
m/z int.
64 48
82 33
m/z
69
150
m/z
133
265
m/z
140
266
m/z
86
188
int.
513
110
int.
122
106
int.
316
631
int.
53
137
m/z
83
192
int.
164
1000
1625C D-206
-------
m/z int.
69 578
181 1000
m/z int.
79 111
157 89
m/z int.
66 69
103 52
m/z int.
82 233
m/z int.
103 86
158 1000
m/z int.
74 189
104 550
m/z int.
108 627
m/z int.
118 52
159 117
m/z int.
75 205
130 433
m/z
57
72
142
int.
36
104
53
m/z
59
89
143
int.
46
62
1000
m/z
62
113
144
int.
28
22
101
m/z
63
114
int.
59
34
906 2-(raethylthio)benzothiazole
m/z int. m/z int. m/z int.
45 790 50 212 63 383
136 239 148 938 180 250
907 1,5-naphthalenediamine
m/z int. m/z int. m/z int.
51 48 65 83 77 75
130 262 131 40 141 43
908 1,4-naphthoquinone
m/z int. ro/z int. m/z int.
50 445 51 62 52 52
76 590 101 51 102 613
158 1000 159 100
909 alpha-naphthylamine
m/z int. m/z int.
50 25 51 31
65 27 71 58
115 401 116 212
910 5-nitro-o-toluidine
m/z int. m/z int. m/z int. m/z int. m/z int. m/z int.
51 194 52 159 53 121 77 766 78 176 79 619
94 168 104 120 106 691 152 1000
911 2-nitroaniline
m/z int. m/z int.
41 64 50 51
63 181 64 155
92 566 108 170
912 3-nitroaniline
m/z int. m/z int. m/z int. m/z int. m/z int. m/z
41 101 52 120 53 59 62 58 63 143 64
65 1000 66 114 80 169 91 62 92 764 93
108 87 138 717 139 51
913 4-nitroaniline
m/z int. m/z int. m/z int. m/z int. m/z int. m/z
52 228 53 160 62 110 63 216 64 164 65
66 124 80 266 92 300 108 636 138 520
914 4-nitrobiphenyl
m/z int. m/z int. m/z int. m/g int. m/z ijlt_._
51 131 63 104 76 179 115 134 141 277
152 902 153 284 169 374 199 1000 200 125
915 N-nitroso-di-n-butylamine
m/z int. m/z int. m/z int. m/z int. m/z int.
41 1000 42 536 43 570 44 313 55 129
57 994 84 985 86 103 99 197 115 158
158 161
m/z
51
65
138
int.
89
960
1000
m/z
52
66
139
int.
207
96
63
m/z
53
80
int.
74
212
m/z
62
91
int.
58
86
int.
121
62
int.
1000
m/z
56
116
int.
167
237
1625C D-207
-------
916 N-nitrosodiethylamine
m/2 int. m/2 int. m/2
41 170 42 079 43
56 525 57 492 70
102 807 103 35
917 N-nitrosomethylethylamine
m/z int. m/z int. m/z int.
40 117 42 1000 43 667
57 99 59 13 71 60
918 N-nitrosomethylphenylamine
m/z int. m/z int. m/z int.
50 181 51 434 52 104
79 331 104 147 106 673
919 N-nitrosomorpholine
m/z int. m/z int. m/z int.
41 181 42 192 43 52
56 1000 57 49 85 13
920 N-nitrosopiperidine
m/z int. m/z int. m/z int.
41 320 42 1000 43 43
54 58 55 444 56 224
83 28 84 47 114 491
921 pentachlorobenzene
m/z int. m/z int. m/z int.
73 160 108 239 125 102
217 106 248 648 250 1000
922 pentachloroethane
m/z int. m/z int.
47 203 60 398
95 165 117 1000
165 716 167 901
923 pentamethylbenzene
m/z int. m/z int. m/z irjt.
51 126 53 84 63 61
91 218 105 128 115 120
147 60 148 420
924 perylene
m/z int. m/z int. m/z int.
74 33 111 43 112 70
126 243 224 49 248 75
252 1000 253 219
925 phenacetin
m/z int.. m/z int. m/z int.
43 443 51 33 52 112
65 47 79 31 80 179
110 50 137 461 138 40
m/z int.
44 1000
71 28
m/z int.
44 26
73 57
m/z int.
63 110
107 220
m/z int.
44 17
86 333
m/2 int.
51 14
57 17
115 26
m/z int.
178 102
252 642
m/2 int.
45 20
85 25
m/z int.
54 17
88 772
m/z int.
77 1000
212 137
m/z int.
54 85
87 14
m/z int.
52 12
67 21
m/z int.
213 179
254 199
m/2 int.
65 99
117 91
m/z int.
113 111
249 52
m/z int.
53 164
31 154
179 672
m/z int.
77 145
133 1000
m/z int.
124 132
250 284
m/z int.
63 39
108 1000
180 64
m/z int.
54 18
87 31
m/z int.
56 189
89 20
m/z int.
78 194
m/z int.
55 95
116 337
m/z int.
53 32
82 26
m/2 int.
215 218
m/z
62
119
169
int.
119
979
422
m/z
83
121
int.
378
306
m/z
85
130
int.
218
293
m/z
94
132
int.
114
272
m/z
79
134
m/2
125
251
int.
64
105
int.
251
36
m/2 int.
64 30
109 196
1625C D-208
-------
926 phenothiazine
m/z int. m/z int.
50 145 51 120
166 240 167 607
927 1-phenylnaphthalene
m/z int. m/z int.
50 132 51 156
87 101 88 183
200 144 201 136
928 2-phenyInaphthalene
m/z int. m/z int.
51 108 63 101
102 188 202 398
929 pronamide
m/z int. m/z int.
41 270 66 109
145 334 147 198
256 102 257 122
930 pyridine
m/z int. m/z int.
40 45 48 11
53 112 54 12
78 151 79 1000
931 safrole
m/z int.
50 132
104 477
163 109
m/z int.
51 369
105 130
932 squalene
m/z int. m/z int.
53 62 55 94
79 43 81 465
109 47 121 46
m/z int.
63 134
198 186
m/z int.
63 148
89 162
202 643
m/z int.
76 136
203 270
m/z int.
74 112
173 1000
m/z int.
49 62
55 16
80 101
m/z int.
63 108
131 437
m/z int.
67 105
82 52
137 41
933 1,2,4,5-tetrachlorobenzene
m/z int. m/z int. m/z int.
47 125 49 176 61 127
84 197 108 284 109 231
181 224 214 791 216 1000
948 2,3,4,6-tetrachlorophenol
m/z int. m/z int. m/z int.
61 234 65 167 66 105
97 107 131 463 133 270
196 164 230 793 232 1000
934 thianaphthene
m/z int. m/z int. m/z int.
45 80 50 91 51 65
69 139 74 55 89 191
135 104 136 52
m/z int.
69 190
199 1000
m/z int.
74 124
100 155
203 1000
m/z int.
88 133
204 1000
m/z int.
75 137
175 615
m/z
50
75
81
m/z
77
132
m/z
68
93
int.
324
21
58
int.
391
166
int.
119
70
100
200
int.
128
143
m/z int.
72 183
143 194
218 482
m/z int.
75 142
101 527
204 999
m/z int.
89 158
205 157
m/z int.
84 194
254 133
m/z int.
51 414
76 19
m/z int.
78 228
161 298
m/z int.
69 1000
95 104
m/z int.
73 332
145 117
220 101
m/z int.
154 149
m/z int.
76 136
102 111
205 159
m/z int.
101 333
m/z int.
109 186
255 211
m/z int.
52 879
77 22
m/z int.
103 348
162 1000
m/z
70
107
m/z
74
179
int.
57
43
int.
448
237
m/z
83
166
234
int.
134
298
471
m/z
84
168
int.
178
273
m/z
96
194
int.
202
168
m/z int.
62 82
90 136
m/z int.
63 162
108 82
m/2 int.
67 78
134 1000
1625C D-209
-------
935 thioacetamide
m/z int. m/z int. m/z int. m/z int. m/z int. ro/z int,.
40 225 42 485 43 44 46 18 57 36 58 93
59 165 60 437 75 1000 76 25 77 43
936 thioxanthone
m/z int. m/z int. m/z int. m/z int. m/z int. m/z int.
50 262 63 180 69 320 74 116 69 176 82 121
92 188 108 129 139 385 152 227 183 112 184 951
185 137 212 1000 213 145
937 o-toluidine
m/z int. m/z
40 51 41
52
65
78
104
164
59
113
45
53
66
79
106
int.
38
192
24
243
1000
m/z int.
42 35
53 86
19
74
80
107
80
90
938 1,2,3-trimethoxybenzene
m/z int. m/z int. m/z int.
50 257 51 459 52 139
67 114 77 246 79 132
107 190 108 144 110 898
939 2,4,5-trimethylaniline
m/z int. m/z int. m/z int.
41 80 52 58 51 63
79 62 91 167 93 51
120 1000 121 87 134 670
940 triphenylene
m/z int. m/z int. m/z int.
74 52 87 55 100 107
114 181 200 67 202 56
227 132 228 1000 229 184
941 tripropylene glycol methyl ether
m/z int. m/z int. m/z int.
45 492 46 15 47 19
59 1000 60 34 71 16
103 57 117 92 161 21
942 1,3,5-trithiane
m/z int. m/z int. m/z int.,
46 1000 47 150 48 98
73 102 91 92 92 111
m/z int.
49 10
62 26
65 14
89 107
m/z int.
53 276
82 117
125 578
m/z int.
53 66
117 54
135 978
m/z int.
101 108
224 84
m/z int.
55 17
72 44
m/z int.
59 93
110 58
m/z int.
50 88
63 68
76 21
90 76
m/z int.
63 112
93 483
153 759
m/z int.
65 150
118 65
136 99
m/z int.
112 131
225 56
m/z int.
57 68
73 363
m/z int.
60 76
138 259
m/z int.
51 169
64 30
77 313
91 52
m/z int.
65 341
95 801
168 1000
m/z int.
67 74
119 93
m/z int.
113 244
226 313
m/z int.
58 43
74 232
m/z int.
64 136
1625C D-210
-------
EPA METHOD
NO. 613M
D-211
-------
instrumental chemistry
_ trace analysis
United States Testing Company, Inc. | l^^l analyticalchemistr*
9 M/S*? lilB methods development
Metals and Environmental Chemistry Division | . f (g^ Jig chemical
quality control
1419 PARK AVENUE flBESfiBRS&HRBiaSB failure analyse
HOSOKEN. NEW JERSEY O7O3O (2O1) 792-24OO (212) 943-O488 ' "
August 22, 1986 RUG 2 5 1986
Sample Control Center
300 North Lee Street
Alexandria, VA 22314
Attention: Jim King
Reference: Episodes 1055, 1082, and 1084
Jim,
Enclosed please find the results of analysis for 2,3,7,8-TCDD
and Total Tetra, Penta, Hexa and Hepta Dioxins and Furans for
the above referenced episodes which include samples 15045, 15097,
and 15099.
The following masses were used for identification and quantitation:
Compounds or Class Masses
Total Tetra Dioxin 320,322
Total Tetra Furan 304,306
Total Penta Dioxin 354,356
Total Penta Furan 338,340
Total Hexa Dioxin 390,392
Total Hexa Furan 374,376
Total Hepta Dioxin 424,426
Total Hepta Furan 408,410
* Total Octa Dioxin 458,460
2,3,7,8-TCDD 320, 322, 257
2,3,7,8-TCDD Internal Std. 332, 334
2,3,7,8-TCDD Surrogate 328
OCDD Internal std. 472
* Octa Dioxins and Furans are no longer required but we have
included this data for your information.
D-212
OUR REPORTS AND LETTERS ARE FOR THE EXCLUSIVE USE OF THE CLIENT TO WHOM THEY ARE ADDRESSED. AND THEY AND THE NAME OF THE UNITED STATES TESTING
COMPANY. INC. OR ITS SEALS OR INSIGNIA. ARE NOT TO BE USED UNDER ANY CIRCUMSTANCES IN ADVERTISING 1O THE GENERAL PUBLIC AND MAT NOT BE USED IN
ANY OTHER MANNER WITHOUT OUR PRIOR WRITTEN APPROVAL. SAMPLES NOT DESTROYED IN TESTING ARE RETAINED A MAXIMUM OF THIRTY DAYS
A Memoer of the SGS Group (Societe Generate ae Surveil'ance)
-------
United States Testing Company, Inc.
A sample was considered positive for a given isomer class only
if both of the characteristic ions were present within two scans
of each other.
Detection limits were calculated using the following formula:
DL = (M. + MJ xI-S x 2.5
(M^TMp x RF x V
M. = Peak Height of Noise for First Characteristic Mass
of Anaiyte
M- = Peak Height of Noise for Second Characteristic Mass
of Anaiyte
IS = ng Internal Standard
M, = Peak Height of First Characteristic Mass of
Internal Standard
M^ = Peak Height of Second Characteristic Mass of
Internal Standard
RF = Response Factor
V = Volume of Sample Extracted (liters)
The response factor for TCDD was taken from the initial calibration
of the instrument used for the analyses. Response factors for TCDF,
PCDD, PCDF, HxCDD and HxCDF were calculated by analyzing a mixed
standard of one isomer from each class and determining the ratio of the
response of the anaiyte to the response of 1,2,3,4-TCDD. This ratio was
then applied to the known response factor of 2,3,7,8-TCDD (it was assumed
that 2,3,7,8-TDCC and 1,2,3,*-TCDD have the same response) relative to
the internal standard, and a response factor of each anaiyte relative to the
internal standard was determined.
Response factors for HpCDD, HpCDF and OCDD were determined by
analysis of a mixed standard containing each of the analytes and OCDD
internal standard.
All samples were subjected to the carbopak/celite clean-up described
in the CLP TCDD procedure.
If you have any questions feel free to call.
Sincerely,
UNITED STATES TESTING CO., INC.
Jane M. Dunn
Manager
Environmental Chemistry
3MD/sm D-213
-------
136
Federal Register / Vol. 49, No. 209 / Friday, October 26, 1984 / Rules and Regulations
Method 813—2J.73-Tetrachlorodibenzo-p-
Dioxin
;. Scope and Application
1.1 This method coven the determination
of 2.3,7,8-tetrachlorodibenzo-p-dioxin (2.3.7.8-
TCDD). The following parameter may be
determined by this method:
PvWMf
2 3 7,8-TCOO
STORE!
NO.
34*75
GAS No.
174S-01-6
1.2 This is a gas chromatographic/mass
spectrometer (GC/MS) method applicable to
the determination of 2.3,7,8-TCDD in
municipal and industrial discharges as
provided under 40 CFR 138.1. Method 825
may be used to screen samples for 2.3,7.8-
TCDD. When the screening test is positive,
the final qualitative confirmation and
quantification mlust be made using Method
813.
1.3 The method detection limit (MDL,
defined in Section 14.1)' for 2,3.7,8-TCDD is
listed in Table 1. The MDL for a specific
wastewater may be different from that listed.
depending upon the nature of interferences in
the sample matrix.
1.4 Because of the extreme toxicity of this
compound, the analyst must prevent
exposure to himself, of to others, by materials
knows or believed to contain 2,3,7,8-TCDD.
Section 4 of this method contains guidelines
and protocols that serve as minimum safe-
handling standards in a limited-access
laboratory.
1.5 Any modification of this method,
beyond those expressly permitted, shall be
considered as a major modification subject to
application and approval of alternate test
procedures under 40 CFR 138.4 and 136.5.
1.8 This method is restricted to use by or
under the supervision of analysts
experienced in the use of a gas
chromatograph/maas spectrometer and in the
interpretation of mass spectra. Each analyst
must demonstrate the ability to generate
acceptable results with this method using the
procedure described in Section 8-2.
2. Summary of Method
2.1 A measured volume of sample.
approximately 1-L. is spiked with an internal
standard of labeled 2J.7.8-TCDD and
extracted with methylene chloride using a
separatory funnel The methylene chloride
extract is exchanged to hexane during
concentration to a volume of 1.0 mi or less.
The extract is then analyzed by capillary
column GC/MS to separate and measure
2.3,7,8-TCDD."
2.2 The method provides selected column
chromatographic cleanup proceudres to aid in
the elimination of interferences that may be
encountered.
3. Interferences
3.1 Method interferences may be caused
by contaminants in solvents, reagents,
glassware, and other sample processing
hardware that lead to discrete artifacts and/
or elevated backgrounds at the masses (m/z)
monitored. All of these materials must be
routinely demonstrated to be free from
interferences under the conditions of the
analysis by running laboratory reagent
blanks as described in Section 8.1.3.
3.1.1 Glassware must be scrupulously
cleaned.' Clean all glassware as soon as
possible after use by rinsing with the last
solvent used in it. Solvent nnsing should be
followed by detergent washing with hot
water, and rinses with tap water and distilled
water. The glassware should then be drained
dry, and heated in a muffle furnace at 400 'C
for 15 to 30 min. Some thermally stable
materials, such as PCBs. may not be
eliminated by the treatment. Solvent rinses
with acetone and pesticide quality hexane
may be substituted for the muffle furnace
heating. Thorough rinsing with such solvents
usually eliminates PCB interference.
Volumetric ware should not be heated in a
muffle furnace. After drying and cooling.
glassware should be sealed and stored in a
dean environment to prevent any
accumulation of dust or other contaminants.
Store inverted or capped with aluminum foil.
3.1.2 The use of high purity reagents and
solvents helps to mininmize interference
problems. Purification of solvents by
distillation in all-glass systems may be
required.
3.2 Matrix interferences may be caused
by contaminants that are coextracted from
the sample. The extent of matrix
interferences will vary considerably from
source to source, depending upon the nature
and diversity of the industrial complex or
municipality being sampled. 2,3,7,8-TCDD is
often associated with other interfering
chlorinated compound* which are at
concentrations several magnitudes higher
than that of 2.3.7.8-TCDD. The cleanup
producers in Section 11 can be used to
overcome many of these interferences, but
unique samples may require additional
cleanup approaches L*' to eliminate false
positives and achieve the MDL listed in Table
3.3 The primary column. SP-2330 or
equivalent resolves 2.3,7,8-TCDD from the
other 21 TCDD imomers. Positive results
using any other gas chromatographic column
must be confirmed using the primary column.
* Safety
4.1 The toxicity or carcinogenicity of each
reagent used in this method has not been
precisely defined; however, each chemical
compound should be treated as a potential
health hazard. From this viewpoint, exposure
to these chemical* must be reduced to the
lowest possible level by whatever means
available. The laboratory is responsible for
maintaining a current awareness file of
OSHA regulations regarding the safe
handling of the chemicals specified in this
method. A reference file of material data
handling sheets should also be made
available to all personnel involved in the
chemical analysis. Additional references to
laboratory safety are available and have
been identified '"'• for the information of the
analyst. Benzene and 2,3.7,8-TCDD have been
identified as suspected human or mammalian
carcinogens.
4.2 Each laboratory must develop a strict
safety program for handling 2.3,7.8-TCDD.
The following laboratory practices are
recommended:
D-214
4.2.1 Contamination of the laboratory will
be minimized by conducting all
manipulations in a hood.
4.2.2 The effluents of sample splitters for
the gas chromatograph and roughing pumps
on the GC/MS should pass through either a
column of activated charcoal or be bubbled
through a trap containing oil or high-boiling
alcohols.
4.2.3 Liquid waste should be dissolved in
methanol or ethanol and irradiated with
ultraviolet light with a wavelength greater
than 290 nm for several days. (Use F 40 BL
lamps or equivalent). Analyze liquid wastes
and dispose of the solutions when 2.3.7,8-
TCDD can no longer be detected.
4.3 Dow Chemical U.S.A. has issued the
following precautions (revised November
1978) for safe handling of 2.3,7,8-TCDD in the
laboratory:
4.3.1 The following statements on safe
handling are as complete as possible on the
basis of available lexicological information.
The precautions for safe handling and use are
necessarily general in nature since detailed.
specific recommendations can be made only
for the particular exposure and circumstances
of each individual use. Inquiries about
specific operations or uses may be addressed
to the Dow Chemical Company. Assistance in
evaluating the health hazards of particular
plant conditions may be obtained from
certain consulting laboratories and from
State Departments of Health or of Labor.
many of which have an industrial health
service. 2,3,7,8-TCDD is extremely toxic to
laboratory animals. However, it has been
handled for years without injury in analytical
and biological laboratories. Techniques used
in handling radioactive and infectious
materials are applicable to 2.3,7,8,-TCDD.
4.3.1.1 Protective equipment—Throw-
away plastic gloves, apron or lab coat safety
glasses, and a lab hood adequate for
radioactive work.
4.3.1.2 Training—Workers must be
trained in the proper method of removing
contaminated gloves and clothing without
contacting the exterior surfaces.
4.3.1.3 Personal hygiene—Thorough
washing of hands and forearms after each
manipulation and before breaks (coffee.
lunch, and shift).
4.3.1.4 Confinement—Isolated work area.
posted with signs, segregated glassware and
tools, plastic-backed absorbent paper on
benchtop*.
4.3.1.5 Waste—Good technique includes
minimising contaminated waste. Plastic bag
linen should be used in waste can*. Janitors
must be trained in the safe handling of waste.
4.3.1.6 Disposal of wastes—2.3.7,8-TCDD
decomposes above 800 °C Low-level waste
such as absorbent paper, tissues, animal
remains, and plastic gloves may be burned in
a good incinerator. Gross quantities
(milligrams) should be packaged securely and
disposed through commercial or
governmental channels which are capable of
handling high-level radioactive wastes or
extremely toxic wastes. Liquids should be
allowed to evaporate in a good hood and in a
disposable container. Residues may then be
handled as above.
-------
Federal Register / Vol. 49. No. 209 / Friday, October 26, 1984 / Rules and Regulations 137
4.3.1.7 Decontamination—For personal
decontamination, use any mild soap with
plenty of scrubbing action. For
decontamination of glassware, tools, and
surfaces. Chlorothene NU Solvent
(Trademark of the Dow Chemical Company)
is the least toxic solvent shown to be
effective. Satisfactory cleaning may be
accomplished by nnsing with Chlorothene.
then washing with any detergent and water.
Dishwater may be disposed to the sewer. It is
prudent to minimize solvent wastes because
they may require special disposal through
commercial sources which are expensive.
4.3.1.8 Laundry—Clothing known to be
contaminated should be disposed with the
precautions described under Section 4.3.1.8.
Lab coats or other clothing worn in 2.3.7,8-
TCDD work areas may be laundered.
Clothing should be collected in plastic
bags. Persons who convey the bags and
launder the clothing should be advised of the
hazard and trained in proper handling. The
clothing may be put into a washer without
contact if the launderer knows the problem.
The washer should be run through a cycle
before being used again for other clothing.
4.3.1.9 Wipe tests—A useful method of
determining cleanliness of work surfaces and
tools is to wipe the surface with a piece of
filter paper. Extraction and analysis by gas
chromatography can achieve a limit of
sensitivity of 0.1 pg per wipe. Less than 1 jig
of 2.3.7.8-TCDD per sample indicates
acceptable cleanliness; anything higher
warrants further cleaning. More than 10 jig
on a wipe sample constitutes an acute hazard
and requires prompt cleaning before further
use of the equipment or work space. A high
(>10 jig) 2.3.7.8-TCDD level indicates that
unacceptable work practices have been
employed in the past.
4.3.1.10 Inhalation—Any procedure that
may produce airborne contamination must be
done with good ventilation. Gross losses to a
ventilation system must not be allowed.
Handling of the dilute solutions normally
used in analytical and animal work presents
no inhalation hazards except in the case of
an accident
4.3.1.11 Accidents—Remove
contaminated clothing immediately, taking
precautions not to contaminate skin or other
articles. Wash exposed skin vigorously and
repeatedly until medical attention is
obtained
5. Apparatus and Materials
5.1 Sampling equipment for discrete or
composite sampling.
5.1.1 Grab sample bottle—1-L or 1-qt
amber glass, fitted with a screw cap lined
with Teflon. Foil may be substituted for
Teflon if the sample is not corrosive. If amber
bottles are not available, protect samples
from light. The bottle and cap liner must be
washed, rinsed with acetone or methylene
chloride, and dried before use to minimize
contamination.
5.1.2 Automatic sampler (optional)—The
sampler must incorporate glass sample
containers for the collection of a minimum of
250 mL of sample. Sample containers must be
kept refrigerated at 4 *C and protected from
light during compositing. If the sampler uses a
peristaltic pump, a minimum length of _ -
compressible silicone rubber tubing may be
used. Before use. however, the compressible
tubing should be thoroughly rinsed with
methanol. followed by repeated rinsings with
distilled water to minimize the potential for
contamination of the sample. An integrating
flow meter is required to collect flow
proportional composites.
5.1.3 Clearly label all samples as
"POISON" and ship according to U.S.
Department of Transportation regulations.
5.2 Glassware (All specifications are
suggested. Catalog numbers are included for
illustration only.):
5.2.1 Separatory funnels—2-L and 125-mL
with Teflon stopcock.
5.2.2 Concentrator tube. Kudema-
Danish—lOmL. graduated (Kontes K-570050-
1025 or equivalent). Calibration must be
checked at the volumes employed in the test.
Ground glass stopper is used to prevent
evaporation of extracts.
5.2.3 Evaporative flask. Kuderna-
Danish—500-mL (Kontes K-570001-0500 or
equivalent). Attach to concentrator tube with
springs.
5.2.4 Snyder column, Kudema-Danish—
Three-ball macro (Kontes K-503000-0121 or
equivalent).
5.2.5 Snyder column. Kuderna-Danish—
Two-ball micro (Kontes K-569001-0219 or
equivalent).
5.2.6 Vials—10 to 15-mL. amber glass.
with Teflon-lined screw cap.
5.2.7 Chromatographic column—300 mm
long X 10 mm ID. with Teflon stopcock and
coarse frit filter disc at bottom.
5.2.8 Chromatographic column—400 mm
long X 11 mm ID. with Teflon stopcock and
coarse frit filter disc at bottom.
5.3 Boiling chips—Approximately 10/40
mesh. Heat to 400 *C for 30 nun or Soxhlet
extract with methylene chloride.
5.4 Water bath—Heated, with concentric
ring cover, capable of temperature control
(±2 *C). The bathishould be used in a hood.
5.5 GC/MS system:
5.5.1 Gas chromatograph—An analytical
system complete with'a temperature
programmable gas* chromatograph and all
required accessories including syringes.
analytical columns, and gases. The infection
port must be designed for capillary columns.
Either split splitless, or on-column injection
techniques may be employed, as long as the
requirement* of Section 7.1.1 are achieved.
5.5.2 Column—«0 m long x 0.25 mm ID
glass or fused silica, coated with SP-2330 (or
equivalent) with a film thickness of 0.2 ^m.
Any equivalent column must resolve 2, 3. 7.
8-TCDD from the other 21 TCDD isomers.'•
5.5.3 Mass spectrometer—Either a low
resolution mass spectrometer (LRMS) or a
high resolution mass spectrometer (HRMS)
may be used. The mass spectrometer must be
equipped with a 70 V (nominal) ion source
and be capable of aquiring m/i abundance
data in real time selected ion monitoring
(SIM) for group* of four or more masses.
5.5.4 GC/MS interface—Any GC to MS
interface can be used that achieves the
requirements of Section 7.1.1. GC to MS
interfaces constructed of all glass or glass-
lined material* are recommended. Glass
surfaces can be deactivated by silanizing
with dichlorodimethylsilane. To achieve
D-215
maximum sensitivity, the exit end of the
capillary column should be placed in the ion
source. A short piece of fused silica capillary
can be used as the interface to overcome
problems associated with straightening the
exit end of glass capillary columns.
5.5.5 The SIM data acquired during the
chromatographic program is defined as the
Selected Ion Current Profile (SICP). The SICP
can be acquired under computer control or as
a real time analog output. If computer control
is used, there must be software available to
plot the SICP and report peak height or area
data for any m/z in the SICP between
specified time or scan number limits.
5.8 Balance—Analytical, capable of
accurately weighing 0.0001 g.
6. Reagents
8.1 Reagent water—Reagent water is
defined as a water in which an interferent is
not observed at the MDL of 2, 3, 7, 8-TCDD.
8.2 Sodium hydroxide solution (10 N)—
Dissolve 40 g of NaOH (ACS) in reagent
water and dilute to 100 mL Wash the
solution with methylene chloride and hexane
before use.
8.3 Sodium thiosulfate—(ACS) Granular.
8.4 Sulfuric acid—Concentrated (ACS, sp.
gr. 1.84).
8.5 Acetone, methylene chloride, hexane.
benzene, ortho-xylene, tetradecane—
Pesticide quality or equivalent.
8.6 Sodium sulfate-—(ACS) Granular.
anhydrous. Purify by heating at 400 *C for 4 h
in a shallow tray.
8.7 Alumina—Neutral. 80/200 mesh
(Fisher Scientific Co.. No. A-540 or
equivalent). Before use. activate for 24 h at
130 *C in a foil-covered glass container.
8.8 Silica gel—High purity grade. 100/120
mesh (Fisher Scientific Co.. No. S-879 or
equivalent).
6.9 Stock standard solutions (1.00 Mg/
)iL)—Stock standard solutions can be
prepared from pure standard materials or
purchased as certified solutions. Acetone
should be used as the solvent for spiking
solutions; ortho-xylene is recommended for
calibration standards for split injectors: and
tetradecane is recommended for splitless or
on-colum injectors. Analyze stock internal
standards to verify the absence of native
2.3,7,8-TCDD.
8.9.1 Prepare stock standard solution* of
2,3,7,8-TCDD (mol wt 320) and either "Cl,
2.3,7,8-TCDD (mol wt 328) or IJC1,, 2,3.7,8-
TCDD (mol wt 332) in an isolated area by
accurately weighing about 0.0100 g of pure
material. Dissolve the material in pesticide
quality solvent and dilute to volume in a 10-
mL volumetric flask. When compound punty
is assayed to be fO% or greater, the weight
can be used without correction to calculate
the concentration of the stock standard.
Commercially prepared stock standards can
be used at any concentration if they are
certified by the manufacturer or by an
independent source.
6.9.2 Transfer the stock standard
solutions into Teflon-sealed screw-cap
bottle*. Store in an isolated refrigerator
protected from light Stock standard solutions
should be checked frequently for signs of
degradation or evaporation, especially just
-------
138 Federal Register / Vol. 49. No. 209 / Friday. October 26. 1984 / Rules and Regulations
prior to preparing calibration standards or
spiking solutions from them.
6.9.3 Stock standard solutions must be
replaced after six months, or sooner if
comparison with check standards indicates a
problem.
6.10 Internal standard spiking solution (25
ng/mLJ—Using stock standard solution.
prepare a spiking solution in acetone of
either 13Cl,i or "Cl. 2.3.7.8-TCDD at a
concentration of 25 ng/mL. (See Section 10.2)
8.11 Quality control check sample
concentrate—See Section 8.2.1.
7. Calibration
7.1 Establish gas chromatograhic
operating conditions equivalent to those
given in Table 1 and SIM conditions for the
mass spectrometer as described in Section
12.2 The GC/MS system must be calibrated
using the internal standard technique.
7.1.1 Using stock standards, prepare
calibration standards that will allow
measurement of relative response factors of
at least three concentration ratios of 24,7,8-
TCDD to internal standard. Each calibration
standard must be prepared to contain the
internal standard at a concentration of 25 ng/
mi. If any interferences are contributed by
the internal standard at m/z 320 and 322. its
concentration may be reduced in the
calibration standards and in the internal
standard spiking solution (Section 6.10). One
of the calibration standards should contain
2.3,7,8-TCDD at a concentration near, but
above, the MOL and the other 2.3,7,8-TCDD
concentrations should correspond to the
expected range of concentrations found in
real samples or should define the working
range of the GC/MS system.
7.1.2 Using injections of 2 to 5 jiL, analyze
each calibration standard according to
Section 12 and tabulate peak height or area
response against the concentration of 2,3,7,8-
TCDD and internal standard. Calculate
response factors (RF) for 2,3,7,8-TCDD using
Equation 1.
Equation 1.
RF=
(AJ (CJ
where:
A, a SIM response for 2.3,7,8-TCDD m/z
320.
Au -SIM response for the internal
standard, m/z 332 for "Cu 2.3,7,8-TCDD
m/z 328 for "O, 2J.73-TCDD.
Q.= Concentration of the internal standard
C,= Concentration of 24,7,8-TCDD (jig/L).
If the RF value over the working range is a
constant ( < 10% relative standard deviation.
RSD). the RF can be assumed to be invariant
and the average RF can be used for
calculations. Alternatively, the results can be
used to plot a calibration curve of response
ratios. A./A* vs. RF.
7.1.3 The working calibration curve or RF
must be verified on each working day by the
measurement of one or more 2.3,7,8-TCDD
calibration standards. If the response for
2.3,7,8-TCDD varies from the predicted
response by more than ±15*, the test must ~*
be repeated using a fresh calibration
standard. Alternatively, a new calibration
curve must be prepared.
7.2 Before using any cleanup procedure.
the analyst must process a series of
calibration standards through the procedure
to validate elution patterns and the absence
of interferences from the reagents.
8. Quality Control
8.1 Each laboratory that uses this method
is required to operate a formal quality control
program. The minimum requirements of this
program consist of an initial demonstration of
laboratory capability and an ongoing
analysis of spiked samples to evaluate and
document data quality. The laboratory must
maintain records to document the quality of
data that is generated. Ongoing data quality
checks are compared with established
performance criteria to determine if the
results of analyses meet the performance
characteristics of the method. When results
of sample spikes indicate atypical method
performance, a quality control check
standard must be analyzed to confirm that
the measurements were performed in an in-
control mode of operation.
8.1.1 The analyst must make an initial.
one-time, demonstration of the ability to
generate acceptable accuracy and precision
with this method. This ability is established
as described in Section 8.2.
8.1-2 In recognition of advances that are
occurring in chromatography, the analyst is
permitted certain options (detailed in
Sections 10.5,11.1. and 12.1) to improve the
separation* or lower the cost of
measurements. Each time such a modification
is made to the method, the analyst is required
to repeat the procedure in Section 8J
8.1.3 Before processing any samples, the
analyst must analyze a reagent water blank
to demonstrate that interferences from the
analytical system and glassware are under
• control. Each ttaje a set of samples is
extracted or reagents are changed, a reagent
water blank must be processed as a
safeguard against laboratory contamination.
8.1.4 The laboratory must, on an ongoing
basis, spike and analyze a minimum of 10% of
all samples with native 2.3,7,8-TCDD to
monitor and evaluate laboratory data quality.
This procedure is described in Section 8.3.
8.1.5 The laboratory must on an ongoing
basis, demonstrate through the analyses of
quality control check standards that the
operation of the measurement system is in
control. This procedure is described in
Section 8.4. The frequency of the check
standard analyses is equivalent to 1051 of ail
samples analyzed but may be reduced if
spike recoveries from samples (Section 8.3)
meet all specified quality control criteria.
8.1.8 The laboratory must maintain
performance records to document the quality
of data that is generated. This procedure is
described in Section 8.5.
&2 To establish the ability to generate
acceptable accuracy and precision, the
analyst must perform the following
operations.
8.2.1 A quality control (QC) check sample
concentrate is required containing 24,7,8-
TCDD at a concentration of 0.100 pg/mL in
acetone. The QC check sample concentrate
D-216
must be obtained from the U.S.
Environmental Protection Agency.
Environmental Monitoring and Support
Laboratory in Cincinnati, Ohio, if available. If
not available from that source, the QC check
sample concentrate must be obtained from
another external source. If not available from
either source above, the QC check sample
concentrate must be prepared by the
laboratory using stock standards prepared
independently from those used for
calibration.
8.2.2 Using a pipet. prepare QC check
samples at a concentration of 0.100 fig/L (100
ng/L) by adding 1.00 mL of QC check sample
concentrate to each of four 1-L aliquots of
reagent water.
8.2.3 Analyze the well-mixed QC check
samples according to the method beginning in
Section 10.
8.2.4 Calculate the average recovery (X)
in fig/L. and the standard deviation of the
recovery (s) in fig/L, for 24.7,8-TCDD using
the four results.
8.2.5 Compare s and (X) with the
corresponding acceptance criteria for
precision and accuracy, respectively, found in
Table 2. If s and X meet the acceptance
criteria, the system performance is
acceptable and analysis of actual samples
can begin. If s exceeds the precision limit or
X falls outside the range for accuracy, the
system performance is unacceptable for
2.3,7,8-TCDD. Locate and correct the source
of the problem and repeat the test beginning
with Section azz
84 The laboratory must on an ongoing
basis, spike at least 10% of the samples from
each sample site being monitored to assess
accuracy. For laboratories analyzing one to
ten samples per month, at least one spiked
sample per month is required.
8.3.1 The concentration of the spike in the
sample should be determined as follows:
84.1.1 If. as in compliance monitoring, the
concentration of 24,7,8-TCDD in the sample
is being checked against a regulatory
concentration limit, the spike should be it
that limit or 1 to 5 times higher than the
background concentration determined in
Section 8.3.2, whichever concentration would
be larger.
84.1.2 If the concentration of 2,3,7,8-
TCDD In the sample is not being checked
against a limit specific to that parameter, the
spike should be at 0.100 pg/L or 1 to 5 times
higher than the background concentration
determined in Section 84-2, whichever
concentration would be larger.
8.3.14 If it is impractical to determine
background levels before spiking (e.g-
maximum holding times will be exceeded}.
the spike concentration should be (1) the
regulatory concentration limit, if any; or, if
none (2) the larger of either S times higher
than the expected background concentration
or 0.100 jig/L.
84.2 Analyze one sample aliquot to
determine the background concentration (B)
of 2.3,7,8-TCDD. If necessary, prepare a new
QC check sample concentrate (Section 8.Z1)
appropriate for the background concentration
in the sample. Spike a second sample aliquot
with 1.0 mL of the QC check sample
concentrate and analyze it to determine the
-------
Federal Register / Vol. 49, No. 209 / Friday. October 26, 1984 / Rules and Regulations
139
concentration after spiking (A) of 2,3.7,8-
TCDD. Calculate percent recovery (P) as
100(A-B)%T. where T is the known true value
of the spike.
8.3.3 Compare the percent recovery (P) for
2.3.7.8-TCDD with the corresponding QC
acceptance criteria found in Table 2. These
acceptance criteria were calculated to
include an allowance for error in
measurement of both the background and
spike concentrations, assuming a spike to
background ratio of 5:1. This error will be
accounted for to the extent that the analyst's
spike to background ratio approaches 5:1." If
spiking was performed at a concentration
lower than 0.100 MS!/1- the analyst must use
either the QC acceptance criteria in Table 2,
or optional QC acceptance criteria calculated
for the specific spike concentration. To
calculate optional acceptance criteria for the
recovery of 2.3.7.8-TCDD: (1) calculate
accuracy (X'J using the equation in Table 3,
substituting the spike concentration (T) for C;
(2) calculate overall precision (S') using the
equation in Table 3. substituting X' for X: (3)
calculate the range for recovery at the spike
concentration as (100 X'/T)±2.44(100 S'/
T)%. "
8.3.4 If the recovery of 2,3,7,8-TCDD falls
outside the designated range for recovery, a
check standard must be analyzed as
described in Section 8.4.
8.4 If the recovery of 2.3,7,8-TCDD fails
the acceptance criteria for recovery in
Section 8.3, a QC check standard must be
prepared and analyzed.
Note.—The frequency for the required
analysis of a QC check standard will depend
upon the complexity of the sample matrix
and the performance'of the laboratory.
8.4.1 Prepare the QC check standard by
adding 1.0 mi, of QC check sample
concentrate (Section 8.2.1 or 8.3.2) to 1 L of
reagent water.
8.4.2 Analyze the QC check standard to
determine the concentration measured (A) of
2,3.7.8-TCDD. Calculate the percent recovery
(P.) as 100 (A/T)%. where T is the true value
of the standard concentration.
8.44 Compare the percent recovery (P.)
with the corresponding QC acceptance
criteria found in Table 2. If the recovery of
2.3,7,8-TCDD falls outside the designated
range, the laboratory performance is judged
to be out of control, and the problem must be
immediately identified and corrected. The
analytical result for 2,3,7,8-TCDD in the
unspiked sample is suspect and may not be
reported for regulatory compliance purposes.
8.5 As part of the QC program for the
laboratory, method accuracy for wastewater
samples must be assessed and records must
be maintained. After the analysis of five
spiked wastewater sample* a* in Section 8.3.
calculate the average percent recovery (P)
and the spandard deviation of the percent
recovery (s.J. Express the accuracy
assessment as a percent recovery interval
from P-2S, to P+2S,. If P-90* and s,=10*.
for example, the accuracy interval is
expressed as 70-110%. Update the accuracy
assessment on a regular basis (e.g. after each
five to ten new accuracy measurements).
8.6 It is recommended that the
laborataory adopt additional quality
assurance practices for use with this method.
The specific practices that are most
productive depend upon the needs of the
laboratory and the nature of the samples.
Field duplicates may be analyzed to assess
the precision of the environmental
measurements. Whenever possible, the
laboratory should analyze standard reference
materials and participate in relevant
performance evaluation studies.
9. Sample Collection. Preservation, and
Handling
9.1 Grab samples must be collected in
glass containers. Conventional sampling
practices " should be followed, except that
the bottle must not be prerinsed with sample
before collection. Composite samples should
be collected in refrigerated glass containers
in accordance with the requirements of the
program. Automatic sampling equipment
must be as free as possible of Tygon tubing
and other potential sources of contamination.
9.2 Ail samples must be iced or
refrigerated at 4 'C and protected from light
from the time of collection until extraction.
Fill the sample bottles and. if residual
chlorine is present, add 80 mg of sodium
thiosulfate per liter of sample and mix well.
EPA Methods 330.4 and 330.5 may be used for
measurement of residual chlorine." Field test
kits are available for this purpose.
9.3 Label all samples and containers
"POISON" and ship according to applicable
U.S. Department of Transportation
regulations.
9.4 All samples must be extracted within
7 days of collection and completely analyzed
within 40 days of extraction.1
10. Sample Extraction
Caution: When using this method to
analyze for 2.3.7,8-TCDD, all of the following
operations must be performed in a limited-
access laboratory with the analyst wearing
full protective covering for all exposed skin
surfaces. See Section 4.2.
10.1 Mark the Ttater meniscus on the side
of the sample bottle for later determination of
sample volume. Pour Uje entire sample into a
2-L separatory funnel.
10.2 Add 1.00 mL of internal standard
spiking solution to the sample in the
separatory funnel. If the final extract will be
concentrated to a fixed volume below 1.00
mL (Section 12.3), only that volume of spiking
solution should be added to the sample so
that the final extract will contain 25 ng/mL of
internal standard at the time of analysis.
10.3 Add 80 mL of methylene chloride to
the sample battle, seal, and shake 30 s to
rinse the inner surface. Transfer the solvent
to the separatory runnel and extract the
sample by shaking the funnel for 2 min with
periodic venting to release excess pressure.
Allow the organic layer to separate from the
water phase for a minimum of 10 min. If the
emulsion interface between layers is more
than one-third the volume of the solvent
layer, the analyst must employ mechanical
techniques to complete the phase separation.
The optimum technique depends upon the
sample, but may include stirring, filtration of
the emulsion through glass wool.
centrifugation. or other physical methods.
Collect the methylene chloride extract in a
250-mL Erlenmeyer flask.
10.4 Add a second 80-mL volume of
methylene chloride to the sample bottle and
repeat the extraction procedure a second
time, combining the extracts in the
Erlenmeyer flask. Perform a third extraction
in the same manner.
10.5 Assemble a Kudema-Danish (K-D)
concentrator by attaching a 10-mL
concentrator tube to a 500-mL evaporative
flask. Other concentration devices or
techniques may be used in place of the K-D
concentrator if the requirements of Section
8.2 are met.
10.8 Pour the combined extract into the
K-D concentrator. Rinse the Erlenmeyer flask
with 20 to 30 mL of methylene chloride to
complete the quantitative transfer.
10.7 Add one or two clean boiling chips to
the evaporative flask and attach a three-ball
Snyder column. Prewet the Snyder column by
adding about 1 mL of methylene chloride to
the top. Place the K-D apparatus on a hot
water bath (60 to 65 'C} 30 that the
concentrator tube is partially immersed in the
hot water, and the entire lower rounded
surface of the flask is bathed with hot vapor.
Adjust the vertical position of the apparatus
and the water temperature as required to
complete the concentration in 15 to 20 mm. At
the proper rate of distillation the balls of the
column will actively chatter but the chambers
will not flood with condensed solvent When
the apparent volume of liquid reaches 1 mL.
remove the K-D apparatus and allow it to
drain and cool for at least 10 mm.
10.8 Momentarily remove the Snyder
column, add SO mL of hexane and a new
boiling chip, and reattach the Snyder column.
Raise the temperature of the water bath to 35
to 90'G Concentrate the extract as in Section
10.7, except use hexane to prewet the column.
Remove the Snyder column and rinse the
flask and its lower joint into the concentrator
tube with 1 to 2 mL of hexane. A 5-mL synnge
is recommended for this operation. Set aside
the K-D glassware for reuse in Section 10.14.
10.9 Pour the hexane extract from the
concentrator tube into a 125-mL separatory
runnel. Rinse the concentrator tube four times
with 10-mL aliquots of hexane. Combine all
rinses in the 125-mL separatory funnel.
10.10 Add 50 mL of sodium hydroxide
solution to the funnel and shake for 30 to 60 s.
Discard the aqueous phase.
10.11 Perform a second wash of the
organic layer with 50 mL of reagent water.
Discard the aqueous phase.
10.12 Wash the hexane layer with a least
two 50-mL aliquots of concentrated sulfunc
acid. Continue washing the hexane layer with
50-mL aliquots of concentrated sulfuric acid
until the acid layer remains colorless. Discard
all acid fractions.
10.13 Wash the hexane layer with two 50-
mL aliquots of reagent water. Discard the
aqueous phases.
10.14 Transfer the hexane extract into a
125-mL Erlenmeyer flask containing 1 to 2 g
of anhydrous sodium sulfate. Swirl the flask
for 30 s and decant the hexane extract into
the reassembled K-D apparatus. Complete
the quantitative transfer with two 10-mL
hexane rinses of the Erlenmeyer flask.
D-217
-------
140 Federal Register / Vol. 49. No. 209 / Friday, October 26. 1984 / Rules and Regulations
10.15 Replace the one or two clean boiling
chips and concentrate the extract to 6 to 10
mL as in Section 10.8.
10.16 Add a clean boiling chip to the
concentrator tube and attach a two-ball
micro-Snyder column. Prewet the column by
adding about 1 mL of hexane to the top. Place
the micro-K-D apparatus on the water bath
so that the concentrator tube is partially
immersed in the hot water. Adjust the
vertical position of the apparatus and the
water temperature as required to complete
the concentration in 5 to 10 min. At the
proper rate of distillation the balls of the
column will actively chatter but the chambers
will not flood. When the apparent volume of
liquid reaches about 0.5 mL remove the K-D
apparatus and allow it to drain and cool for
at least 10 min. Remove the micro-Snyder
column and rinse its lower joint into the
concentrator tube with 0.2 mL of hexane.
Adjust the extract volume to 1.0 mL with
hexane. Stopper the concentrator tube and
store refrigerated and protected from light if
further processing will not be performed
immediately. If the extract will be stored
longer than two days, it should be transferred
to a Teflon-sealed screw-cap vial. If the
sample extract requires no further cleanup.
proceed with GC/MS analysis (Section 12). If
the sample requires further cleanup, proceed
to Section 11.
10.17 Determine the original sample
volume by refilling the sample bottle to the
mark and transferring the liquid to a 1000-mL
graduated cylinder. Record the sample
volume to the nearest 5 mL.
11. Cleanup and Separation
11.1 Cleanup procedures may not be
necessary for a relatively dean sample
matrix. If particular circumstances demand
the use of a cleanup procedure, the analyst
may use either procedure below or any other
appropriate procedure.1-*'However, the
analyst first must demonstrate that the
requirements of Section 8-2 can be met using
the method as revised to incorporate the
cleanup procedure. Two cleanup column
options are offered to the analyst in this
section. The alumina column should be used
first to overcome interferences. If background
problems are still encountered, the silica gel
column may be helpful.
11.2 Alumina column cleanup for 2.3.7,8-
TCDD:
11.2.1 Fill a 300 mm long x 10 mm ID
chromatographic column with activated
alumina to the ISO mm level. Tap the column
gently to settle the alumina and add 10 mm of
anhydrous sodium sulfata to the top.
11.12 Preeiute the column with SO mL of
hexane. Adjust the elution rat* to 1 mL/min.
Discard the eluate and just pnor to exposure
of the sodium sulfate layer to the air.
quantitatively transfer the 1.0-mL sample
extract onto the column using two 2-mL
portions of hexane to complete the transfer.
11.2.3 Just prior to exposure of the sodium
sulfate layer to the air. add SO mL of 3%
methylene chloride/97% hexane (V/V) and
continue the elution of the column. Discard
the eluate.
11.2.4 Next, elute the column with 50 mL
of 20% methylene chloride/80% hexane (V/V)
into a 500-mL K-D flask equipped with a 10-
mL concentrator tube. Concentrate the
collected fraction to 1.0 mL as in Section
10.16 and analyze by GC/MS (Section 12).
11.3 Silica gel column cleanup for 2,3,7,8-
TCDD:
11.3.1 Fill a 400 mm long x 11 mm ID
chromatographic column with silica gel to the
300 mm level. Tap the column gently to settle
the silica gel and add 10 mm of anhydrous
sodium sulfate to the top.
11.3.2 Preeiute the column with 50 mL of
20% benzene/80% hexane (V/V). Adjust the
elution rate to 1 mL/min. Discard the eluate
and just prior to exposure of the sodium
sulfate layer to the air, quantitatively transfer
the 1.0-mL sample extract onto the column
uaing two 2-mL portions of 20% benzene/80%
hexane to complete the transfer.
11.3.3 Just prior to exposure of the sodium
sulfate layer to the air. add 40 mL of 20%
benzene/80% hexane to the column. Collect
the eluate in a clean 500-mL K-D flask
equipped with a 10-mL concentrator tube.
Concentrate the collected fraction to 1.0 mL
as in Section 10.16 and analyze by GC/MS.
12. GC/MS Analysis
12.1 Table 1 summarizes the
recommended operating conditions for the
gas chromatograph. Included in this table are
retention times and MDL that can be
achieved under these conditions. Other
capillary columns or chromatographic
conditions may be used if the requirements of
Sections 5.5.2 and 8.2 are met.
12.2 Analyze standards and samples with
the mass spectrometer operating in the
selected ion monitoring (SIM] mode using a
dwell time to give at least seven points per
peak. For LRMS, use masses at m/z 320, 322.
and 257 for 2,3,7,8-TCDD and either m/z 328
for "CL. 2.3,7.8-TCDD or m/z 332 for 1SC,,
2.3.7.8-TCDD. For HRMS, use masses at m/z
319.8965 and 321.8936 for 2.3,7.8-TCDD and
either m/z 327.8847 for ^Cl, 2.3,7,8-TCDD or
m/z 331.9367 for "C., 2.3,7,8-TCDD.
12.3 If lower Selection limits are required.
the extract may be carefully evaporated to
dryness under a gentle stream of nitrogen
with the concentrator tube in a water bath at
about 40 *C Conduct this operation
immediately before GC/MS analysis.
Redissolve the extract in the desired final
volume of ortho-xylene or tetradecane.
12.4 Calibrate the system daily as
described in Section 7.
12.5 Inject 2 to 5 pL of the sample extract
into the gas chromatograph. The volume of
calibration standard injected must be
measured, or be the same as all sample
injection volumes.
12.8 The presence of 2.3.7,3-TCDD is
qualitatively confirmed if all of the following
criteria are achieved:
12.8.1 The gas chromatographic column
must resolve 2.3.7.8-TCDD from the other 21
TCDD isomera.
12.6.2 The masses for native 2.3,7.8-TCDD
(LRMS-m/z 320, 322, and 257 and HRMS-ra/z
320 and 322) and labeled 2,3,7,8-TCDD (m/z
328 or 332) must exhibit a simultaneous
maximum at a retention time that matches
that of native 2,3,7,8-TCDD in the calibration
standard, with the performance specifications
of the analytical system.
12.8.3 The chlorine isotope ratio at m/z
320 and m/z 322 must agree to within±10% of
that in the calibration standard.
12.8.4 The signal of all peaks must be
greater than 2.5 times the noise level.
12.7 For quantitation. measure the
response of the m/z 320 peak for 2.3.7.8-
TCDD and the m/z 332 peak for 13C,i 2,3.7.8-
TCDD or the m/z 328 peak for "CL, 2.3,7.8-
TCDD.
12.8 Co-eluting impurities are suspected if
all criteria are achieved except those in
Section 12.6.3. In this case, another SIM
analysis using masses at m/z 257, 259, 320
and either m/a 328 or m/z 322 can be
performed. The masses at m/z 257 and m/z
259 are indicative of the loss of one chlorine
and one carbonyl group from 2.3,7,8-TCDD. If
masses m/z 257 and m/z 259 give a chlorine
isotope ratio that agrees to within ±10% of
the same cluster in the calibration standards.
then the presence of TCDD can be confirmed.
Co-eluting DDD. DDE. and PCB residues can
be confirmed, but will require another
injection using the appropriate SIM masses or
full repetitive mass scans. If the response for
31Cl4 2.3.7,8-TCDD at m/z 328 is too large.
PCB contamination is suspected and can be
confirmed by examining the response at both
m/z 328 and m/z 328. The "CU 2.3.7.8-TCDD
internal standard gives negligible response at
m/z 328. These pesticide residues can be
removed using the alumina column cleanup
procedure.
12.9 If broad background interference
restricts the sensitivity of the GC/MS
analysis, the analyst should employ
additional cleanup procedures and reanalyze
by GC/MS.
12.10 In those circumstances where these
procedures do not yield a definitive
conclusion, the use of high resolution mass
spectrometry is suggested.*
13. Calculations
13.1 Calculate the concentration of 2.3.7.8-
TCDD in the sample using the response factor
(RF) determined in Section 7.1.2 and Equation
2.
Equation 2:
Concentration (Mg/L)<
(AJ(LJ
(AJ(RF)fV.)
where:
A, = SIM response for 2,3,7,8-TCDD at m/z
320.
AU=SIM response for the internal
standard at m/z 328 or 332.
I,=Amount of internal standard added to
each extract (jig).
V. = Volume of water extracted (L).
13.2 For each sample, calculate the
percent recovery of the internal standard by
comparing the area of the m/z peak
measured in the sample to the area of the
same peak in the calibration standard. If the
recovery is below 50%, the analyst should
review all aspects of his analytical technique.
13.3 Report results in ng/L without
correction for recovery data. All QC data
D-218
-------
Federal Register / Vol. 49. No. 209 / Friday, October 26. 1984 / Rules and Regulations 141
obtained should be reported with the sample
reaulta,
14. Method Performance
14.1 The method detection limit (MDL) is
defined as the minimum concentration of a
substance that can be measured and reported
with 99% confidence that the value is above
zero.' The MDL concentration listed in Table
1 was obtained using reagent water.14 The
MDL actually achieved in a given analysis
will vary depending on instrument sensitivity
and matrix effects.
14.2 This method was tested by 11
laboratories using reagent water, drinking
water, surface water, and three industrial
wastewaters spiked at six concentrations
over the range 0.02 to 0.20 ng/L." Single
operator precision, overall precision, and
method accuracy were found to be directly
related to the concentration of the parameter
and essentially independent of the sample
matrix. Linear equations to describe these
relationships are presented in Table 3.
References
1. 40 CFR Part 136. Appendix B.
2. "Determination of 2.3.7,8-TCDD in
Industrial and Municipal Wastewaters,"
EPA-800/4-82-028. U.S. Environmental
Protection Agency. Environmental Monitoring
and Support Laboratory, Cincinnati, Ohio
45268. June 1962.
3. Buser, H.R.. and Rappe. C. "High
Resolution Gas Chromatography of the 22
Tetrachlorodibenzo-p-dioxin Isomers,"
Analytical Chemistry. 52. 2257 (1980).
4. ASTM Annual Book of Standards, Part
31, D3694-78. "Standard Practices for
Preparation of Sample Containers and for
Preservation of Organic Constituents,"
American Society for Testing and Materials,
Philadelphia.
5. Harless. R. L. Oswald. E. O.. and
Wilkinson, M. K. "Sample Preparation and
Gas Chromatography/Mass Spectrometry
Determination of 2,3,7.8-Tetrachlorodibenzo-
p-dioxin." Analytical Chemistry, 52. 1239
(1980).
6. Lamparski, L. L. and Nestnck. T.).
"Determination of Tetra-, Hepta-. and
Octachlorodibenzo-p-dioxin Isomers in
Paniculate Samples at Parts per Trillion
Levels," Analytical Chemistry, 52. 2045
(1980).
7. Longhorst. M. L., and Shadoff, L A.
"Determination of Parts-per-Tnllion
Concentrations of Tetra-, Hexa-. and
Octachlorodibenzo-p-dioxins in Human
Milk," Analytical Chemistry. 52. 2037 (1980).
8. "Carcinogens—Working with
Carcinogens." Department of Health.
Education, and Welfare. Public Health
Service. Center for Disease Control, National
Institute for Occupational Safety and Health.
Publication No. 77-208, August 1977.
9. "OSHA Safety and Health Standards.
General Industry," (29 CFR 1910),
Occuptional Safety and Health
Administration, OSHA 2208 (Revised,
January 1978).
10. "Safety in Academic Chemistry
Laboratories," American Chemical Society
Publication, Committee on Chemical Safety,
3rd Edition. 1979.
11. Provost L P., and Elder, R. S..
"Interpretation of Percent Recovery Data,"
American Laboratory, IS, 58-83 (1983). (The
value 2.44 used in the equation in Section
8.3.3 is two times the value 1.22 derived in
this report)
12. ASTM Annual Book of Standards. Part
31. D3370-78. "Standard Practices for
Sampling Water." American Society for
Testing and Materials. Philadelphia.
13. "Methods. 330.4 (Titrimetric. DPD-FAS)
and 330.5 (Spectrophotometnc DPD) for
Chlorine, Total Residual." Methods for
Chemical Analysis of Water and Wastes.
EPA-800/4-79-02DJU.S. Environmental
Protection Agency. Environmental Monitoring
and Support Laboratory, Cincinnati. Ohio
45268. March 1979.
14. Wong. A.S. et al. "The Determination of
2.3,7.8-TCDD in Industrial and Municipal
Wastewaters, Method 813. Part 1—
Development and Detection Limits." G.
Choudhay. L Keith, and C. Ruppe. ed..
Butterworth Inc., (1983).
15. "EPA Method Validation Study 23.
Method 613 (2.3.7,8-Tetrachlorodibenzo-p-
dioxinj," Report for EPA Contract 68-03-2863
(In preparation).
TABLE 1.—Chromatograprwc Conditions and
Method Detection Limit
PVVTMMr
2.3,7,8,- TCDO
Retention
time
(mm)
131
Mainod
detemmi
Imw t^g/
L)
0002
Column conations: SP-2330 coated on • 80 m long x
0 25 mm !0 glaaa column with Hydrogen earner gaa at 40
cm/see linear v«loaty. spttlesa miectnn using latraoacane
Column temperature nett aotnarmal at 200'C tor 1 mm. tnen
programmed at 8'C/rrwi to 240 'C and tutu U» of nafcum
is writ appronmatery douole (ne retention nme.
TABLE 2.—QC Acceptance Criteria—Method
613
Parameter
2.3,7,8-TCDO
Tot
cone
,--EipecMd angle enelyet HanJerd oavletkxi of meeauremei
S'- Expected nterteoaraiory ttandenl devaUan of meeeneiiia
?-True value tor the coneennaon, n ofl/L
x-Avereoe recovery found for meeaurenmiui of samilea com
mpte uuitieifang t concentnaon of C n M/L.
ita al en awxge conoannaon taund of SL t\ «/l-
n at an average conoematton found of X, n |ig/L
anna a concerenaon of C. n ua/L.
Accuracy. aa
recovery. X'
Oifl/L)
0.86C + 0.00145
Single analyet, Overa*
precaeon. ^ ' pracaaon. S '
0.13X4-0.00129 018X+OOO02S
M«thed 824
1. Scope and Application
1.1 This method coven the determination
of a number of purgeable organic*. The
following parameters may be determined by
this method:
Pmnwtv
QflDJTLnjITaTJthiWM
CMomtMhaVf*
STORE!
NO.
34030
32104
34301
34311
34576
3210B
CAS No.
71-43-2
75-25-2
108-90-7
75-00-3
110-75-S
«7-achtaoeln«ne..
Te»«ufeuiue
-------
SAS APPENDIX B
Modification of Method 613 to Form Method 613A and
for application in Method 613E*
*Developed for use in the EPA Effluent Guidelines Division Sampling and
Analysis Program
D-220
-------
Modifications of Method 613 to Form Method 613A and for Application in Method 613E
The following information is provided to clarify Methods 613A and Method
613E. Paragraph numbers in brackets [] reference paragraph numbers in EPA
Method 613.
1. Compound Levels and Numbers
a. The compound to be used for quantification by isotope dilution shall
be carbon-13 labeled 2,3,7,8-TCDD (13C12). Fifty nanograms of C12~
2,3,7,8-TCDD shall be spiked into all water samples to result in a
concentration of 50 ng/L for one liter samples and 5 ng/L for 10 liter
samples. A labelled compound spiking solution replaces the "internal
standard" spiking solution [613: 6.10] and is prepared using C12~
2,3,7,8-TCDD at 50 ug/mL. When extracted and concentrated to a
volume of 50 uL, the extract concentration will be 1.0 ug/mL (1.0
ng/uL), assuming a 100 percent extraction efficiency.
13
b. The EGD compound number to be used for reporting C12-2,3,7,8-TCDD
shall be 429.
c. Chlorine-37 labeled 2,3,7,8-TCDD shall be spiked into each extract to
yield a concentration of 1.0 ug/mL (1.0 ng/uL). the most efficient
way to spike the extract is to prepare a solution of Cl^-2,3,7,8-
TCDD at a concentration of 1.0 ug/mL in isooctane, o-xylene, or
tetradecane, and use 50 uL of this solution to redissolve the extract
[613: 12.3]. 3^Cl^-2,3,7,8-TCDD is used as the internal standard for
1 O
analysis of the C,2-2,3,7,8-TCDD so that recovery can be measured.
17
d. The EGD compound number to be used for reporting C1^2,3,7,8-TCDD
shall be 184.
2. Final Extract Volume
The final extract volume for all samples shall be 0.05 mL (50 uL),
D-221
-------
If the extract method cannot be concentrated to this volume, all cleanup
steps in Method 613 [613: section 11] plus the additional cleanup step in
Method 613E [613E: section 10] shall be employed. If the extract cannot
then be concentrated to 50 uL, the Contractor shall notify the Sample Con-
trol Center by telephone (703/557-5040) within two working days.
3. Injection Volume
The injection volume for all calibration solutions [613: 7.1.2] and
extracts [613: 12.5] shall be 2.0 + 0.2 uL.
A. Interferences
If an interference precludes rigorous identification or quantitation
of 2,3,7,8-TCDD at a level equal to or greater than 1 ug/mL (1 ng/uL) in
an extract after all cleanup steps (see item 2, above) and alternate
masses [613: 12.8} have been tried, the Contractor shall notify the Sam-
ple Control Center by telephone within two working days.
5. Calibration and Calibration Verification
a. A five-point calibration supercedes the three-point calibration in
the Method [613: sections 6 and 7]. The calibration solutions to be
used are as follows:
Concentration of 2,3,7,8-TCDD (ug/mL and ng/uL Isotopically
Solution
1
2
3
A
5
13
b. The response of 2,3,7,8-TCDD at m/z 320 is tabulated relative to C12"
2,3,7,8-TCDD at m/z 332 [613: 7.1.2]. The coefficient of variation
(relative standard deviation) of the RF shall be less than 10 percent;
otherwise a calibration curve is to be used.
D-222
Labeled)
13c
12
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
A
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
Native
0.2
1.0
5.0
20
AO
-------
c. The response of 13C12-2,3,7,8-TCDD is tabulated relative to 37C1^-
2,3,7,8-TCDD for all 5 calibration solutions. The coefficient of
variation (relative standard deviation) of the RF shall be less than
20 percent; otherwise variables need better control and the test
repeated.
d. Calibration verification [613: 7.1.3] is performed at 1 ug/mL (Ing/uL)
for all TCDD isotopes once per 8-hour shift.
6. Initial and Ongoing Precision and Recovery
13
a. The QC check sample concentrate [613: 8.2.1] shall contain C]?~
2,3,7,8-TCDD and a native 2,3,7,8-TCDD at 50 ng/mL each.
b. The specifications for initial precision and recovery from reagent
water [613: 8.2-8.3] must be met and are as follows. For native
2,3,7,8-TCDD, the initial precision of the percent recoveries shall
be less than 20 percent relative standard deviation, and the initial
recoveries shall be between 75 and 116 percent by isotope dilution.
For 1 C^-2,3,7,8-TCDD, the initial precision of the percent recoveries
shall be less than 25 percent relative standard deviation, and the
initial recoveries shall be between 50 and 130 percent by internal
standard (37Cl4-2,3,7,8-TCDD).
c. Delete the requirement to spike and analyze 10 percent of all samples
with native 2,3,7,8-TCDD [613: 8.1.2 and 8.4].
d. A test of ongoing precision and recovery is to be made by spiking 1 mL
of reagent water for each set of samples started through the extraction
process on a given 8-hour shift, to a maximum of six samples. Recovery
of l3C12-2,3,7,8-TCDD [613: section 13] shall be measured using 37C14~
2,3,7,8-TCDD as the internal standard. The ongoing precision and
recovery shall be within the control limits specified [613: 8.3.1].
D-223
-------
7. Final Extract Concentration
Change the final extract concentration [613: 10.2] to 1 mg/mL (1 ng/uL),
8. Accuracy Statements
Accuracy statements shall be developed using l^Cj2-2,3,7,8-TCDD [613:
8.3.2] consisting of N, the average percent recovery of C,2-2,3,7,8-
TCDD in all wastewater samples, and M, the coefficient of the percent
recoveries of 1^C12-2,3,7,8-TCDD in all wastewater samples.
D-224
-------
APPENDIX C
EXTENDED METHOD 613*
(EGD METHOD 613E)
*Extended method developed for the analysis of 10 liter samples for 2,3,7,8-TCDD
for use in the EPA Effluent Guidelines Division water and wastewater sampling
and analysis program.
D-225
-------
Appendix C 01 September 1983 Draft
Extension of EPA Method 613A to 10 Liter Samples to Detect Parts per Quad-
rillion (ppq) of 2,3,7,8-TCDD in Water*
1. Scope and Application
This procedure extends Method 613A to the ppq level for 2,3,7,8-TCDD
in water by extraction of a 10 liter sample. The procedure is applied
to relatively clean waters (drinking water, treated effluents, surface
water) which yield extracts that can be concentrated to a final volume
of 50-100 uL. Unless specified otherwise by this procedure, all require-
ments and specifications in Method 613A shall be met. Numbers in brackets
[] reference paragraph numbers in Method 613, July 1982 Revision.
2. Apparatus and Materials [613: 5]
2.1. Sample bottle(s) [613: 5.1.1 and 5.1.2]—any combination of bottles
which will result in collection of 10 liters of sample may be used.
2.2 Extraction apparatus—replace the separatory funnel [613: 5.2.1]
with the following:
5.2.IE Extraction bottle or flask—11 to 19 liter glass vessel
capable of being stirred by a magnetic stirring bar.
5.2.1.IE Magnetic stirrer and bar capable of stirring water in the
vessel in 5.2.IE.
2.3 Change the volume of the K-D flask [613: 5.2.3] to 1000 mL.
3. Regeants [613:6]
3.1 Change the concentration of the 25 ng/mL internal standard spiking
solution [613: 6.10] to 50 ng/mL.
D-226
*Adapted from EPA Region V "Dow Task Force Report" Appendix B.
-------
4. QA/QC [613: 8]
A.I Change the concentration of the QC check sample concentrate [613:
8.2.1] to 50 ng/mL.
4.2 Change the volume of the initial 1000 mL aliquots [613: 8.2.2] to
10 liters.
4.3 Change the volume of the 1 liter blank [613: 8.5] to 10.0 liters.
B. Extraction and Concentration [613: 10]
5.1 Change "two liter separatory funnel" [613: 10.1 and 10.2] to "extrac-
tion vessel" (section 5.2.IE).
5.2 Change "25 ng/mL" [613: 10.2] to "one ug/mL".
5.3 Replace the extraction and transfer procedures [613: 10.3, 10.4 and
10.6] with the following:
10.3E Extraction by magnetic stirring
10.3.IE Stir the sample plus internal standard at 50-150 rpm for
25-35 minutes.
10.3.2E Add one liter of hexane to the extraction vessel.
10.3.3E Stir the mixture at 50-150 rpm for 16-24 hours.
10.4E Transfer the hexane to a 1.5-3 liter bottle or flask using
a 100-500 mL pipet. If necessary, add reagent water to the
extraction vessel to force the extract into the neck for easy
withdrawal. If residual water is present in the extract, add
sufficient sodium sulfate to remove the water.
D-227
-------
10.6E Pour the extract into the K-D concentrator. Rinse the bottle
or flask (10.4E) with 50-100 mL hexane and add to the K-D
flask.
5.4 Prewet the column [613: 10.7] with hexane.
5.5 Change the bath temperature [613:10.7] to 85-95°C.
5.6 Change the time for concentration [613: 10.7] to 30-60 minutes.
' 5.7 Change the apparent volume [613: 10.7] to 5 mL.
5.8 Delete the hexane exchange [613: 10.8].
5.9 Delete the extract adjustment to 1.0 ml [613: 10.16].
»
5.10 Change the 1000 mL graduated cylinder and 5 mL requirements [613:
10.7] to any vessel which will perit accurate measurement of 10
liters within *5 percent.
6. Cleanup and Separation [613:11}
6.1 Change the final volume requirement [613: 11.3.4] to 0.5 to 2 mL and
delete analysis of the extract at this volume.
7. GC/MS Analysis [613: 12]
7.1 Use the blowdown procedure [613: 12.3] to bring the final volume of
extract to 50 uL.
8. Calculations [613: 13]
8.1 Change the recovery specification [613: 13.2] to 20 percent.
D-228
-------
9. Method Performance [613: 14]
9.1 Change the detection limit [613: 14.1 and table 1] to 100 pg/L (ppq).
9.2 Change the recovery and relative standard deviation [613: 14.2 and
tables 2 and 3] to 84 percent and 9 percent, respectively for reagent
water.
10. Additional Cleanup*
This cleanup procedure is to be used for extracts which do not concen-
trate to 50 uL or when an interference is present at m/z 320, 328, or 332
0-7 1 -1
for 2,3,7,8-TCDD, Cl^-TCDD, or Cj2~TCDD as evidenced by improper
isotope ratios, and only after all other cleanup procedures in the method
have been shown to be ineffective.
10.1 Prepare 18 percent Carbopak C on Celite 545 by thoroughly mixing
3.6 grams of Carbopak C (80/100) mesh and 16.4 grams of Celite
545 in a 40 mL vial. Activate at 130°C for six hours. Store in
a dessicator.
10.2 Prepare a column using a 5-3/4 in. x 5 mm i.d. disposable pipet
fitted with a small plug of glass wool.
10.3 Using a vacuum aspirator attached to the pointed end of the plpet,
add Carbopak/Celite mix until a 2 cm column is obtained.
10.4 Pre-elute the column with 2mL of tolune followed by one mL of cyclo-
hexane:methylene chloride (1:1) and 2 mL hexane. While the column
is still wet with hexane, add the extract. Elute with two 1-mL
aliquots of hexane, one mL cyclohexane:methylene chloride (1:1), and
one mL methylene chloride:methanol:benzene (75:20:5).
*Adapted from EPA Region VII procedure for "Determination of 2,3,7,8-TCDD in
Soil and Sediment.
D-229
-------
10.5 Elute with the TCDD fraction with 2 mL toluene.
10.6 Store the 2mL extract in a freezer until ready for analysis.
10.7 Just before analysis, reduce the volume to near dryness and add
isooctane to obtain a final volume of 50 uL.
NOTE: For quality assurance purposes, the initial [613: 8.2.2] and
on-going [613: 8.4] reagent water aliquots shall be taken
through the entire cleanup procedure used with samples. Re-
coveries for 2,3,7,8-TCDD by isotope dilution shall be 70-130
percent, and recoveries for labelled TCDD shall be 20-200 per-
cent by the internal standard method using 37C1^-2,3,7,8-TCDD
spiked into the extract as the internal standard for reference.
Each batch of cleanup material (silica gel, alumina, Carbopak./
Celite, etc) shall be tested to insure recovery within the
limits above.
D-230
-------
EPA METHOD
NO. 8280M
D-231
-------
GC/MS Conditions
Gas Chroraatography:
Capillary Column: a. Manufacturer - J&V Scientific
b. Liquid phase - DB-5
c. Length - 60 m
d. I. D - 0.25 ram
e. film thickness - 0.25 microns
Carrier gas : Helium
Head pressure : 28 psi
Flow thru column: 1 to 2 ral/min.
Injection type : Splitless for 30 sec.
Initial isothermal temperature :150 deg C for 30 sec.
Initial temperature program rate: to 190 deg C ballistically
Final temperature program rate : to 300 deg C 3 deg/rair.
Mass Spectrometry
Icnization mode
Reactant gas
Resolution
Scan mode
Switching ncde
Reference standard PFK
El, positive ion
N/A
5000
selected ion recording
voltage
D-232
-------
SLUDGE SAMPLES
D100ML round bottom flask + boiling chip + sample <~2g) + 200ul
water + 200ul spiking solution + 50ml toluene.
2) Connect Dean/stark trap and heat apparatus to lOOdeg C until
volume of water collected in the resevolr is a constant value.
3) Disconnect apparatus , pipet toluene in side tube to sample
round bottom flask, discard water.
Rinse apparatus with 2 X 5ml toluene.
4) Filter sample though #54 Vhatman into a clean round bottom
flask. Rinse 1 st flask + filter with 2 X 5 ml toluene . Rotary
evaporate to ~lml.
5) go to step #9)
WATER SAMPLES
DMark the water meniscus on the side of the sample battle for later
determination of sample volume. Pour the entire sample into a 2-L
separatory funnel.
2) Add internal standard spiking solution to the sample in the
separatory funnel.
3) Add 60ml methylene chloride to the sample bottle, seal, and shake
for 30 s to rinse the inner surface. Transfer the solvent to the
separatory funnel and extract the sample by shaking the funnel for
two minutes with periodic venting to release e:ccess pressure. Allow
the organic layer to separate from the water phase for a minimum of
10 min. If the emulsion interface between layers is more than, one-
third the volume of the solvent layer, the analyst must employ
mechanical techniques to complete the phase separation. The optimum
technique depends on the sample, but may include stirring, filtering
at the emulsion though glass wool, cent ifugation, or ether physical
methods.
Collect the methylene chloride extract in a 250ml Erlenmeyer flask.
4) Added a second 60 ml volume of methylene chloride to the sample
bottle and repeat the extraction procedure, combining the extract in
the erlenmeycr flask. Perform a third extraction in the saire ranner
5) Assemble a Kuderna-Danish concentrator bv attaching a 10 mi
concentrator tube to a 500 ml evaporative flask.
6i Pour the combined extract into the KD concentrator. Rinse th^
•erlenraeyer flask with 3 X 10ml of methylene chloride to complete
the quantitative transfer.
7) Add one or more clean boiling chips to the evaporator and attach
a three-ball Snyder column. Prewet the Snyder column by adding about
1 ml of methylene chloride to the top. Place the KD apparatus an a
hot water bath 'x»50-65 deg C) .so that the ccncentator tube is
partially immersed in the hot water, and the entire lower rounded
surface of the r laslc is bathed with hot vapor. Adjust the vertical
position of the apparatus and the water temperature as required to
complete the concentration in 15 to 20 minutes. At the proper rate
of distillation the balls of the column will actively chatter but
the chambers will not flood with condensed solvent. When the
apparent volume of the liquid reaches 1 ml remove the KD apparatus
and allow to cool and drain for at least 10 rain.
8) Add 50 ml hexane and concentrate to 1 ml.
D-233
-------
PURIFICATION
9)Transfer to 250 ml separatory funnel with 5 X 5 ml hexane. Add 50
ml 5% tfaCl solution, shake for 2 min and. discard aqueous (bottom)
layer.
10) Add 40 ml 20% KOH (w/v) , shake for 2 min . discard aqueous
layer < bottom) repeat the base washing until no color is visible
the the bottom layer— a maximum of 4 times
11) Add 40 ml water shake for 2 min , discard aqueous layer
12) Add 40 ml concentrated sulfuric acid, shake for 2 min , discard
bottom layer. Repeat acid washing until no visible color is in the
bottom layer. A maximum or 4 times.
13) Add 40 ml water (care) shake for 2 min , discard bottom layer.
14 Filter upper layer though anhydrous sodium sulfate. Rinse with 2
X 5 ml hexane into 50 ml round bottom flask.
14) Rotary evaporate to near dryness a <35 deg C
15) Add 2 ml hexane to sample and have ready to load
25 ml pipet column with glasswool plug
+ 4g purified sodium sulfate (next page)
•f- 4g Voelm super neutral alumnia (desiccated)
+ 4g sodium sulfate
Vash with 10 ml hexane
When hexane layer reaches surface add sample the add 4 ml hexane
rinse ( 2 X 2> 'NOTE.. NEVER ALLOV SOLUTIONS TO GO BELOW SURFACE OF
SODIUM SULFATE.
Discard all the above elutants
Fr #1 = (into scintillation vial)
10 ml 8%(v/v) methylene chloride/ hexane —(hold.)
Fr #2 15ml 60%(v/v) methylene chloride/ hexane into a 50 ml rcur.d
bottom flask
Rotary evaporate to near dryness.
16> Prepare carbon column
9.5g 3iosil A silica Gel 24 hrs ® 225 deg C
+0.5g AX-21 carbon
mi:-: for 1 hour
2ml disposable pipet-broken at 1.3ml mark- glasswool plug at 0.0
mark
+ Biosil A silica gel to O.lml mark
+ carbon/Biosil A mixture to 0. 45ral mark
+ glasswool plug
Prewash column with :- 0.5ml 50% benzene/ methvlene chloride ,
9.5 ml 50% benzene/ methylene chloride,
10 ml toluene
add Iral hexane
17) add 1 ml hexane
load sample 0.2-0.4 ml in hexane
rinse with 2 X 0.2 ml hexane
add 5.0 ml hexane
add 10 ml 50 % benzene/ hexane
18) Turn column upside down
Elute with 10 ml toluene
transfer to sample tube and evaporate to near dryness with nitrogen
D-234
-------
Cgl A 50 gr A-540 basic alumina , activated 16-72hrs <2 130deg C
~ purified sodium sulfate on top
2gni Silica gel
1 era sodium sulfate on top
'_jjl 2 Directly under col 1
25ial pipet with glasswool plug
6gra A-948 Alumina with 10% water activated 16-72 hr-3
130deg C.
1cm sodiun sulfater on top
Load sample onto column 1
Rinse 2 X iral hexane
Wash with 162ml hexane —discard.
Remove column I .
Onto column 2 add 20ml 1% methylene chloride/hexane--save
Add 20ral 20% raethylene chloride/ hexane.
Evaporate Finished
D-235
-------
METHOD 8280
THE ANALYSIS OF POLYCHLORINATED DIBENZO-P-DIOXINS
AND POLYCHLORINATED DIBENZOFURANS
1.0 SCOPE AND APPLICATION
1.1 This method 1s appropriate for the determination of tetra-, penta-,
hexa-, hepta-, and octachlorinated dibenzo-p-diox1ns (PCDD's) and dibenzo-
furans (PCDF's) in chemical wastes including still bottoms, fuel oils,
sludges, fly ash, reactor residues, soil and water.
1.2 The sensitivity of this method is dependent upon the level of
interferents within a given matrix. Proposed quantification levels for target
analytes were 2 ppb in soil samples, up to 10 ppb in other solid wastes and
10 ppt in water. Actual values have been shown to vary by homologous series
and, to a lesser degree, by individual isomer. The total detection limit for
each CDD/CQF homologous series is determined by multiplying the detection
limit of a given isomer within that series by the number of peaks which can be
resolved under the gas chromatographic conditions.
1.3 Certain 2,3,7,8-substituted congeners are used to provide
calibration and method recovery information. Proper column selection and
access to reference Isomer standards, may in certain cases, provide isomer
specific data. Special Instructions are included which measure 2,3,7,8-
substituted congeners.
1.4 This method is recommended for use only by analysts experienced with
residue analysis and skilled in mass spectral analytical techniques.
1.5 Because of the extreme toxicity of these compounds, the analyst must
take necessary precautions to prevent exposure to himself, or to others, of
materials known or believed to contain PCDD's or PCDF's. Typical infectious
waste incinerators are probably not satisfactory
materials highly contaminated with PCOO's or PCDF's.
use these compounds should prepare a disposal plan to
by EPA's Dioxin Task Force (Contact Conrad Kleveno,
Street S.W., Washington, D.C. 20450). Additional
outlined in Appendix B.
devices for disposal of
A laboratory planning to
be reviewed and approved
WH-548A, U.S. EPA, 401 M
safety instructions are
2.0 SUMMARY OF THE METHOD
2.1 This procedure uses a matrix-specific extraction, analyte-specifie
cleanup, and high-resolution capillary column gas chromatography/low
resolution mass spectrometry (HRGC/LRMS) techniques.
2.2 If interferents are encountered,
cleanup procedures to aid the analyst in their
chart is shown in Figure 1.
the method
elimination.
provides selected
The analysis flow
8280 D-236
Revision 0_
Date September
1986
-------
Complex
Waste
Sample
(1) Add Internal Standards: 13C12-PCDO's
and I3C12-PCDF's.
(2) Perform matrix-specific extraction.
Sample
Extract
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
Wash with 20% KOH
Wash with 51 Nad
Wash with cone.
Wash with 51 NaCl
Dry extract
Solvent exchange
Alumina column
601 CH2C12/nexane
Fraction
(1) Concentrate eluate
(2) Perform carbon column cleanup
(3) Add recovery standard(s)-13C12-l,2,3,4-TCDO
Analyze by GC/MS
Flyure 1. Method 8280 flow chart for sample extraction and cleanup as
used for the analysis of PCOO's and PCDF's In complex waste samples.
8280 D-237
Revision o
Date September 1986
-------
3.0 INTERFERENCES
3.1 Solvents, reagents, glassware, and other sample processing hardware
may yield discrete artifacts and/or elevated baselines which may cause
misinterpretation of chromatographic data. All of these materials must be
demonstrated to be free from Interferents under the conditions of analysis by
running laboratory method blanks.
3.2 The use of high purity reagents and solvents helps to minimize
interference problems. Purification of solvents by distillation in all glass
systems may be required.
3.3 Interferents co-extracted from the sample will vary considerably
from source to source, depending upon the industrial process being sampled.
PCDD's and PCDF's are often associated with other interfering chlorinated
compounds such as PCB's and polychlorinated diphenyl ethers which may be found
at concentrations several orders of magnitude higher than that of the analytes
of interest. Retention times of target analytes must be verified using
reference standards. These values must correspond to the retention time
windows established 1n Section 6-3. While certain cleanup techniques are
provided as part of this method, unique samples may require additional cleanup
techniques to achieve the method detection limit (Section 11.6) stated in
Table 8.
3.4 High resolution capillary columns are used to resolve as many PCOD
and PCDF isomers as possible; however, no single column is known to resolve
all of the isomers.
3.5 Aqueous samples cannot be aliquoted from sample containers. The
entire sample must be used and the sample container washed/rinsed out with the
extracting solvent.
4.0 APPARATUS AND MATERIALS
4.1 Sampling equipment for discrete or composite sampling;
4.1.1 Grab sample bottle—amber glass, 1-liter or 1-quart volume.
French or Boston Round design 1s recommended. The container must be acid
washed and solvent rinsed before use to minimize interferences.
4.1.2 Bottle caps—threaded to screw onto the sample bottles. Caps
must be lined with Teflon. Solvent washed foil, used with the shiny side
toward the sample, may be substituted for Teflon if the sample is not
corrosive. Apply tape around cap to completely seal cap to bottom.
4.1.3 Compositing equipment—automatic or manual compositing
system. No tygon or rubber tubing may be used, and the system must
incorporate glass sample containers for the collection of a minimum of
250 ml. Sample containers must be kept refrigerated after sampling.
4.2 Water bath—heated, with concentric ring cover, capable of
temperature control (+2*C). The bath should be used in a hood.
8280 D-238
Revision 0
Date September 1986
-------
4.3 Gas chromatograph/mass spectrometer data system;
4.3.1 Gas chromatograph: An analytical system with a temperature-
programmable gas chromatograph and all required accessories including
syringes, analytical columns, and gases.
4.3.2 Fused silica capillary columns are required. As shown in
Table 1, three columns were evaluated using a column performance check
mixture containing 1,2,3,4-TCDD, 2,3,7,8-TCDD, 1,2,3,4,7 PeCDD,
1,2,3,4,7,8-HxCDO, 1,2,3,4,6,7,8-HpCDD, OCDD, and 2,3,7,8-TCDF.
The columns include the following: (a) 50-m CP-Sil-88 programmed 60*-
190* at 20Vminute, then 19CT-240* at SVminute; (b) DB-5 (30-m x 0.25-mm
I.D.; 0.25-um film thickness) programmed 170* for 10 minutes, then 17CT-
320* at SVminute, hold at 3204C for 20 minutes; (c) 30-m SP-2250
programmed 70*-320* at 10'/minute. Column/conditions (a) provide good
separation of 2,3,7,8-TCDD from the other TCDD's at the expense of longer
retention times for higher homologs. Column/conditions (b) and (c) can
also provide acceptable separation of 2,3,7,8-TCDD. Resolution of
2,3,7,8-TCDD from the other TCDD's is better on column (c), but column
(b) is more rugged, and may provide better separation from certain
classes of interferents. Data presented 1n Figure 2 and Tables 1 to 8 of
this Method were obtained using a DB-5 column with temperature
programming described in (b) above. However, any capillary column which
provides separation of 2,3,7,8-TCDD from all other TCDD isomers
equivalent to that specified in Section 6.3 may be used; this separation
must be demonstrated and documented using the performance test mixture
described in Paragraph §.3.
4.3.3 Mass spectrometer: A low resolution Instrument is specified,
utilizing 70 volts (nominal) electron energy in the electron impact
ionization mode. The system must be capable of selected ion monitoring
(SIM) for at least 11 ions simultaneously, with a cycle time of 1 sec or
less. Minimum integration time for SIM is 50 ms per m/z. The use of
systems not capable of monitoring 11 ions simultaneously will require the
analyst to make multiple injections.
4.3.4 GC/MS Interface: Any GC-to-MS interface that gives an
acceptable calibration response for each analyte of interest at the
concentration required and achieves the required tuning performance
criteria (see Paragraphs 6.1.-6.3) may be used. GC-to-MS interfaces
constructed of all glass or glass-lined materials are required. Glass
can be deactivated by silanlzing with dichlorodimethylsilane. Inserting
a fused silica column directly into the MS source is recommended; care
must be taken not to expose the end of the column to the electron beam.
4.3.5 Data system: A computer system must be interfaced to the
mass spectrometer. The system must allow for the continuous acquisition
and storage on machine-readable media of all data obtained throughout the
duration of the chromatographic program. The computer must have software
that can search any GC/MS data file for ions of a specific mass and can
plot such ion abundances versus time or scan number. This type of plot
8280 D-239
Revision 0
Date September 1986
-------
1s defined as an Selected Ion Current Profile (SICP). Software must also
be able to Integrate the abundance, 1n any SICP, between specified time
or scan number limits.
4.4 P1pets-01sposable, Pasteur, 150-mm long x 5-mm I.D. (Fisher
Scientific Company, No. 13-678-6A, or equivalent).
4.4.1 P1pet, disposable, serologlcal 10-mL (American Scientific
Products No. P4644-10, or equivalent) for preparation of the carbon
column specified 1n Paragraph 4.19.
4.5 Amber glass bottle (500-mL, Teflon-lined screw-cap).
4.6 Reacti-vial 2-mL, amber glass (Pierce Chemical Company). These
should be sllanized prior to use.
4.7 500-mL Erlenmeyer flask (American Scientific Products Cat. No. f4295
SOOfO) fitted with Teflon stoppers (ASP No. S9058-8, or equivalent).
4.8 Wrist Action Shaker (VWR No. 57040-049, or equivalent).
4.9 125-mL and 2-L Separatory Funnels (Fisher Scientific Company,
No. 10-437-5b, or equivalent).
4.10 500-mL Kuderna-Oanlsh fitted with a 10-mL concentrator tube and
3-ball Snyder column (Ace Glass No. 6707-02, 6707-12, 6575-02, or equivalent).
4.11 Teflon boiling chips (Berghof/American Inc., Main St., Raymond, New
Hampshire 03077, No, 15021-450, or equivalent). Wash with hexane prior to
use.
4.12 300-mHi x 10.5-mm glass chromatographic column fitted with Teflon
stopcock.
4.13 15-mL conical concentrator tubes (Kontes No. K-288250, or
equivalent).
4.14 Adaptors for concentrator tubes (14/20 to 19/22) (Ace Glass No.
9092-20, or equivalent).
4.15 Nitrogen blowdown apparatus (N-Evap (reg. trademark) Analytical
Evaporator Model 111, Organomatlon Associates Inc., Northborough,
Massachusetts or equivalent). Teflon tubing connection to trap and gas
regulator is required.
4.16 Microflex conical vials 2.0-mL (Kontes K-749000, or equivalent).
4.17 Filter paper (Whatman No. 54, or equivalent). Glass fiber filters
or glass wool plugs are also recommended.
4.18 Solvent reservoir (125-mL) Kontes; (special order item) 12.5-cm
diameter, compatible with gravity carbon column.
8280 D-240
Revision 0
Date September 1986
-------
4.19 Carbon column (gravity flow); Prepare carbon/silica gel packing
material bymixing5 percent (byweight) active carbon AX-21 (Anderson
Development Co., Adrain, Michigan), pre-washed with methanol and dried i_n
vacuo at 110*C and 95 percent (by weight) Silica gel (Type 60, EM reagent 70
to 230 mesh, CMS No. 393-066) followed by activation of the mixture at 130*
for 6 hr. Prepare a 10-mL disposable serological pi pet by cutting off each
end to achieve a 4-1n. column. F1re polish both ends; flare 1f desired.
Insert a glass-wool plug at one end and pack with 1 g of the carbon/silica gel
mixture. Cap the packing with a glass-wool plug. (Attach reservoir to column
for addition of solvents).
Option: Carbon column (HPLC): A silanized glass HPLC column (10 mm x 7
cm), or equivalent, which contains 1 g of a packing prepared by mixing 5
percent (by weight) active carbon AX-21, (Anderson Development Co., Adrian,
Michigan), washed with methanol and dried 1_n vacuo at 110*C, and 95 percent
(by weight) 10 urn silica (Spherisorb S10W from Phase Separations, Inc.,
Norwalk, Connecticut). The mixture must then be stirred and sieved through a
38-um screen (U.S. Sieve Designation 400-mesh, American Scientific Products,
No. S1212-400, or equivalent) to remove any clumps.1
4.20 HPLC pump with loop valve (1.0 ml) injector to be used in the
optional carbon column cleanup procedure.
4.21 Dean-Stark trap, 5- or 10-mL with T joints, (Fisher Scientific
Company, No. 09-146-5, or equivalent) condenser and 125-mL flask.
4.22 Continuous liquid-liquid extractor (Hershberg-Wolfe type, Lab Glass
No. LG-6915; or equivalent.).
4.23 Roto-evaporator, R-110. Buchi/Brinkman - American Scientific No.
£5045-10; or equivalent.
5.0 REAGENTS
5.1 Potassium hydroxide (ASC): 20 percent (w/v) in distilled water.
5.2 Sulfuric acid (ACS), concentrated.
5.3 Methylene chloride, hexane, benzene, petroleum ether, methanol,
tridecane, Isooctane, toluene, cyclohexane. Distilled in glass or highest
available purity.
5.4 Prepare stock standards in a glovebox from concentrates or neat
materials. The stock solutions (50 ppm) are stored in the dark at 4*C, and
checked frequently for signs of degradation or evaporation, especially just
prior to the preparation of working standards.
1 The carbon column preparation and use is adapted from W. A. Korfmacher,
L. G. Rushing, D. M. Nestorick, H. C. Thompson, Jr., R. K. Mitchum, and J. R.
Kominsky, Journal of High Resolution Chromatography and Chromatography
Communications, 8, 12-19 (1985).
8280 D-241
Revision 0
Date September 1986
-------
5.5 Alumina, neutral, Super 1, Woelm, 80/200 mesh. Store in a sealed
container at room temperature 1n a desiccator over self-Indicating silica gel.
5.6 Prepurifled nitrogen gas.
5.7 Anhydrous sodium sulfate (reagent grade): Extracted by manual
shaking with several portions of hexane and dried at 100*C.
water.
5.8 Sodium chloride - (analytical reagent), 5 percent (w/v) in distilled
6.0 CALIBRATION
6.1 Two types of calibration procedures are required. One type, initial
calibration, is required before any samples are analyzed and is required
intermittently throughout sample analyses as dictated by results of routine
calibration procedures described below. The other type, routine calibration,
consists of analyzing the column performance check solution and a
concentration calibration solution of 500 ng/ml (Paragraph 6.2). No samples
are to be analyzed until acceptable calibration as described in Paragraphs 6.3
and 6.6 1s demonstrated and documented.
6.2 Initial calibration:
6.2.1 Prepare multi-level calibration standards^ keeping one of
the recovery standards and the internal standard at fixed concentrations (500
ng/mL). Additional Internal standards (^Ci2-OCDD 1,000 ng/ml) are
recommended when quantification of the hepta- and octa-isomers is required.
The use of separate internal standards for the PCDF's is also recommended.
Each calibration standard should contain the following compounds:
2,3,7,8-TCDQ,
1,2,3,7,8-PeCDD
1,2,3,4,7,8-HxCDO
1,2,3,4,6,7,8-HpCDD
2,3,7,8-TCOF
l,2,3,7,8,PeCOF
1,2,3,4,7,8-HxCOF
1,2,3,4,6,7,8-HpCDF
or any available
or any available
or any available
or any available
or any available
or any available
OCDO, OCOF, 13Ci2-2,3,7,8-TCOO,
2,3,7,8,X-PeCDD isomer,
2,3,7,8,X,Y-HxCOD isomer,
2,3,7,8,X,Y,Z-HpCDD isomer,
2f3,7,8,X-PeCDF Isomer,
2,3,7,8,X,Y,HxCDF isomer,
2f3,7,8,X,Y,Z-HpCDF Isomer,
and 13C12-OCOO.
2 13Ci2~labeled analytes are available from Cambridge Isotope Laboratory,
Woburn, Massachusetts. Proper quantification requires the use of a specific
labeled isomer for each congener to be determined. When labeled PCOO's and
PCDF's of each homolog are available, their use will be required consistent
with the technique of isotopic dilution.
8280 D-242
Revision 0
Date September 1986
-------
Recommended concentration levels for standard analytes are 200, 500, 1,000,
2,000, and 5,000 ng/mL. These values may be adjusted 1n order to Insure that
the analyte concentration falls within the calibration range. Two uL
Injections of calibration standards should be made. However, some GC/MS
instruments may require the use of a 1-uL Injection volume; if this Injection
volume is used then all Injections of standards, sample extracts and blank
extracts must also be made at this Injection volume. Calculation of relative
response factors is described 1n Paragraph 11.1.2. Standards must be analyzed
used 1n the final sample extract. A wider
for higher level samples provided it can be
range of the method, and the Identification
criteria defined in Paragraph 10.4 are met. All standards must be stored in
an isolated refrigerator at 4*C and protected from light. Calibration
standard solutions must be replaced routinely after six months.
using the same solvent as
calibration range is useful
described within the linear
6.3 Establish operating parameters for the GC/MS system; the instrument
should be tuned to meet the Isotopic ratio criteria listed in Table 3 for
PCOD's and PCDF's. Once tuning and mass calibration procedures have been
completed, a column performance check mixture^ containing the isomers listed
below should be injected into the GC/MS system:
TCDD 1,3,6,8; 1,2,8,9; 2,3,7,8; 1,2,3,4; 1,2,3,7; 1,2,3,9
PeCDD 1,2,4,6,8; 1,2,3,8,9
HxCDO 1,2,3,4,6,9; 1,2,3,4,6,7
HpCDD 1,2,3,4,6,7,8; 1,2,3,4,6,7,9
OCDD 1,2,3,4,6,7,8,9
TCOF 1,3,6,8; 1,2,8,9
PeCDF 1,3,4,6,8; 1,2,3,8,9
HxCOF 1,2,3,4,6,8; 1,2,3,4,8,9
HpCDF 1,2,3,4,6,7,8; 1,2,3,4,7,8,9
OCDF 1,2,3,4,6,7,8,9
Because of the known overlap between the late-eluting tetra-isomers and
the early-eluting penta-isomers under certain column conditions, it may be
necessary to perform two injections to define the TCOD/TCOF and PeCDO/PeCOF
elution windows, respectively. Use of this performance check mixture will
enable the following parameters to be checked: (a) the retention windows for
each of the homologues, (b) the GC resolution of 2,3,7,8-TCDO and 1,2,3,4-
TCOO, and (c) the relative 1on abundance criteria listed for PCDD's and PCDF's
in Table 3. GC column performance should be checked daily for resolution and
peak shape using this check mixture.
The chromatographic peak separation between 2,3,7,8-TCDD and 1,2,3,4-TCDD
must be resolved with a valley of £25 percent, where
Valley Percent * (x/y) (100)
x = measured as in Figure 2
y = the peak height of 2,3,7,8-TCOD
3 Performance check mixtures are available from Brehm Laboratory, Wright
State University, Dayton, Ohio.
8280 D-243
Revision 0
Date September 1986
-------
It 1s the responsibility of the laboratory to verify the conditions
suitable for maximum resolution of 2,3,7,8-TCOO from all other TCOD isomers.
The peak representing 2,3,7,8-TCDD should be labeled and Identified as such on
all chromatograms.
6.4 Acceptable SIM sensitivity is verified by achieving a minimum
signal-to-nolse ratio of 50:1 for the m/z 320 ion of 2,3,7,8-TCDD obtained
from injection of the 200 ng/mL calibration standard.
6.5 From injections of the 5 calibration standards, calculate the
relative response factors (RRF's) of analytes vs. the appropriate internal
standards, as described in Paragraph 11.1.2. Relative response factors for
the hepta- and octa-chlorinated CDD's and CDF's are to be calculated using the
corresponding ^c^-octachlorinated standards.
6.6 For each analyte calculate the mean relative response factor (RRF),
the standard deviation, and the percent relative standard deviation from
triplicate determinations of relative response factors for each calibration
standard solution.
6.7 The percent relative standard deviations (based on triplicate
analysis) of the relative response factors for each calibration standard
solution should not exceed 15 percent. If this condition is not satisfied,
remedial action should be taken.
6.8 The Laboratory must not proceed with analysis of samples before
determining and documenting acceptable calibration with the criteria specified
in Paragraphs 6.3 and 6.7.
6.9 Routine calibration;
6.9.1 Inject a 2-uL aliquot of the column performance check
mixture. Acquire at least five data points for each GC peak and use the
same data acquisition time for each of the ions being monitored.
NOTE: The same data acquisition parameters previously used to
analyze concentration calibration solutions during initial
calibration must be used for the performance check solution.
The column performance check solution must be run at the
beginning and end of a 12 hr period. If the contractor
laboratory operates during consecutive 12-hr periods
(shifts), analysis of the performance check solution at the
beginning of each 12-hr period and at the end of the final
12-hr period is sufficient.
Determine and document acceptable column performance as described in
Paragraph 6.3.
6.9.2 Inject a 2-uL aliquot of the calibration standard solution at
500 ng/mL at the beginning of a 2-hr period. Determine and document
acceptable calibration as specified 1n Paragraph 6.3, i.e., SIM
sensitivity and relative ion abundance criteria. The measured RRF's of
8280 D-244
Revision 0
Date September 1986
-------
all analytes must be within +30 percent of the mean values established by
initial analyses of the calibration standard solutions.
7.0 QUALITY CONTROL
7.1 Before processing any samples, the analyst must demonstrate through
the analysis of a method blank that all glassware and reagents are
interferent-free at the method detection limit of the matrix of interest.
Each time a set of samples is extracted, or there is a change in reagents, a
method blank must be processed as a safeguard against laboratory
contamination.
7.2 A laboratory "method blank" must be run along with each analytical
batch (20 or fewer samples). A method blank is performed by executing all of
the specified extraction and cleanup steps, except for the introduction of a
sample. The method blank is also dosed with the internal standards. For
water samples, one liter of deionized and/or distilled water should be used as
the method blank. Mineral oil may be used as the method blank for other
matrices.
7.3 The laboratory will be expected to analyze performance evaluation
samples as provided by the EPA on a periodic basis throughout the course of a
given project. Additional sample analyses will not be permitted if the
performance criteria are not achieved. Corrective action must be taken and
acceptable performance must be demonstrated before sample analyses can resume.
7.4 Samples may be split with other participating labs on a periodic
basis to ensure interlaboratory consistency. At least one sample per set of
24 must be run in duplicate to determine intralaboratory precision.
7.5 Field duplicates (individual samples taken from the same location at
the same time) should be analyzed periodically to determine the total
precision (field and lab).
7.6 Where appropriate, "field blanks" will be provided to monitor for
possible cross-contamination of samples in the field. The typical "field
blank" will consist of uncontaminated soil (background soil taken off-site).
7.7 GC column performance must be demonstrated initially and verified
prior to analyzing any sample in a 12-hr period. The GC column performance
check solution must be analyzed under the same chromatographic and mass
spectrometric conditions used for other samples and standards.
7.8 Before using any cleanup procedure, the analyst must process a
series of calibration standards (Paragraph 6.2) through the procedure to
validate elution patterns and the absence of Interferents from reagents. Both
alumina column and carbon column performance must be checked. Routinely check
the 8 percent CH2Cl2/hexane eluate of environmental extracts from the alumina
column for presence of target analytes.
NOTE: This fraction is intended to contain a high level of interferents
and analysis near the method detection limit may not be possible.
8280 D-245
Revision 0
Date September 1986
-------
8.0 SAMPLE COLLECTION, PRESERVATION, AND HANDLING
8.1 Grab and composite samples must be collected in glass containers.
Conventional sampling practices must be followed. The bottle must not be
prewashed with sample before collection. Composite samples should be
collected in glass containers. Sampling equipment must be free of tygon,
rubber tubing, other potential sources of contamination which may absorb the
target analytes.
8.2 All samples must be stored at 4*C, extracted within 30 days and
completely analyzed within 45 days of collection.
9.0 EXTRACTION AND. CLEANUP PROCEDURES
9.1 Internal standard addition. Use a sample aliquot of 1 g to 1,000 mL
(typical sample size requirements for each type of matrix are provided in
Paragraph 9.2) of the chemical waste or soil to be analyzed. Transfer the
sample to a tared flask and determine the weight of the sample. Add an
appropriate quantity of 13Ci2-2,3,7,8-TCDD, and any other material which is to
be used as an internal standard, (Paragraph 6.2). All samples should be
spiked with at least one internal standard, for example, 13Ci2-2,3,7,8-TCDD,
to give a concentration of 500 ng/mL 1n the final concentrated extract. As an
example, a 10 g sample concentrated to a final volume of 100 uL requires the
addition of 50 ng of 13Ci2-2,3,7,8-TCDD, assuming 100% recovery. Adoption of
different calibration so>ution sets (as needed to achieve different
quantification limits for different congeners) will require a change in the
fortification level. Individual concentration levels for each homologous
series must be specified.
9.2 Extracti on
9.2.1 Sludge/fuel oil. Extract aqueous sludge samples by refluxing
a sample (e.g. 2 g) with 50 mL of toluene (benzene) in a 125-mL flask
fitted with a Dean-Stark water separator. Continue refluxing the sample
until all the water has been removed. Cool the sample, filter the
toluene extract through a fiber filter, or equivalent, into a 100-mL
round bottom flask. Rinse the filter with 10 mL of toluene, combine the
extract and rinsate. Concentrate the combined solution to near dryness
using a rotary evaporator at 50*C. Use of an inert gas to concentrate
the extract is also permitted. Proceed with Step 9.2.4.
9.2.2 Still bottom. Extract still bottom samples by mixing a
sample (e.g., 1.0 g) with 10 mL of toluene (benzene) in a small beaker
and filtering the solution through a glass fiber filter (or equivalent)
into a 50-mL round bottom flask. Rinse the beaker and filter with 10 mL
of toluene. Concentrate the combined toluene solution to near dryness
using a rotary evaporator at 50'C while connected to a water aspirator.
Proceed with Step 9.2.4.
8280 D-246
Revision
Date September 1986
-------
9.2.3 Fly ash. Extract fly ash samples by placing a sample (e.g.
10 g) and an equivalent amount of anhydrous sodium sulfate 1n a Soxhlet
extraction apparatus charged with 100 mL of toluene (benzene) and extract
for 16 hr using a three cycle/hour schedule. Cool and filter the toluene
extract through a glass fiber filter paper Into a 500-mL round bottom
flask. Rinse the filter with 5 mL of toluene. Concentrate the combined
toluene solution to near dryness using a rotary evaporator at 50*C.
Proceed with Step 9.2.4.
9.2.4 Transfer the residue to a 125-mL separatory funnel using
15 mL of hexane. Rinse the flask with two 5-mL aliquots of hexane and
add the rinses to the funnel. Shake 2 min with .50 mi of 5% NaCI
solution, discard the aqueous layer and proceed with Step 9.3.
9.2.5 Soil. Extract soil samples by placing the sample (e.g. 10 g)
and an equivalent amount of anhydrous sodium sulfate in a 500-mL
Erlenmeyer flask fitted with a Teflon stopper. Add 20 mL of methanol and
80 mL of petroleum ether, in that order, to the flask. Shake on a wrist-
action shaker for two hr. The solid portion of sample should mix freely.
If a smaller soil aliquot is used, scale down the amount of methanol
proportionally.
9.2.5.1 Filter the extract from Paragraph 9.2.5 through a
glass funnel fitted with a glass fiber filter and filled with
anhydrous sodium sulfate into a 500-mL Kuderna-Oanish (KO)
concentrator fitted with a 10-mL concentrator tube. Add 50 mL of
petroleum ether to the Erlenmeyer flask, restopper the flask and
swirl the sample gently, remove the stopper carefully and decant the
solvent through the funnel as above. Repeat this procedure with two
additional 50-mL aliquots of petroleum ether. Wash the sodium
sulfate 1n the funnel with two additional 5-mL portions of petroleum
ether.
9.2.5.2 Add a Teflon or PFTE boiling chip and a three-ball
Snyder column to the KQ flask. Concentrate in a 70*C water bath to
an apparent volume of 10 ml. Remove the apparatus from the water
bath and allow 1t to cool for 5 min.
9.2.5.3 Add 50 mL of hexane and a new boiling chip to the KD
flask. Concentrate in a water bath to an apparent volume of 10 ml.
Remove the apparatus from the water bath and allow to cool for 5
min.
9.2.5.4 Remove and invert the Snyder column and rinse it down
into the KO with two 1-mL portions of hexane. Decant the contents
of the KD and concentrator tube into a 125-mL separatory funnel.
Rinse the KD with two additional 5-mL portions of hexane, combine.
Proceed with Step 9.3.
9.2.6 Aqueous samples: Mark the water meniscus on the side of the
1-L sample bottle for later determination of the exact sample volume.
8280 D-247
Revision 0
Date September 1986
-------
Pour the entire sample (approximately 1-L) Into a 2-L separatory funnel.
Proceed with Step 9.2.6.1.
NOTE: A continuous liquid-liquid extractor may be used 1n place of
a separatory funnel when experience with a sample from a
given source Indicates that a serious emulsion problem will
result or an emulsion 1s encountered using a separatory
funnel. Add 60 ml of methylene chloride to the sample
bottle, seal, and shake for 30 sec to rinse the Inner
surface. Transfer the solvent to the extractor. Repeat the
sample bottle rinse with an additional 50- to 100-mL portion
of methylene chloride and add the rinse to the extractor.
Add 200 to 500 mL of methylene chloride to the distilling
flask; add sufficient reagent water to ensure proper
operation, and extract for 24 hr. Allow to cool, then detach
the distilling flask. Dry and concentrate the extract as
described in Paragraphs 9.2.6.1 and 9.2.6.2. Proceed with
Paragraph 9.2.6.3.
9.2.6.1 Add 60 ml methylene chloride to the sample bottle,
seal and shake 30 sec to rinse the inner surface. Transfer the
solvent to the separatory funnel and extract the sample by shaking
the funnel for 2 m1n with periodic venting. Allow the organic layer
to separate from the water phase for a minimum of 10 min. If the
emulsion interface between layers is more than one-third the volume
of the solvent layer, the analyst must employ mechanical techniques
to complete the phase separation. Collect the methylene chloride
(3 x 60 mL) directly Into a 500-mL Kuderna-Oanish concentrator
(mounted with a 10-mL concentrator tube) by passing the sample
extracts through a filter funnel packed with a glass wool plug and
5 g of anhydrous sodium sulfate. After the third extraction, rinse
the sodium sulfate with an additional 30 ml of methylene chloride to
ensure quantitative transfer.
9.2.6.2 Attach a Snyder column and concentrate the extract on
a water bath until the apparent volume of the liquid reaches 5 mL.
Remove the K-D apparatus and allow it to drain and cool for at least
10 min. Remove the Snyder column, add 50 ml hexane, re-attach the
Snyder column and concentrate to approximately 5 mL. Add a new
boiling chip to the K-D apparatus before proceeding with the second
concentration step.
Rinse the flask and the lower joint with 2 x 5 mL hexane and combine
rinses with extract to give a final volume of about 15 mL.
9.2.6.3 Determine the original sample volume by refilling the
sample bottle to the mark and transferring the liquid to a 1,000-mL
graduated cylinder. Record the sample volume to the nearest 5 mL.
Proceed with Paragraph 9.3.
9.3 In a 250-mL Separatory funnel, partition the solvent (15 mL hexane)
against 40 mL of 20 percent (w/v) potassium hydroxide. Shake for 2 min.
8280 D-248
Revision Q
Date September 1986
-------
Remove and discard the aqueous layer (bottom). Repeat the base washing until
no color is visible in the bottom layer (perform base washings a maximum of
four times). Strong base (KOH) is 'known to degrade certain PCOD/PCDF's,
contact time must be minimized.
9.4 Partition the solvent (15 ml hexane) against 40 ml of 5 percent
(w/v) sodium chloride. Shake for 2 m1n. Remove and discard aqueous layer
(bottom).
NOTE: Care should be taken due to the heat of neutralization and
hydration.
9.5 Partition the solvent (15 ml hexane) against 40 ml of concentrated
sulfuric acid. Shake for 2 min. Remove and discard the aqueous layer
(bottom). Repeat the acid washings until no color is visible in the acid
layer. (Perform acid washings a maximum of four times.)
9.6 Partition the extract against 40 ml of 5 percent (w/v) sodium
chloride. Shake for 2 min. Remove and discard the aqueous layer (bottom).
Dry the organic layer by pouring through a funnel containing anhydrous sodium
sulfate into a 50-mL round bottom flask, wash the separatory funnel with two
15-mL portions of hexane, pour through the funnel, and combine the hexane
extracts. Concentrate the hexane solution to near dryness with a rotary
evaporator (35'C water bath), making sure all traces of toluene are removed.
(Use of blowdown with an inert gas to concentrate the extract is also
permitted).
9.7 Pack a gravity column (glass 300-mm x 10.5-mm), fitted with a Teflon
stopcock, in the following manner:
Insert a glass-wool plug into the bottom of the column. Add a 4-g layer
of sodium sulfate. Add a 4-g layer of Woelm super 1 neutral alumina. Tap the
top of the column gently. Woelm super 1 neutral alumina need not be activated
or cleaned prior to use but should be stored 1n a sealed desiccator. Add a 4-
g layer of sodium sulfate to cover the alumina. Elute with 10 ml of hexane
and close the stopcock just prior to the exposure of the sodium sulfate layer
to air. Discard the eluant. Check the column for channeling. If channeling
is present discard the column. Do not tap a wetted column.
9.8 Dissolve the residue from Step 9.6 in 2 ml of hexane and apply the
hexane solution to the top of the column. Elute with enough hexane (3-4 mL)
to complete the transfer of the sample cleanly to the surface of the alumina.
Discard the eluant.
9.8.1 Elute with 10 ml of 8 percent (v/v) methylene chloride in
hexane. Check by GC/MS analysis that no PCOD's or PCDF's are eluted in
this fraction. See Paragraph 9.9.1.
9.8.2 Elute the PCDD's and PCDF's from the column with 15 mL of 60
percent (v/v) methylene chloride 1n hexane and collect this fraction in a
conical shaped (15-mL) concentrator tube.
8280 D-249
Revision 0
Date September 1986
-------
9.9 Carbon column cleanup;
Prepare a carbon column as described In Paragraph 4.18.
9.9.1 Using a carefully regulated stream of nitrogen (Paragraph
4.15), concentrate the 8 percent fraction from the alumina column
(Paragraph 9.8.1) to about 1 ml. Wash the sides of the tube with a small
volume of hexane (1 to 2 ml) and reconcentrate to about 1 ml. Save this
8 percent concentrate for GC/MS analysis to check for breakthrough of
PCDO's and PCDF's. Concentrate the 60 percent fraction (Paragraph 9.8.2)
to about 2 to 3 ml. Rinse the carbon with 5 ml cyclohexane/methylene
chloride (50:50 v/v) 1n the forward direction of flow and then in the
reverse direction of flow. While still in the reverse direction of flow,
transfer the sample concentrate to the column and elute with 10 ml of
cyclohexane/methylene chloride (50:50 v/v) and 5 ml of methylene
chloride/methanol/benzene (75:20:5, v/v). Save all above eluates and
combine (this fraction may be used as a check on column efficiency). Now
turn the column over and in the direction of forward flow elute the
PCDD/PCDF fraction with 20 ml toluene.
NOTE: Be sure no carbon fines are present in the eluant.
9.9.2 Alternate carbon column cleanup. Proceed as in Section 9.9.1
to obtain the 60 percent fraction re-concentrated to 400 ul which is
transferred to an HPLC Injector loop (1 ml). The Injector loop is
connected to the optional column described 1n Paragraph 4.18. Rinse the
centrifuge tube with 500 ul of hexane and add this rinsate to the
injector loop. Load the combined concentrate and rinsate onto the
column. Elute the column at 2 ml/min, ambient temperature, with 30 ml of
cyclohexane/methylene chloride 1:1 (v/v). Discard the eluant. Backflush
the column with 40 ml toluene to elute and collect PCDO's and PCDF's
(entire fraction). The column is then discarded and 30 ml of
cyclohexane/methylene chloride 1:1 (v/v) is pumped through a new column
to prepare 1t for the next sample.
9.9.3 Evaporate the toluene fraction to about 1 ml on a rotary
evaporator using a water bath at 50*C. Transfer to a 2.0-ml Reacti-vial
using a toluene rinse and concentrate to the desired volume using a
stream of N£. The final volume should be 100 ul for soil samples and
500 ul for sludge, still bottom, and fly ash samples; this is provided
for guidance, the correct volume will depend on the relative concentra-
tion of target analytes. Extracts which are determined to be outside the
calibration range for Individual analytes must be diluted or a smaller
portion of the sample must be re-extracted. Gently swirl the solvent on
the lower portion of the vessel to ensure complete dissolution of the
PCDO's and PCDF's.
9.10 Approximately 1 hr before HRGC/LRMS analysis, transfer an aliquot
of the extract to a micro-vial (Paragraph 4.16). Add to this sufficient
recovery standard (13Ci2l,2,3,4-TCDO) to give a concentration of 500 ng/ml.
(Example: 36 ul aliquot of extract and 4 ul of recovery standard solution.
Remember to adjust the final result to correct for this dilution. Inject an
appropriate aliquot (1 or 2 ul) of the sample into the GC/MS instrument.
8280 D-250
Revision 0
Date September 1986
-------
10.0 6C/MS ANALYSIS
10.1 When toluene 1s employed as the final solvent use of a bonded phase
column from Paragraph 4.3.2 1s recommended. Solvent exchange into tridecane
1s required for other liquid phases or nonbonded columns (CP-S11-88).
NOTE: Chromatographic conditions must be adjusted to account for solvent
boiling points.
10.2 Calculate response factors for standards relative to the Internal
standards, 13Ci2-2,3,7,8-TCOO and 13c12-OCOD (see Section 11). Add the
recovery standard (13Ci2-l»2,3,4-TCDD) to the samples prior to injection. The
concentration of the recovery standard 1n the sample extract must be the same
as that 1n the calibration standards used to measure the response factors.
10.3 Analyze samples with selected ion monitoring, using all of the ions
listed in Table 2. It 1s recommended that the GC/MS run be divided into five
selected 1on monitoring sections, namely: (1) 243, 257,, 304, 306, 320, 322,
332, 334, 340, 356, 376 (TCOO's, TCDF's, "C^-labeled internal and recovery
standards, PeCDO's, PeCDF's, HxCOE); (2) 277, 293, 306, 332, 338, 340, 342,
354, 356, 358, 410 (peCDD's, PeCDF's, HpCOE); (3) 311, 327, 340, 356, 372,
374, 376, 388, 390, 392, 446, (HxCOD's, HxCDF's, OCDE); (4) 345, 361, 374,
390, 406, 408, 410, 422, 424, 426, 480 (HpCOD's, HpCOF's, NCOE) and (5) 379,
395, 408, 424, 442, 444, 458, 460, 470, 472, 514 (OCDO, OCDF, 13Ci2-OCOD,
DCDE). Cycle time not to exceed 1 sec/descriptor. It 1s recommended that
selected 1on monitoring section 1 should be applied during the GC run to
encompass the retention window (determined 1n Paragraph 6.3) of the first- and
Iast-elut1ng tetra-chlorlnated Isomers. If a response 1s observed at m/z 340
or 356, then the SC/MS analysis must be repeated; selected ion monitoring
section 2 should then be applied to encompass the retention window of the
first- and Iast-elut1ng penta-chlorinated isomers. HxCDE, HpCDE, OCDE, NCOE,
DCDE, are abbreviations for hexa-, hepta-, octa-, nona-, and decachlorinated
diphenyl ether, respectively.
10.4 Identfffcation criteria for PCDD's and PCDF's;
10.4.1 All of the characteristic ions, i.e. quantisation ion,
confirmation Ions, listed 1n Table 2 for each class of PCDD and PCDF,
must be present in the reconstructed 1on chromatogram. It is desirable
that the M - COC1 1on be monitored as an additional requirement.
Detection limits will be based on quantitation ions within the molecules
in cluster.
10.4.2 The maximum intensity of each of the specified charac-
teristic Ions must coincide within 2 scans or 2 sec.
10.4.3 The relative intensity of the selected, isotopic ions within
the molecular ion cluster of a homologous series of PCDD's of PCDF's must
lie within the range specified in Table 3.
10.4.4 The GC peaks assigned to a given homologous series must have
retention times within the window established for that series by the
column performance solution.
8280 D-251
Revision 0
Date September 1986
-------
10.5 Quantltate the PCDO and PCDF peaks from the response relative to
the appropriate Internal standard. Recovery of each Internal standard) vs.
the recovery standard must be greater than 40 percent. It Is recommended that
samples with recoveries of less than 40 percent or greater than 120 percent be
re-extracted and re-analyzed.
NOTE: These criteria are used to assess method performance; when
properly applied, Isotope dilution techniques are Independent of
internal standard recovery.
In those circumstances where these procedures do not yield a definitive
conclusion, the use of high resolution mass spectrometry or HRGC/MS/MS is
suggested.
11.0 CALCULATIONS
NOTE: The relative response factors of a given congener within any
homologous series are known to be different. However, for
purposes of these calculations, 1t will be assumed that every
congener within a given series has the same relative response
factor. In order to minimize the effect of this assumption on
risk assessment, a 2,3,7,8-substltuted Isomer that 1s
commercially available was chosen as representative of each
series. All relative response factor calculations for a given
homologous series are based on that compound.
11.1 Determine the concentration of Individual Isomers of tetra-, penta,
and hexa-CDD/CDF according to the equation:
Qis x A
Concentration, ng/g = G x A^ x RRF
where:
Qis = ng of internal standard HCi2-2,3,7,8-TCDO, added to the sample
before extraction.
G = g of sample extracted.
As = area of quantltation ion of the compound of interest.
Ajs = area of quantltation ion (m/z 334) of the Internal standard,
!3Ci2-2,3,7,8-TCDD.
RRF = response factor of the quantltation ion of the compound of
interest relative to m/z 334 of 13Ci2-2,3,7,8-TCOO.
NOTE: Any dilution factor Introduced by following the procedure in
Paragraph 9.10 should be applied to this calculation.
8280 D-252
Revision
Date September 1986
-------
11.1.1 Determine the concentration of individual isomers of hepta-
CDD/CDF and the concentration of OCDD and OCDF according to the equation:
Q1s x As
Concentration, ng/g = G x A1$ x RRF
where:
Qis * "9 of Internal standard 13Ci2-°cDDf added to the sample before
extraction.
G » g of sample extracted.
AS = area of quantisation ion of the compound of interest.
Ais = area of quantitation ion (m/z 472) of the internal standard,
13c12-OCDO.
RRF = response factor of the quantitation ion of the compound of
interest relative to m/z 472 of 13Ci2-OCDD.
NOTE: Any dilution factor introduced by following the procedure in
Paragraph 9.10 should be applied to this calculation.
11.1.2 Relative response factors are calculated using data obtained
from the analysis of multi-level calibration standards according to the
equation:
RRF s A x C
Ais x Ls
where:
AS = area of quantitation ion of the compound of interest.
Ais * area °f quantitation ion of the appropriate internal standard
(m/z 334 for 13c12-2,3,7,8-TCDD: m/z 472 for 13c12-OCDD).
Cfs = concentration of the appropriate internal standard,
13Ci2-2,3,7,8-TCDD or "c^-OCDO)
Cs = concentration of the compound of interest.
11.1.3 The concentrations of unknown isomers of TCDD shall be
calculated using the mean RRF determined for 2,3,7,8-TCDD.
The concentrations of unknown Isomers of PeCDD shall be calculated
using the mean RRF determined for 1,2,3,7,8-PeCDO or any available
2,3,7,8,X-PeCDD isomer.
8280 D-253
Revision
Date September 1986
-------
The concentrations of unknown Isomers of HxCDD shall be calculated
using the mean RRF determined for 1,2,3,4,7,8-HxCDO or any available
2,3,7,8,-X,Y-HXCDD Isomer.
The concentrations of unknown Isomers of HpCDO shall be calculated
using the mean RRF determined for 1,2,3,4,6,7,8-HpCOO or any available
2,3,7,8,X,YlZ-HpCDD isomer.
The concentrations of unknown Isomers of TCDF shall be calculated
using the mean RRF determined for 2,3,7,8-TCOF.
The concentrations of unknown Isomers of PeCDF shall be calculated
using the mean RRF determined for 1,2,3,7,8-PeCDF or any available
2,3,7,8,X-PeCDF isomer.
The concentrations of unknown Isomers of HxCDF shall be calculated
using the mean RRF determined for 1,2,4,7,8-HxCDF or any available
2,3,7,8-X.Y-HxCDF isomer.
The concentrations of unknown Isomers of HpCDF shall be calculated
using the mean RRF determined for 1,2,3,4,6,7,8-HpCQF or any available
2,3,7f8,X,Y,Z-HpCDF Isomer.
The concentration of the octa-CDO and octa-COF shall be calculated
using the mean RRF determined for each.
Mean relative response factors for selected PCDD's and PCDF's are
given in Table 4.
11.1.4 Calculate the percent recovery, Rjs, for each internal
standard in the sample extract, using the equation:
A. Q
" - —!s_._x__rs— _
"is Ars x RFp x Qis
where:
Ars = Area of quantitation 1on (m/z 334) of the recovery standard,
l3Ci2-l,2,3,4-TCDD.
Qrs = ng of recovery standard, ^2-1,2, 3, 4-TCDD, added to
extract.
The response factor for determination of recovery is calculated using
data obtained from the analysis of the multi -level calibration standards
according to the equation:
's
8280 D-254
Revision
Date September 1986
-------
where:
Crs = Concentration of the recovery standard,
11.1.5 Calculation of total concentration of all Isomers within
each homologous series of PCDD's and PCDF's.
Total concentration , Sum of the concentrations of the Individual
of PCOO's or PCOF's PCDO or PCDF Isomers
11.4 Report results 1n nanograms per gram; when duplicate and spiked
samples are reanalyzed, all data obtained should be reported.
11.5 Accuracy and Precision. Table 5 gives the precision data for
revised Method 8280 for selected analytes In the matrices shown. Table 6
lists recovery data for the same analyses. Table 2 shows the linear range and
variation of response factors for selected analyte standards. Table 8
provides the method detection limits as measured in specific sample matrices.
11.6 Method Detection Limit. The Method Detection Limit (MDL) is
defined as the minimum concentration of a substance that can be measured and
reported with 99 percent confidence that the value is above zero. The
procedure used to determine the MDL values reported 1n Table 8 was obtained
from Appendix A of EPA Test Methods manual, EPA-600/4-82-057 July 1982,
"Methods for Organic Chemical Analysis of Municipal and Industrial
Wastewater."
11.7 Maximum Holding Time (MHT). Is that time at which a 10 percent
change in the analyte concentration (C^io) occurs and the precision of the
method of measurement allows the 10 percent change to be statistically
different from the 0 percent change (Cto) at the 90 percent confidence level.
When the precision of the method is not sufficient to statistically
discriminate a 10 percent change in the concentration from 0 percent change,
then the maximum holding time 1s that time where the percent change in the
analyte concentration (Ctn) is statistically different than the concentration
at 0 percent change (Cto) and greater than 10 percent change at the 90 percent
confidence level.
8280 D-255
Revision 0
Date September 1986
-------
TABLE 1. REPRESENTATIVE GAS CHROMATOGRAPH RETENTION TIMES* OF ANALYTES
Analyte
2,3,7,8-TCOF
2,3,7,8-TCDO
1,2,3,4-TCOO
1,2,3,4.7-PeCDD
1,2,3, 4,7, 8-HxCDD
1,2,3,4,6,7,8-HpCOD
OCDO
50-ra
CP-Sn-88
25.2
23.6
24.1
30.0
39.5
57.0
NM
30-m
OB-5
17.8
17.4
17.3
20.1
22.1
24.1
25.6
3— m
SP-2250
26.7
26.7
26.5
28.1
30.6
33.7
NM
*Retention time in min, using temperature programs shown below.
NM = not measured.
Temperature Programs;
CP-S11-88 60'C-190'C at 20'/m1n; 190*-240* at SVmln.
D8-5 170*, 10 min; then at 8*/min to 320*C, hold
30 m x 0.25 mm at 320*C 20 min (until OCDD elutes).
Thin film (0.25 um)
SP-2250 70*-320* at lOVmtnute.
Column Manufacturers
CP-S11-88 Chrompack, Incorporated, Brldgewater, New Jersey
OB-5, J and W Scientific, Incorporated, Rancho Cordova,
California
SP-2250 Supelco, Incorporated, Bellefonte, Pennsylvania
8280 D-256
Revision
Date September 1986
-------
TABLE 2. IONS SPECIFIED3 FOR SELECTED ION MONITORING
FOR PCDD'S AND PCDF'S
Quantltation
1on
Confirmation
ions
M-COC1
PCDD'S
13c12-Tetra
Tetra
Penta
Hexa
Hepta
Octa
PCDF's
334
322
356
390
424
460
472
332
320
354;358
388,-392
422;426
458
470
257
293
327
361
395
Tetra
Penta
Hexa
Hepta
Octa
306
340
374
408
444
304
338; 342
372;376
406; 410
442
243
277
311
345
379
alons at m/z 376 (HxCDE), 410 (HpCDE), 446 (OCOE), 480 (NCDE) and 514 (DCDE)
are also Included in the scan monitoring sections (1) to (5), respectively.
See Paragraph 10.3.
TABLE 3. CRITERIA FOR ISOTOPIC RATIO MEASUREMENTS FOR PCDO'S AND PCDF'S
Selected ions (m/z)
Relative intensity
PCDD'S
Tetra
Penta
Hexa
Hepta
Octa
PCDF's
Tetra
Penta
Hexa
Hepta
Octa
320/322
358/356
392/390
426/424
458/460
304/306
342/340
376/374
410/408
442/444
0.65-0.89
0.55-0.75
0.69-0.93
0.83-1.12
0.75-1.01
0.65-0.89
0.55-0.75
0.69-0.93
0.83-1.12
0.75-1.01
8280 D-257
Revision 0
Date September 1986
-------
TABLE 4. MEAN RELATIVE RESPONSE FACTORS OF CALIBRATION STANDARDS
Analyte
2,3,7,8-TCDD
1,2,3,7,8-PeCDD
1,2,3,4,7,8-HxCDD
l,2,3,4,6,7,8-HpCDOb
OCDDb
2,3,7,8-TCDF
1,2,3,7,8-PeCDF
1,2,3,4,7,8-HxCDF
1, 2,3.4,6, 7,8-HpCDFb
OCDFb
13C12-2,3,7,8-TCDD
13Ci2-l,2,3,4-TCDD
13C12-OCDD
RRFa
1.13
0.70
0.51
1.08
1.30
1.70
1.25
0.84
1.19
1.57
1.00
0.75
1.00
RSDX
(n - 5)
3.9
10.1
6.6
6.6
7.2
8.0
8.7
9.4
3.8
8.6
-
4.6
-
Quantisation ion
(m/z)
322
356
390
424
460
306
340
374
444
408
334
334
472
aThe RRF value is the mean of the five determinations made. Nominal weights
injected were 0.2, 0.5, 1.0, 2.0 and 5.0 ng.
bRRF values for these analytes were determined relative to 13Ci2-OCDD. All
other RRF's were determined relative to 13Ci2-2,3,7,8-TCDD.
Instrument Conditions/Tune - GC/MS system was tuned as specified in
Paragraph 6.3. RRF data was acquired under
SIM control, as specified in Paragraph 10.3.
GC Program - The GC column temperature was programmed as specified in
Paragraph 4.3.2(b).
8280 D-258
Revision
Date September 1986
-------
TABLE 5. PRECISION DATA FOR REVISED METHOD 8280
Compound
2,3,7,8-TCDD
1,2,3,4-TCOD
1,3,6,8-TCDD
1,3,7,9-TCDD
1,3,7,8-TCDD
1,2,7,8-TCDD
1,2,8,9-TCDD
-
Analyte
Matrix3
clay
son
sludge
fly ash
still bottom
clay
soil
sludge
fly ash
still bottom
clay
soil
sludge
fly ash
still bottom
clay
soil
sludge
fly ash
still bottom
clay
soil
sludge
fly ash
still bottom
clay
soil
sludge
fly ash
still bottom
clay
soil
sludge
fly ash
still bottom
level (ng/g)
Native
N0b
378
NO
NO
487
NO
NO
NO
38.5
NO
NO
NO
NO
19.1
227
NO
NO
NO
58.4
NO
ND
NO
ND
16.0
422
NO
NO
ND
2.6
NO
ND
NO
NO
NO
ND
Native
+ spike
5.0
378
125
46
487
5.0
25.0
125
38.5
2500
2.5
25.0
125
19.1
2727
2.5
25.0
125.0
58.4
2500
5.0
25.0
125
16.0
2920
5.0
25.0
125
2.6
2500
5.0
25.0
125
46
2500
N
4
4
4
2
4
3
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
2
2
4
4
4
2
2
4
4
4
4
2
4
4
4
3
2
4
4
4
2
2
Percent
RSO
4.4
2.8
4.8
-
24
1.7
1.1
9.0
7.9
-
7.0
5.1
3.1
-
-
19
2.3
6.5
-
-
7.3
1.3
5.8
3.5
-
7.7
9.0
7.7
23
-
10
0.6
1.9
-
-
8280 D-259
Revision
Date September 1986
-------
TABLE 5 (Continued)
Compound
1, 2,3,4, 7-PeCDD
1,2,3, 7,8-PeCDD
1,2,3,4,7,8-HxCDD
1,2,3,4,6,7,8-HpCDO
1,2,7,8-TCDF
1,2,3,7,8-PeCDF
1,2,3,4,7,8-HxCDF
*
Analyte
Matrix3
clay
soil
sludge
fly ash
still bottom
clay
soil
sludge
fly ash
still bottom
clay
soil
sludge
fly ash
still bottom
clay
soil
sludge0
fly ash
still bottom
clay
soil
sludge
fly ash
still bottom
clay
soil
sludge
fly ash
still bottom3
clay
v >»j
soil
sludge
fly ash
still bottom
level (ng/g)
Native
NO
NO
NO
25.8
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
8760
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
7.4
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
25600
NO
NO
13.6
24.2
NO
Native
+ spike
5.0
25.0
125
25.8
2500
5.0
25.0
125
46
2500
5.0
25.0
125
46
2500
5.0
25.0
8780
_
-
5.0
25.0
125
7.4
2500
5.0
25.0
125
46
28100
5.0
25.0
139
24.2
2500
N
4
4
4
2
2
4
4
4
2
2
4
4
4
2
2
4
4
4
_
-
4
4
4
3
2
4
4
4
2
2
4
4
4
4
2
Percent
RSO
10
2.8
4.6
6.9
-
25
20
4.7
_
-
38
8.8
3.4
_
-
.
_
_
_
-
3.9
1.0
7.2
7.6
-
6.1
5.0
4.8
_
-
26
6.8
5.6
13.5
-
8280 D-260
Revision 0
Date September 1986
-------
TABLE 5. (Continued)
Compound
OCDF
Analyte
Matrix3
clay
soil
sludge
fly ash
still bottom
level (ng/g)
Native Percent
Native + spike N RSD
NO -
NO -
192 317 4 3.3
NO -
NO ...
amatrix types:
clay: pottery clay.
soil: Times Beach, Missouri, soil blended to form a homogeneous sample.
This sample was analyzed as a performance evaluation sample for the Contract
Laboratory Program (CLP) in April 1983. The results from EMSL-LV and 8
contract laboratories using the CLP protocol were 305.8 ng/g 2,3,7,8-TCDD
with a standard deviation of 81.0.
fly ash: ash from a municipal incinerator; resource recovery ash No. 1.
still bottom: distillation bottoms (tar) from 2,4-dichlorophenol production.
sludge: sludge from cooling tower which received both creosote and
pentachlorophenolic wastewaters.
Cleanup of clay, soil and fly ash samples was through alumina column only.
(Carbon column not used.)
- not detected at concentration injected (final volume 0.1 mL or greater).
cEstimated concentration out of calibration range of standards.
8280 D-261
Revision
Date September 1986
-------
TABLE 6. RECOVERY DATA FOR REVISED METHOD 8280
Compound
2,3,7,8-TCDD
1,2,3,4-TCDO
1,3,6,8-TCDD
1,3,7,9-TCDD
1,3,7,8-TCDD
1,2,7,8-TCDD
1,2,8,9-TCDD
Matrix3
clay
soil
sludge
fly ash
still bottom
clay
soil
sludge
fly ash
still bottom
clay
soil
sludge
fly ash
still bottom
clay
soil
sludge
fly ash
still bottom
clay
soil
sludge
fly ash
still bottom
clay
soil
sludge
fly ash
still bottom
clay
soil
sludge
fly ash
still bottom
Nativeb
(ng/g)
NO
378
NO
NO
487
NO
NO
NO
38.5
NO
NO
NO
NO
19.1
227
NO
NO
NO
58.4
NO
NO
NO
NO
16.0
615
NO
NO
NO
2.6
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
Sp1kedc
level
(ng/g)
5.0
-
125
46
-
5.0
25.0
125
46
2500
2.5
25.0
125
46
2500
2.5
25.0
125
46
2500
5.0
25.0
125
46
2500
5.0
25.0
125
46
2500
5.0
25.0
125
46
2500
Mean
percent
recovery
61.7
-
90.0
90.0
-
67.0
60.3
73.1
105.6
93.8
39.4
64.0
64.5
127.5
80.2
68.5
61.3
78.4
85.0
91.7
68.0
79.3
78.9
80.2
90.5
68.0
75.3
80.4
90.4
88.4
59.7
60.3
72.8
114.3
81.2
8280 D-262
Revision 0
Date September 1986
-------
TABLE 6. (Continued)
Compound
1,2,3,4,7-PeCDD
1,2,3,7,8-PeCDD
1,2,3,4,7,8-HxCDD
1,2,3,4,6,7,8-HpCDD
2,3,7,8-TCDD
(C-13)
1,2,7,8-TCOF
1,2,3,7,8-PeCDF
Matrix2
clay
soil
sludge
fly ash
still bottom
clay
soil
sludge
fly ash
still bottom
clay
soil
sludge
fly ash
still bottom
clay
soil
sludged
fly ash
still bottom
clay
soil
sludge
fly ash
still bottom
clay
soil
sludge
fly ash
still bottom
clay
soil
sludge
fly ash — .-
still bottom
Native13
(ng/g)
NO
NO
NO
25.8
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO •
ND
NO
8780
ND
NO
ND
ND
ND
NO
NO
NO
ND
ND
7.4
ND
ND
ND
ND
ND
25600
Spikedc
level
(ng/g)
5.0
25.0
125
46
2500
5.0
25.0
125
46
2500
5.0
25.0
125
46
2500
5.0
25.0
125
-
-
5.0
25.0
125
46
2500
5.0
25.0
125
46
2500
5.0
25.0
125
46
2500
Mean
percent
recovery
58.4
62.2
79.2
102.4
81.8
61.7
68.4
81.5
104.9
84.0
46.8
65.0
81.9
125.4
89.1
NO
ND
-
-
64.9
78.8
78.6
88.6
69.7
65.4
71.1
80.4
90.4
104.5
57.4
64.4
84.8
105.8
-
8280 D-263
Revision Q
Date September 1986
-------
TABLE 6. (Continued)
Compound
1,2,3,4,7,8-HxCDF
OCDF
Matrix3
clay
soil
sludge
fly ash
still bottom
clay
soil
sludge
fly ash
still bottom
Nat1veb
(ng/g)
NO
NO
13.6
24.2
NO
NO
NO
192
NO
NO
Sp1kedc
level
(ng/g)
5.0
25.0
125
46
2500
.
-
125
-
—
Mean
percent
recovery
54.2
68.5
82.2
91.0
92.9
_
-
86.8
-
-
amatrix types:
clay: pottery clay,
soil: Times Beach, Missouri soil blended to form a homogeneous sample. This
sample was analyzed as a performance evaluation sample for the Contract
Laboratory Program (CLP) in April 1983. The results from EMSL-LV and 8
contract laboratories using the CLP protocol were 305.8 ng/g 2,3,7,8-TCOO
with a standard deviation of 81.0.
fly ash: ash from a municipal incinerator: resource recovery ash No. 1.
still bottom: distillation bottoms (tar) from 2,4-dichlorophenol production.
sludge: sludge from cooling tower which received both creosote and
pentachlorophenol wastewaters.
The clay, soil and fly ash samples were subjected to alumina column cleanup,
no carbon column was used.
volume of concentrate 0.1 mL or greater, NO means below quantification
limit, 2 or more samples analyzed.
cAmount of analyte added to sample, 2 or more samples analyzed.
^Estimated concentration out of calibration range of standards.
8280 D-264
Revision 0
Date September 1986
-------
TABLE 7. LINEAR RANGE AND VARIATIOIN OF RESPONSE FACTORS
Analyte Linear range tested (pg) nb
l,2,7,8-TCOFa
2,3,7,8-TCDOa
2,3,7,8-TCDF
50-6000
50-7000
300-4000
8
7
5
Mean RF
1.634
0.721
2.208
XRSO
12.0
11.9
7.9
aResponse factors for these analytes were calculated using 2,3,7,8-TCDF as the
internal standard. The response factors for 2,3,7,8-TCDF were calculated vs.
13C12-1,2,3,4-TCDD.
bEach value of n represents a different concentration level.
8280 D-265
Revision
Date September 1986
-------
TABLE 8. METHOD DETECTION LIMITS OF I3C12 - LABELED PCDD'S and PCDF'S
IN REAGENT WATER (PPT) AND ENVIRONMENTAL SAMPLES (PPB)
13C .-Labeled
Analyte
2,3,7,8-TCDD
1,2,3,7,8-PeCDD
1,2,3,6,7,8-HxCDD
1,2,3,4,6, 7,8-HpCDD
OCDD
2,3,7,8-TCDF
1,2,3,7,8-PeCDF
1,2,3,4,7,8-HxCDF
Reagent
Water
0.44
1.27
2.21
2.77
3.93
0.63
1.64
2.53
Missouri
Soil5
0.17
0.70
1.25
1.87
2.35
0.11
0.33
0.83
??
Ash
0.07
0.25
0.55
1.41
2.27
0.06
0.16
0.30
Industrial
Sludge0
0.82
1.34
2.30
4.65
6.44
0.46
0.92
2.17
Stilly
Bottom
1.81
2.46
6.21
4.59
10. 1
0.26
1.61
2.27
Fuel
Oil*
0.75
2.09
5.02
8.14
23.2
0.46
0.83
2.09
Fuel Oil/
Sawdust
0.13
0.18
0.36
0.51
1.48
0.4'J
0.43
2.22
.Sample size I ,000 mL.
Sample size 10 g.
.Sample size 2 g.
Sample size 1 g.
Note: The final sample-extract volume was 100 uL for all samples.
Matrix types used in MDL Study:
- Reagent water: distilled, deionized laboratory water.
- Missouri soil: soil blended to form a homogeneous sample.
- Fly-ash: alkaline ash recovered from the electrostatic precipitator of
a coal-burning power plant.
- Industrial sludge: sludge from cooling tower which received creosotic
and pentachlorophenolic wastewaters. Sample was ca. 70 percent water,
mixed with oil and sludge.
- Still-bottom: distillation bottoms (tar) from 2,4-dichlorophenol
production.
- Fuel oil: wood-preservative solution from the modified Thermal Process
tanks. Sample was an oily liquid (>90 percent oil) containing no
water.
- Fuel oil/Sawdust: sawdust was obtained as a very fine powder from the
local lumber yard. Fuel oil (described above) was mixed ac che 4
percent (w/w) level.
Procedure used for the Determination of Method Detection Limits was obtained
from "Methods for Organic Chemical Analysis of Municipal and Industrial
Uastewater" Appendix A, EPA-600/4-82-057, July 1982. Using this procedure,
the method detection limit is defined as the minimum concentration of a
substance that can be measured and reported with 99 percent confidence tnat
the value is above zero.
8280 D_266
Revision 0
Date September 1986
-------
100.0-1
a
a>
O 73
(vi n>
rt <
O
n> =>
50-
0)
*-•
c
0
15:00
18:00 21:00 24:00
Retention Time
27:00
Figure 2. Mass Chromatogram of Selected PCOD and PCOF Congeners,
-------
METHOO 8290
oi8ENzo-p-oroxiiNs ANO POLYCHI_OPIN*TEO
6. 1
o
Perform Initial
callBratlon on
CC/MS «»«t*«"
6.9
10.2
Calculate
resoonse
factor* for
stanaaras
Oo rout in*
calioratlon
to. 3
Analyze
•a«ol*s wttn
•elected ion
monitor ma
». a
Extract
•amole uitng
aooroorlate
xetnoa for tn*
••••te matrix
9.9
Preoare
caroan column:
do caroon
column cleanuc
10.3
Quantltate PCOO
and PCQP ocakc
O
O«termln«
concentrations
and reoort
reault*
f Stoo J
8280 D-268
Revision o
Date September 1986
-------
APPENDIX A
SIGNAL-TO-NOISE DETERMINATION METHODS
MANUAL DETERMINATION
This method corresponds to a manual determination of the S/N from a GC/MS
signal, based on the measurement of Its peak height relative to the baseline
noise. The procedure 1s composed of four steps as outlined below. (Refer to
Figure 1 for the following discussion).
1.
2.
3.
Estimate the peak-to-peak noise (N) by tracing the two lines (EI and
£2) defining the noise envelope. The lines should pass through the
estimated statistical mean of the positive and the negative peak
excursions as shown 1n Figure 1. In addition, the signal offset (0)
should be set high enough such that negative-going noise (except for
spurious negative spikes) is recorded.
Draw the line (C) corresponding to the mean
segments defining the noise envelope.
noise between the
Measure the height of the GC/MS signal (S) at the apex of the peak
relative to the mean noise C. For noisy GC/MS signals, the average
peak height should be measured from the estimated mean apex signal D
between £3 and £4.
4. Compute the S/N.
This method of S/N measurement 1s a
noise measurement in analytical chemistry.
conventional, accepted method of
INTERACTIVE COMPUTER GRAPHICAL METHOD
This method calls for the measurement of the GC/MS peak area using the
computer data system and Eq. 1:
A/t
S/N » A:/2t f Ar/2t
where t is the elution time window (time interval, t2~t2, at the base of the
peak used to measure the peak area A). (Refer to Figure 2, for the following
discussion) .
left
and Ar correspond to the areas of the noise level in a region to the
and to the right (Ar) of the GC peak of interest.
8280 D-269
Revision 0
Date September 1986
-------
The procedure to determine the S/N 1s as follows:
1. Estimate the average negative peak excursions of the noise (I.e.,
the low segment-E£-of the noise envelope). Line £3 should pass
through the estimated statistical mean of the negative-going noise
excursions. As stated earlier, It 1s Important to have the signal
offset (0) set high enough such that negative-going noise 1s
recorded.
2. Using the cross-hairs of the video display terminal, measure the
peak area (A) above a baseline corresponding to the mean negative
noise value (£2) and between the time tj and t2 where the GC/MS peak
Intersects the baseline, £3. Make note of the time width t^tg-ti.
3. Following a similar procedure as described above, measure the area
of the noise 1n a region to the left (Aj) and to the right (Ar) of
the GC/MS signal using a time window twice the size of t, that is,
2 x t.
The analyst must sound judgement in regard to the proper selection of
interference-free regions in the measurement of Aj and Ar. It is not
recommended to perform these noise measurements (Aj and Ar) in remote regions
exceeding ten time widths (lOt).
4. Compute the S/N using Eq. 1.
NOTE: If the noise does not occupy at least 10 percent of the vertical
axis (I.e., the noise envelope cannot be defined accurately), then
it is necessary to amplify the vertical axis so that the noise
occupies 20 percent of the terminal display (see Figure 3).
8280 D-270
Revision
Date September 1986
-------
FIGURE CAPTIONS
Figure l. Manual determination of S/N.
The peak height (S) 1s measured between the mean noise (lines C and
D). These mean signal values are obtained by tracing the line
between the baseline average noise extremes, EI and £2. and between
the apex average noise extremes, £3 and £4, at the apex of the
signal. Note, 1t is Imperative that the Instrument's Interface
amplifier electronic's zero offset be set high enough such that
negative-going baseline noise is recorded.
Figure 2. Interactive determination of S/N.
The peak area (A) is measured above the baseline average negative
noise £2 and between times tj and t£. The noise is obtained from
the areas AI and Ar measured to the left and to the right of the
peak of interest using time windows Tj and Tr (TjsTr=2t).
Figure 3. Interactive determination of S/N.
A) Area measurements without amplification of the vertical axis.
Note that the noise cannot be determined accurately by visual
means. 8) Area measurements after amplification (10X) of the
vertical axis so that the noise level occupies approximately 20
percent of the display, thus enabling a better visual estimation of
the baseline noise, EI, £2, and C.
8280 D-271
Revision Q
Date September 1986
-------
(fllZ
*UJ
o
o
I I
o
GO
o
10
o o
o
n
(/I
c
o
-------
= 558.10
= Tr = 2T
14.7
N
25:30 26:00 26:30
27:00 27:30 28:00
17 S8C.
Figure 2. Interactive Determination of S/N.
8280 D-273
Revision 0
Date September 1986
-------
100-
90-
80-
70-
60-
60-
40-
30-
20-
10-
A— *
A^ = 17.18
A^"^r
.. '
A = 686. 41
®
Ar= 13.32
.
LL
1 • 1 1 T" 1
25:30 26:00 36:30 27:00 27:30 28:00
= 706.59
25:30 26:00 26:30 27:00 27:30 28:00
Figure 3. Interactive Determination of S/N.
8280
Revision 0
Date September 1986
-------
APPENDIX B
RECOMMENDED SAFETY AND HANDLING PROCEDURES FOR PCDD'S/PCDF'S
1. The human toxicology of PCDD/PCDF 1s not well defined at present,
although the 2,3,7,8-TCOO Isoraer has been found to be acnegenlc, carcinogenic,
and teratogenlc 1n the course of laboratory animal studies. The 2,3,7,8-TCDD
Is a solid at room temperature, and has a relatively low vapor pressure. The
solubility of this compound in water is only about 200 parts-per-trillion, but
the solubility in various organic solvents ranges from about 0.001 perent to
0.14 percent. The physical properties of the 135 other tetra- through octa-
chlorinated PCDD/PCDF have not been well established, although it is presumed
that the physical properties of these congeners are generally similar to those
of the 2,3,7,8-TCDD isomer. On the basis of the available toxicological and
physical property data for TCOO, this compound, as well as the other PCDD and
PCDF, should be handled only by highly trained personnel who are thoroughly
versed in the appropriate procedures, and who understand the associated risks.
2. PCDD/PCDF and samples containing these are handled using essentially
the same techniques as those employed 1n handling radioactive or infectious
materials. Well-ventilated, controlled-access laboratories are required, and
laboratory personel entering these laboratories should wear appropriate safety
clothing, including disposable coveralls, shoe covers, gloves, and face and
head masks. During analytical operations which may give rise to aerosols or
dusts, personnel should wear respirators equipped with activated carbon
filters. Eye protection equipment (preferably full face shields) must be worn
at all times while working 1n the analytical laboratory with PCDD/PCDF.
Various types of gloves can be used by personnel, depending upon the
analytical operation being accomplished. Latex gloves are generally utilized,
and when handling samples thought to be particularly hazardous, an additional
set of gloves are also worn beneath the latex gloves (for example, Playtex
gloves supplied by American Scientific Products, Cat. No. 67216). Bench-tops
and other work surfaces in the laboratory should be covered with plastic-
backed absorbent paper during all analytical processing. When finely divided
samples (dusts, soils, dry chemicals) are processed, removal of these from
sample contaners, as well as other operations, including weighing,
transferring, and mixing with solvents, should all be accomplished within a
glove box. Glove boxes, hoods and the effluents from mechanical vacuum pumps
and gas chromatographs on the mass spectrometers should be vented to the
atmosphere preferably only after passing through HEPA particulate filters and
vapor-sorfaing charcoal.
3. All laboratory ware, safety clothing, and other items potentially
contaminated with PCDD/PCOF in the course of analyses must be carefully
secured and subjected to proper disposal. When feasible, liquid wastes are
concentrated, and the residues are placed in approved steel hazardous waste
drums fitted with heavy gauge polyethylene liners. Glass and combustible
items are compacted using a dedicated trash compactor used only for hazardous
waste materials and then placed in the same type of disposal drum. Disposal
of accumulated wastes is periodically accomplished by high temperature
incineration at EPA-aproved facilities.
8280 D-275
Revision 0
Date September 1986
-------
4. Surfaces of laboratory benches, apparatus and other appropriate areas
should be periodically subjected to surface wipe tests using solvent-wetted
filter paper which Is then analyzed to check for PCOD/PCOF contamination 1n
the laboratory. Typically, if the detectable level of TCOO or TCDF from such
a test is greater than 50 ng/m2, this Indicates the need for decontamination
of the laboratory. A typical action limit in terms of surface contamination
of the other PCOO/PCDF (summed) 1s 500 ng/m2. In the event of a spill within
the laboratory, absorbent paper is used to wipe up the spilled material and
this 1s then placed Into a hazardous waste drum. The contaminated surface is
subsequently cleaned thoroughly by washing with appropriate solvents
(methylene chloride followed by methanol) and laboratory detergents. This is
repeated until wipe tests indicate that the levels of surface contamination
are below the limits cited.
5. In the unlikely event that analytical personnel experience skin
contact with PCOO/PCDF or samples containing these, the contaminated skin
area should immediately be thoroughly scurbbed using mild soap and water.
Personnel involved in any such accident should subsequently be taken to the
nearest medical facility, preferably a facility whose staff is knowledgeable
in the toxicology of chlorinated hydrocarbons. Again, disposal of
contaminated clothing is accomplished by placing it in hazardous waste drums.
6. It Is desirable that personnel working 1n laboratories where
PCOD/PCDF are handled be given periodic physical examinations (at least
yearly). Such examinations should include specialized tests, such as those
for urinary porphyrins and for certain blood parameters which, based upon
published clinical observations, are appropriate for persons who may be
exposed to PCDO/PCDF. Periodic facial photographs to document the onset of
dermatologic problems are also advisable.
8280 D-276
Revision 0
Date September 1986
-------
Page 1 of 2
OIOXIN SAMPLE DATA SUMMARY FORM 8280-1
LAB NAME CONTRACT No.
CASE No.
QUANTITY FOUND (ng/g)
SAMPLE NO. FILE NAME TCDD PeCDD HxCDO HpCOD OCDD
DATA RELEASE AUTHORIZED BY
8280 D-277
Revision
Date September 1986
-------
Page 2 of 2
DIOXIN SAMPLE DATA SUMMARY FORM 8280-1
LAB NAME CONTRACT No.
CASE No.
QUANTITY FOUND (ng/g)
SAMPLE NO. FILE NAME TCDF PeCDF HxCOF HpCDF OCDF
8280 D-278
Revision
Date September 1986
-------
Page 1 of 2
DIOXIN SAMPLE DATA SUMMARY FORM 8280-1-W
LAB NAME
CONTRACT No.
CASE No.
QUANTITY FOUND (ug/L)
SAMPLE NO. FILE NAME TCDD PeCDD HxCDD HpCDD OCOD
DATA RELEASE AUTHORIZED BY
8280 D-279
Revision 0
Date September 1986
-------
Page 2 of 2
OIOXIN SAMPLE DATA SUMMARY FORM 8280-1-W
LAB NAME CONTRACT No.
CASE No.
QUANTITY FOUND (ug/L)
SAMPLE NO. FILE NAME TCOF PeCOF HxCDF HpCDF OCDF
8280 D-280
Revision
Date September 1986
-------
DIOXIN RAW SAMPLE DATA FORM 8280-2
LAB NAME ANALYST(s) CASE No.
SAMPLE No. TYPE OF SAMPLE CONTRACT No.
SAMPLE SIZE % MOISTURE FINAL EXTRACT VOLUME
EXTRACTION METHOD ALIQUOT USED FOR ANALYSIS
CLEAN UP OPTION
CONCENTRATION FACTOR DILUTION FACTOR
DATE EXTRACTED DATA ANALYZED
VOLUME 13Ci2-l,2,3,4-TCDD ADDED TO SAMPLE VOLUME
VOLUME INJECTED Wt l3Ci2-l,2,3,4-TCDD ADDED
Wt 13Ci2-2,3,7,8-TCDD ADDED l3Ci2-2,3,7,8-TCDD % RECOVERY
Wt 13Ci2-2,3,7,8-OCDD ADDED 13C12-OCDD 55 RECOVERY
13Ci2-2,3,7,8-TCDO RRF l3Ci2-OCDD RRF
13Ci2-2,3,7,8-TCDD
AREA 332 AREA 334 RATIO 332/334 _
13C12-OCDD AREA 470 AREA 472 RATIO 470/472
-RT 2,3,7,8-TCDD (Standard) RT 2,3,7,8-TCDD (Sample)
13C12-2,3,7,8-TCDD - 13C12-1,2,3,4-TCDD Percent Valley
8280 D-281
Revision
Date September 1986
-------
DIOXIN INITIAL CALIBRATION STANDARD DATA SUMMARY
FORM 8280-3
CASE No.
Lab Name
Date of Initial Calibration
Contract No.
Analyst(s)
Relative to 13C12-2,3,7,8-TCDD_
or 13Ci2-l,2,3,4-TCDD,
CALIBRATION
STANDARD
RRF
1
RRF
2
RRF RRF
3 4
RRF
5
MEAN %RSD
TCDD
PeCDD
HxCDD
HpCDD
OCDD
TCDF
PeCDF
HxCDF
HpCDF
OCDF
8280 D-282
Revision 0
Date September 1986
-------
FORM 8280-3 (Continued)
CONCENTRATIONS IN PG/UL
1 2345
TCDD
PeCDD
HxCDD
HpCDD
OCDD
TCDF
PeCDF
HxCDF
HpCDF
OCDF
8280 D-283
Revision
Date September 1986
-------
DIOXIN CONTINUING CALIBRATION SUMMARY
FORM 8280-4
CASE No.
Lab Name Contract No.
Date of Initial Calibration Analyst(s)
Relative to 13Ci2-2,3,7,8-TCDD or 13Ci2-l,2,3,4-TCDD
COMPOUND RRF RRF XD
TCDO
PeCDD
HxCOO
HpCDD
OCDD
TCDF
PeCDF
HxCDF
HpCDF
OCDF
8280
Revision
Date September 1986
-------
OIOXIN RAW SAMPLE DATA FORM 8280-5-A
LAB NAME
ANALYST(s)
CASE No.
CONTRACT No.
SAMPLE No.
TCDD REQUIRED 320/322 RATIO WINDOW IS 0.65 - 0.89
QUANTITATED FROM 2,3,7,8-TCDO
SCAN I RRT AREA AREA
322 320
AREA
257
1,2,3,4-TCDD
3207
322
RRF
CONFIRM
AS TCDD
Y/N CONC.
TOTAL TCDD
TCDF REQUIRED 304/306 RATIO WINDOW IS 0.65 - 0.89
QUANTITATED FROM 2,3,7,8-TCDD 1,2,3,4-TCDD
RRF
SCAN I RRT AREA AREA AREA 304/
306 304 243 306
CONFIRM
AS TCDD
Y/N CONC.
TOTAL TCDD
8280 D-285
Revision 0
Date September 1986
-------
DIOXIN RAW SAMPLE DATA FORM 8280-5-8
LAB NAME
ANALYST(s)
CASE No.
CONTRACT No.
SAMPLE No.
PeCOD REQUIRED 320/322 RATIO WINDOW IS 0.55 - 0.75
QUANTITATED FROM 2,3,7,8-TCDD
SCAN I RRT AREA AREA
356 358
1,2,3,4-TCDD
AREA
354
AREA
293
358/
356
RRF
CONFIRM
AS PeCDD
Y/N
CONC.
TOTAL PeCDD
PeCDF REQUIRED 342/340 RATIO WINDOW IS 0.55 - 0.75
QUANTITATED FROM 2,3,7,8-TCDD 1,2,3,4-TCDD
SCAN I RRT
AREA
340
AREA
342
AREA
338
AREA
277
342/
340
RRF
CONFIRM
AS PeCDF
Y/N
CONC.
TOTAL PeCDF
8280 D-286
Revision 0
Date September 1986
-------
OIOXIN RAW SAMPLE DATA FORM 8280-5-C
LAB NAME
ANALYST(s)
CASE No.
CONTRACT No.
SAMPLE No.
HxCDD REQUIRED 392/390 RATIO WINDOW IS 0.69 - 0.93
QUANTITATED FROM 2,3,7,8-TCDD
SCAN I RRT AREA AREA
390 392
1,2,3,4-TCDD
AREA
388
AREA
327
3927
390
RRF
CONFIRM
AS HxCDD
Y/N
CONC.
TOTAL HxCDD
HxCDF REQUIRED 376/374
QUANTITATED FROM 2,3,7
SCAN 1 RRT AREA
376
RATIO WINDOW IS
,8-TCDD
AREA
374
0.69 - 0.93
1,2.3,4-TCDD
AREA
372
AREA
311
376/
374
RRF
CONFIRM
AS HxCDF
Y/N CONC.
TOTAL HxCDF
8280
D-287
Revision 0
Date September 1986
-------
DIOXIN RAW SAMPLE DATA FORM 8280-5-0
LAB NAME
ANALYST(s)
CASE No.
CONTRACT No.
SAMPLE No.
HpCDD REQUIRED 426/444 RATIO WINDOW IS 0.83 - 1.12
QUANTITATED FROM 2,3,7,8-TCDO
SCAN I RRT AREA AREA
424 426
AREA
422
1,2,3,4-TCDO _
AREA 4267
361 424
RRF
CONFIRM
AS HpCDD
Y/N CONC.
TOTAL HpCDO
HpCDF REQUIRED 410/408
QUANTITATED FROM 2,3,7,
SCAN 1 RRT AREA
408
RATIO WINDOW IS
8-TCDD
AREA
410
AREA
406
0.83 - 1.
1,2,3
AREA
345
12
,4-TCDD
410/
408
RRF
CONFIRM
AS HpCDF
Y/N CONC.
TOTAL HpCDF
8280
D-288
Revision 0
Date September 1986
-------
DIOXIN RAW SAMPLE DATA FORM 8280-5-E
LAB NAME ANALYST(s) CASE No.
CONTRACT No. SAMPLE No.
OCDD REQUIRED 458/460 RATIO WINDOW IS 0.75 - 1.01
QUANTITATED FROM 2,3,7,8-TCDD 1,2,3,4-TCDD RRF
SCAN I RRT AREA AREA AREA 458/ CONFIRM
460 458 395 460 AS OCDD
Y/N CONC.
TOTAL OCDD
OCDF REQUIRED 442/444 RATIO WINDOW IS 0.75 - 1.01
QUANTITATED FROM 2,3,7,8-TCDD 1,2,3,4-TCDD RRF
SCAN I RRT AREA AREA AREA 442/ CONFIRM
444 442 379 444 AS OCDF
Y/N CONC.
TOTAL OCDF
8280
Revision
Date September 1986
-------
DIOXIN SYSTEM PERFORMANCE CHECK ANALYSIS FORM 8280-6
LAB NAME
CASE No.
BEGINNING DATE
ENDING DATE
TIME
TIME
CONTRACT No..
ANALYST(s)
PC SOLUTION IDENTIFIER
PCDD's
ISOTOPIC RATIO CRITERIA MEASUREMENT
IONS
RATIOED
RATIO AT
BEGINNING OF
12 HOUR PERIOD
RATIO AT
END OF 12 ACCEPTABLE
HOUR PERIOD WINDOW
Tetra
320/322
0.65-0.89
Penta
358/356
0.55-0.75
Hexa
392/390
0.69-0.93
Hepta
426/424
0.83-1.12
Octa
458/460
0.75-1.01
PCDF's
Tetra
304/306
0.65-0.89
Penta
342-340
0.55-0.75
Hexa
376-374
0.69-0.93
Hepta
410/408
0.83-1.12
Octa
442/444
0.75-1.01
Ratios out of criteria
PCDD
PCDF
Beginning
_ out of
out of
End
out of
out of
NOTE: One form is required for each 12 hour period samples are analyzed.
8280 D-290
Revision 0
Date September 1986
-------
TOXICITY CHARACTERISTIC LEACHING PROCEDURE
D-291
-------
Federal Register / Vol. 51. Nu. 1 !4 / Friday. June 13. 1986 / Proposed Rules
21685
Waste*. Vulitm* 1. El'A Contract fWWO-ZSSZ.
lunuitry- 1HS1.
|ZO) National KcMurch Council (NRC).
Unnking Water and 1 lealth. VoL 4. Safe
Drinking Water Committee, National
Academy Press. Washington. D.C 1982.
(21) Office of Manaermenl and Budget
(OMU|. Interim Regulatory Impact Analysis
Guidance. Washington O.C Inn*. 1901.
(22) Rrscarr.li Triangle Institute (KIT).
Regulatory Impact Analysis for Rxpaowon of
Toxicity Characteristic Under RCRA. U.S.
EPA Contract 08-01-7075. Octotier. 1985.
(23) S-Cubcd. Preusion Evaluation of the
TCLP Protocol For Non-Volatile Components.
Draft Report. U.S. EPA Contract 68-03-1958.
January 1986.
(24) Spellenberg. S.P. Organic E.\traction
Procedure. U.S. ETA Contract 66-01-8149.
January1. 1982.
(25| Technology Applications Inc. (TAJ).
Statistical Analysis of TCLP Development
Dala. U.S. EPA Contract bft-01-6936. May 21
1985.
(26) U.S. ETA. Background Document.
Section 261.24. Characteristic of Extraction
Procedure Toxicity. National Technical
Information Service (NT1S) PB Sl-185-027.
Springfield. Virginia. May. 1980.
(27) U.S. EPA. Test Methods for Evaluating
Solid Wastes—Physical/Chemical Methods.
Second cd. Government Printing Office
(CPO) 055-003-81001-2. EPA SW-846.
Washington. O.C 1982.
(28) U.S. EPA. Guidelines for Performing
Regulatory Impact Analysis. Washington.
D.C. December. 1983.
(29) U.S. EPA Science Advisory Board
(SAB). Report on the Review of HP-ill
Washington. O.C May. 1984.
(.TO) U-S. EPA. Background Document:
Issues Relating to the Development and Use
of Reference Doaes to Support 40 CFR Part
268. Land Disposal Restrictions. Washington.
D.C. November. 1985.
(31) U.S. EPA. Acceptable D-il> Intake
Workgroup Paper Assessing Risk*
Associated With Systemic Toxicants.
Washington, D.C 1985.
(32) U.S. EPA. Verified Reference Doses
(RfD'sl of the U.S. EPA. Washington. O.C
1985.
(33) U.S. EPA. Background Document Fur
Toxicity Characteristic Leaching Procedure.
Washington. D.C February. 1980.
List of Subjects in 40 CFR Parts 261.271.
and 302
Administrative practice and
procedure. Air pollution control.
Chemicals. Confidenttai business
information. Hazardous materials.
Hazardous materials transportation.
Hazardous substances. Hazardous
waste. Indian lands. Intergovernmental
relations. Natural resources. Nuclear
materials. Penalties, Pesticides and
posts. Radioactive materials. Recycling.
Reporting and recordkeeping
requirements. Superfund. Water
pollution control. Water supply. Waste
t and disposal.
.<> 11.
Lee M. Thomas.
Administrator.
For the reasons set out in the
preamble, it is proposed to amend Title
40 of the Code of Federal Regulations as
follows:
PART 2«1—IDENTIFICATION AND
LISTING OF HAZARDOUS WASTE
1. The authority citation for Part 261
continues to read as follows:
Authority: Sees. 1006. 200z(a). 31W1. and
3002 of the Solid Waste Disposal Act. as
amended by the Resource Conservation and
Recovery Act of 1978. as amended (42 U-S.C
6905.a012(a). 6921. and 8022).
2. § 281.24 is revised to read as
follows:
§2*1.24 Torictty characteristic.
(a) A solid waste exhibits the
characteristic of toxicity if. using the test
methods described in Appendix II or
equivalent methods approved by the
Administrator under the procedures set
forth in Si 26O20 and 260-21. the extract
from a representative sample of the
waste contains any of the contaminants
listed in Table 1 at (he concentration
equal to or greater than the respective
value given in that Table. Where the
waste contains less than 0-5 percent
filterable solids, the waste itself, after
filtering using the methodology outlined
in Appendix II. is considered to be the
extract for die purpose of this section.
(b) A solid waste that exhibits the
characteristic of toxicity. but is not
listed as a hazardous waste in Subpart
D. has the EPA Hazardous Waste
Number specified in Table 1 which
corresponds to the toxic contaminant
causing it to be hazardous.
TABLE 1.—Toxicrrv CHARACTERISTIC
COMTAWMAMTS ANO REGULATORY LEVELS
0018—Aovtomm*. .
OOO4— Kn*nc .
OOOS—ami*
0021 —C4raan<*4Ut.e4>
0022—Coaon Mncnano*
OOZJ—CM9KM
0024—cmjB>i»i«t i
002S—ataman*
0007
CASNO .
(mg/11
. 1O7-13-1 1
7440-30.2
_ I
71-43-2:
._ 1 1 1-44-4 •
__ 744O-43-91
___ 75-is-o!
5S-23-5
S7.74.9t
x»-»-7;
87-S8-3.
1333-87-0'
I
OOJ* oCima \
O0i«—2.4-0
002»—1.2
0030—».
OEM—I
O03Z-1
O03J-Z..
0012—Emm
50
SO
100
OOT
oos
10
14.4
007
003
14
0.07
iO
100
too
100
1 4
0036—H,.
1.—TOXICITY CMABACTEBISTIC CO"
TAMINANTS ANO REGULATORY LEVELS—Con
tmued
U«VNC ant
CASMO
C036— Htucmotobuucm
0013—Lraunn
0009—Mocurv
0039—Metiy«»* cmoroe
C04Q IHitQI «BV >^0n«
0041-
D042-t>Macn
0043—*h«nci .
0010-:
0011
004S—l.l.l 2-r«tracnora«nan
00<6—l.1.2.2-T«ir4cniun.-gff»n
004;-T«r*crwD«nyMi4i
0048—J.3.4.6.T>»acr««oor«r»
0049— ToiMn*
I
0050—1.1.1-Tn
cost—t.
OOU-Tncnora«i>Mi« . _
OOS3- 2.4>Tncnaracxioi
0054—2.4 9-Trvtxocnrvi
0017—14.S-TP (S*V«
0055—V«m:
..1 87-68-3; 07?
' 87-72-1, 43
.! 78-83-1 j 38
..I 58-89-9 i 00.
.7439-97^. 02
! T2-13-5; 1 4
72
O.rj
36
144
50
10
SO
100
l 3
Ol
IS
144
007
30
1J
-J 78-93-3
~! 98-94-31
..: 87-86-5.
! 108-9S-2
i IIO-36-H
_:77»2-4»-ji
.. 744O-22-4,
_! 63O-ZO-6,
79-34.5
-. :800l-3V2
. J 71-55-6
.._; 79-00-51
—I 74-01-6,
I
M-O6-2
53
030
014
0.04
i« • mmma at 10 0 mf t
3. Appendix II of Part 2til is revised to
read as follows:
Appendix U—Toxicity Characteristic
Leaching Procedure (TCLP)
1.0 Scope and application.
1.1 The TCLP is designed to deitrmine the
mobility of bo4h organic and inontumc
contaminants present in liquid, solid, and
multiphasie wastes.
1.2 If a total analysis of the waste
demonstrates that individual contaminants
are not present in the waste, or that th«y are
present but at such low concentrations that
the appropriate regulatory thresholds could
not possibly be exceeded the TCLP need not
be run.
ZO Summary of method (See Figure 1).
2.1 For wastes containing less than 0.5%
solids, the waste, after filtration through a
0.8-0.8 fim glass fiber filter, is defined as the
TCLP extract.
2.2 For wastes containing greater thdn
0.5% solids, the liquid phase, if any. is
separated from the solid phase
-------
21686
Federal Register / Vol. 51. No. 114 / Friday, June 13. 1988 / Proposed Rules
results an: mafhcmjt.-^illy combined In >iel
-------
Federal Register / Vol. 51. No. 114 / Friday. June 13. 1986 / Proposed Rules
H63;
7 fi Allow slurries lo sl.ind lo permit the
solid phase lo settle. W,isles thxt settle
slowly may l>e centrifuRed prior to filtration.
7.7 Tr.-insfer the WHSIC sample lo the filler
holder
Note.—If waste material has obviously
adhered to l(jp container used to transfer the
sample to the filtration apparatus, determine
the weight of ihi» residue and subtract it from
the sample weight determined in Step 7.5. to
determine the weight of the waste sample
which will be filtered.
Gradually apply vacuum or gentle pressure of
1-iO psi. until air or pressurizing gas moves
through the filler. If this point is not reached
under lOpsi. and if no additional liquid has
passed through the filter m any 2 minute
interval, slowly increase the pressure in 10-
psi increments to a maximum of SO psi. After
each incremental increase of 10 psi. if the
pressurizing gas has not moved through the
filter, and if no additional liquid has passed
through the filter in y initial weigh I
of waste (Step 7.5 or 7.7) mnltiplied by
100 equals percent solids.
7.10.4 If the solid comprises less than 0.5".'.
of the waste, the solid is discarded and the
liquid phase is defined as the TCLP extract.
Proceed to Step 7.14.
7.10.5 If the solid is greater than or equal
lo 0.5% of the waste, return to Step 7.1. and
begin the procedure with a new sample of
waste. Do not extract the solid that has been
dried.
• Note.—This step is only used to determine
whether the solid must be extracted, or
whether it may be discarded unextracted. It
is not used in calculating the amount of
extraction fluid to use in extracting the
waste, nor is the dried solid derived from this
step subjected to extraction. A new sample
will have to be prepared for extraction.
7.11 If the sample has more than 0.5%
solids, it is now evaluated for particle size. If
the solid material has a surface area per gram
of material equal to or greater than 3.1 cm!. or
is capable of passing through a 9.3 mm (O.J75
inch) standard sieve, proceed to Step 7.12. If
the surface area is smaller or the particle size
is larger than that described above, the solid
material is prepared for extraction by
crushing, cutting, or grinding the solid
material to * surface area or particle size as
described above. When surface area or
particle size has been appropriately altered.
proceed to Step 7.12.
7.12 This step describe* the determination
of the appropriate extracting fluid to use (See
Sections 5.0 and 7.0).
7.12.1 Weigh out a smdil sub-»ampl« of
the solid phase of the waste, reduce the solid
(if necessary) to a particle size of
approximately 1 mm in diameter or less, and
transfer a 5.0 gram portion to a 500 ml beaker
or erlenmeyer flask.
7.1&2 Add 96.5 ml distilled deior.ized
water (ASTM Type 2). cover with watchgiass.
and stir vigorously for 5 minutes using a
magnetic stirrer. Measure and record the pH.
If the pH is f. 5.0. extraction fluid »1 is uied.
Proceed to Step 7.13.
7.12.3 If the pH from Step 7.1£2 is >5.0.
add 3.5 ml 1.0 N HCl. slurry for 30 seconds.
cover with a watchgiass. heat to 50*C. and
hold for 10 minutes.
7.12.4 Let the solution cool !u room
temperature and record pH. If pH is -.5.0. use
extraction fluid =1. If the pH is >50.
extraction fluid =2 is used.
• 7 13 Calculate the weight of the remaining'
solid material by subtracting the weight of
the sub-sample taken for Step 7.12. from (he
original amount of solid material, as obtained
from Step 7.1 or 7.9. Transfer remaining solid
material into the extractor vessel, including
the filler usrti In >r|i.ir.ilc the imli.il liquul
from the solid phase.
Note.—If any of the solid phase remains
adhered to trie walls of the filler holder, or
the container used to transfer the waste, it*
weight shall be determined, subtracted from
the weight of the solid phase of the waste. as
determined above, and this weight is used in
calculating the amount of extraction fluid in
add into the extractor bottle.
Slowly add an amount of the appropriate
extraction fluid (See Step 712). into the
extractor bottle equal to 20 times the weight
of the solid phase that has been placed into
the extractor bottle. Close extractor bottle
tightly, secure in rotary extractor dev ice and
rotate at 30 ± 2 rpm for 18 hours. The
temperature shall be maintained at 22 = 3 'C
during the extraction period.
Note.—As agitation continues, pressure
may build up within the extractor bottle (due
to the evolution of gasses such as carbon
dioxide). To relieve these pressures, the
extractor bottle may be periodically opened
and vented into a hood.
7.14 Following the 18 hour extraction, the
material in the extractor vessel is separated
into its component liquid and solid phases by
filtering through a new glass fiber filter as
outlined in Step 7.7. This new filter shall be
acid washed (See Section 4.4) if evaluating
the mobility of metals.
7.15 The TCLP extract is now prepared as
follows:
7.15.1 If the waste contained no initial
liquid phase, the filtered liquid material
obtained from Step 7.14 is defined as the
TCLP extract. Proceed to Step 7.16.
7.15.2 If compatible (e.g.. will not form
precipitate or multiple phases), the filtered
liquid resulting from Step 7.14 is combined
with the initial liquid phase of the waste as
obtained in Step 7.9. This combined liquid is
defined as the TCLP extract. Proceed to Step
7.16.
7.15.3 If the initial liquid phase of the
waste, as obtained from Step 7.9. is not or
may not be compatible with the filtered liquid
resultingfrom Step 7.14. these liquids ari» not
combined. These liquids are collectively
defined as the TCLP extract, are analyzed
separately, and the results are combined
mathematically. Proceed to Step 7.16.
7.16 The TCLP extract will be prepared
and analyzed according to the appropriate
SW-846 analytical methods identified m
Appendix'HI of 10 CFR 261. TCLP extracts tu
be analyzed for metals shall be acid digested
If the individual phases are to he dnalvzpd
separately, determine the volams of the
individual phases (!o 0.1 ml), conduct -}\f
appropriate analyses, and combine the
results mathematically by using a simple
weighted avenge:
Final contarninant concentration -.
V. - V.
D-294
-------
21688
Federal Register / Vol. 51. No. 114 / Friday. June 13, 1986 / Proposed Rules
where:
V, =The volume of the first phase (1|
C< 'The concentration of the contaminant of
concern in the first phase (mg/l)
Vj =The volume of the second phase (1)
Ci = The concentration of the contaminant of
concern in the second phase (mg/l]
7.17 The contaminant concentrations in
Ihe TCLP extract are compared to the
thresholds identified in the appropriate
regulations. Refer to Section 9 for quality
assurance requirements.
8.0 Procedure when volcti'es are
involved.
The ZHE device has approximately a 500
ml internal capacity. Although a minimum
sample size of 1UO grams was required in the
Section 7 procedure, the ZHE can only
accommodate a maximum 100 percent solids
sample of 25 grams, due to the need to add an
amount of extraction fluid equal to 20 rimes
the weight of (he solid phase. Step 3.4
provides lh» means of which !o determine the
approximate sample size for the ZHE device.
Although (he following procedure allows
for particle size reduction during the conduct
of the procedure, this could result in the loss
of volatile compounds. If possible, any
necessary particle size reduction (See Step
8.5) should be conducted on the sample a* it
is being taken. Particle size reduction should
onry be conducted during the procedure if
there is no other choice.
In carrying out the following steps, do not
allow the waste to be exposed to the
atmosphere for any more time than is
absolutely necessary.
8.1 Pre-weigh the (evacuated) container
which will receive the filtrate (See Section
4.6). and set aside.
8-Z Place the ZHE piston within the body
of the ZHE (it may be helpful to first moisten
the piston O-rings slightly with extraction
fluid). Secure the gas inlet/outlet flange
(bottom flange) onto Ihe ZHE body in
accordance with the manufacturer's
instructions. Secure the glass fiber filler
between the support screens and set aside.
Set liquid inlet/outlet flange 'top flange|
aside. -,
8.3 If the waste will obviously yield no
free liquid when subiected to pressure
filtration, weigh out a representative
subsample of the wa.te (23 gram maximum—
See Step 8.0|. record weight, and proceed to
Step 8.5.
8.4 This sfp provides the means by
which to determine the approximate sample
size for 'he 21 iE device. If the waste is liquid
or multiyhasic. follow the procedure outlined
in Steps 7.2 to 7 3 |-s:ng the Section ~
filtration apparatus!, and obtain the percent
solids by dividing :he weight of the solid
phase of the waste hj. the original sample
size used. If Ihe waste obviously contains
greater than 0.5'V, soi: Js. xu to Step 8.4.J. If it
appears tHai the solid ma> comprise less than
0.5% of the waste jo :o Step .1 4.1
8.4.1 UiMerniine Ihe percent solids tiv
using rh procedure ouiiini'd m Step 7.1U. If
the waste cont.nns less than O.S1*. soiids.
weij>n out a now luo ,;r.im minimum
representative sample, proceed to Sti-p 8 7.
and follow until the liquid phj.se <>i the waste
is filtered usm« the 7.1 IF. deucn (Step 8.S|.
This liquid !:!tf,it<; is JnlineJ us the TCl.P
extract and is analyzed directly If Ihe waste
contains greater than or equal to 0.5% solids.
repeal Step 8.4 using a new 100 gram
minimum sample, determine the percent
solids, and proceed to Step 8.4.2.
8.4.2 If the sample is < 25"i solids, weigh
out a new too gram minimum representative
sample, and proceed to Step 9.5. If ths sample
is > 25% solids, the maximum amount of
sample the ZHE can accommodate is
determined by dividing 25 grams by the
percent solids obtained from Step 8.4 Weigh
out a new representative sample of the
determined size.
&5 After a representative sample of the
waste (sample size determined from Step 8.4)
has been weighed out and recorded, the
sample is now evaluated for particle size (See
Step 8.0). If the solid material within the
waste obviously has a. surface area per gram
of material equal to or greater than 3.1 cm2.
or is capable of passing through a 9.5 mm
[0.375 inch) standard sieve, proceed
immediately to Step a.6. If the surface area is
smaller or the particle size is larger than that
described above, the solid material which
does not meet the above criteria is separated
from the liquid phase by sieving (or
equivalent means), and the solid is prepared
for extraction by crushing, cutting, or grinding
' to • surface area or particle size as described
above.
Note,—Wastes and appropriate equipment
should be refrigerated, if possible, to 4'C
pnor to particle «ze reduction. Grinding and
milling machinery which generates heal shall
not be used for panicle size reduction. If
reduction of the so.'td phase of the waste is
necessary, exposure of the waste to the
atmosphere should be avoided to the extent
possible.
When surface area or particle size has been
appropriately altered, the solid is recombined
with the rest of the waste.
' 8.8 Waste slurries need not be allowed to
stand to permit the solid phase to settle.
Wastes that settle slowly shall not be
centnfuged prior to filtration.
8.7 Transfer the entire sample (liquid and
solid phases) quickly to the ZHE, Secure rhe
filter and support screens into the top flange
of the device and secure the top flange to the
ZHE body in accordance with the
manufacturer's! instructions. Tighten all ZHE
fittings and place the device in the \ ertical
position (gas inlet/outlet flange on the
bottom). Do not attach the evract collection
device to the lop plate.
Note.—!f waste material has obviously
adhered to the container US«Q :o transfer the
sample to the ZHE. determine the weight of
this residue and subtract it from the sample
weight determined in Step a.4. to determine
the weight of the waste sample which wiilb«t
filtered.
Attach a stas line to the ;>»s inl«t/outlet \jlve
(bottom flanse). and with the liquid -r.'.ml
outlet valve (lop Han«e| open, beqm ^
gentle pressure of l-io psi (or more if
necessary I to slowly force aii heoa
of the ZHE device. At the first .ippi'.-irancc of
liquid from the liquid inle'/out'el \ai-.e.
quickly dose the \aive and disconur.ue
pressure.
8.8 Altai:h evacudtpj pre-'Aeinhwi ri!trale
collection i.ont.-iiniT
-------
Federal Register / Vol. 51. No'. 114 / Friday. June 13. 1986 / Proposed Rules
21669
Reposition the ZHE in the vertical position
with (he liquid inlet/outlet valve on top. Put
5-10 psi behind the piston (if necessary), and
slowly open the liquid inlet/outlet valve to
bleed out any headspace (into a hood) that
may have been introduced due to the
addition of extraction fluid. This bleeding
shall be done quickly and shall be slopped at
tfie first appearance of liquid from the valve.
Re-pressunze the ZHE with 5-10 psi and
check all ZI IE fillings to insure that they are
closed.
8.11.3 Place the ZHE in the rotary
extractor apparatus (if it is not already there).
and rotate the ZHE at 30 +• 2 rpm for 18
hours. The temperature shall be maintained
at 22 ± + 3*C during agitation.
8.12 Following the 18 hour extraction.
check the pressure behind the ZHE piston by
quickly opening and closing the gas inlet/
outlet valve, and noting the escape of gas. If
the pressure has not been maintained (i.e.. no
gas release observed), the device is leaking.
Replace ZHE O-rings or other fittings, as
necessary, and redo the extraction with a
new sample of waste. If the pressure within
the device has been maintained, the material
in the extractor vessel is one* again
separated into its component liquid and solid
phases. If the waste contained an initial
liquid phase, the liquid may be filtered
directly into the same filtrate collection
container (i.e.. TEOLAR* bag. gas-light
syringe) holding the initial liquid phase of the
waste, unless doing so would create multiple
phases, or unless there is not enough volume
left within the filtrate collection container. A
separate filtrate collection container must be
used in these cases. Filler through the glass
fiber filler, using the ZHE device as discussed
in Step 8.8. All extract shall be filtered and
collected if the extract is multi-phasic or if
the waste contained an initial liquid phase.
Not*.—If the glass fiber niter is not intact
following agitation, the filtration device
discussed in the NOTE in Section 4.3.1 may
be used to filter the material within the ZHE.
8.13 If the waste contained no initial
liquid phase, the filtered liquid material
obtained from Step 8.12 is defined as the
TCLP extract If the waste contained an
initial liquid phase, the filtered liquid
material obtained from Step 8.12. and the
initial liquid phase (Step 8.8) are collectively
defined as the TCLP extract.
8.14 The TCLP extract will be prepared
and analyzed according to the appropriate
SW-846 analytical methods, as Identified in
Appendix III of 40 CFR 261. If the individual
phases are to be analyzed separately.
determine the volume of the individual
phases (to 0.1 ml), conduct the appropriate
analyses and combine the results
mathematically by using a simple volume
weighted average:
Final contaminant concentration » —
where
V, = The volume of the first phase (1)
C, = The concentration of the contaminant of
concern in the first phase (mg/l|
V, = The volume of the second phase (1)
Ct = The concentration of the contaminant of
concern in the second phase (mg/l)
8.15 The contammani concentrations in
the TCLP extract are compared to the
thresholds identified in the appropriate
regulations. Refer to Section 9 for quality
assurance requirements.
9.0 Quality Assurance requirements.
9.1 All data, including quality assurance
data, should be maintained and available for
reference or inspection.
9.Z A minimum of one blank for ev ery 10
extractions that h.ive been conducted in an
extraction vessel shall be employed as a
check to rirtertnme if any memory effects
from the extraction equipment is occurring.
One blank shall also be employed for every
new batch of leaching fluid that is made up.
9.3 All quality cpn'rol measures described
in the appropriate analytical methods shdil
be followed.
9.4 Tht: method of slaud.ird .iddilion shall
be employed for each waste Upe if- II
Recovery of the compound from ^nkrd spiiK
of the TCLI' extract is not between 50 and
, or 21 If the concentration of the
V.-i-V,
constituent measured in the extract i» within
20% of the appropriate regulatory threshold If
more than 1 extraction is being run on
samples of the same waste, the method of
standard addition need only be applied once
and the percent recoveries applied to the
remainder of the extractions.
9.5 TCLP extracts shall be analyzed
within the following periods after generation:
Volatiles—14 days. Semi-volatiles—40 days.
Mercury—28 days, and other Metals—180
days.
TABLE 1.—VOLATILE CONTAMINANTS '
Comoound
CASNO
n-aulf.
Cation 0>««jtli(M
Cj'OO" t*tracn.J*
i J D*craoroer>an*
€m«i wv
t*ooutanoi
67-64-1
107-13-1
71-43-2
71-36-6
75-15-0
56-23-5
IG6-90-7
67-66-3
107-06-2
75-35-4
141.73-6
100-41-4
60-2S-7
78-83-1
£7-56-1
?VO«-2
78-93-3
1C9-IO-1
«3Q-:n-«
TABLE 1.—VOLATILE CONTAMINANTS ' —
Continued
t.1.2.2-T*wacNe»o«man*
TofeMfl*
1.1.J.Tncmo«>*inan*
1 . 1 .2-1 nchiora- 1 .2.2-tnfluoro*aun*
Vinyl oMono*
Xytene
79-34-5
127-11-4
106-86-3
79-00-5
79-01-4
76-13- 1
75-C1-4
1330- JO-'
1 Mckidw compound* oenXKO m earn m* Land Discos*
H«lncnom Ru» and in* Toiicny Cnaraciansic
TABLE 2.—SUITABLE ROTARY AGITATION
APPARATUS '
Company
AnociaMO Omen j Ataundn*.
•nd Manufacturing
Co.
LaraLano*
Manulactunng
IRA, MaclM Snog
and LaBoratory
EPRI Eincior
(703) 549-5998.
Wiwmor* Lak*.
Mttnqan.13131
449-4118.
Santufc*. PtMrto
So». (8091 752-
' Any dew* wf*cn rotates In* Mttacnoft iran*i M an
OMr-«ne; tamon uX s 2 rpm * accaeUOM.
'AttMugn m aawe* t suuot*. * i» not
(Md*. n. mar 1*0 raw* rmroiimng to accommodate
TABLE 3.—SUITABLE ZERO-HEAOSPACC
EXTRACTOR VESSELS
Comcany | Location
AuooaMd Oeujn
O
Mjftvon Co>p
AMunona. Vigm*.
(7091 549-599*
U«ur*._~il«
Model No
3740-ZH8
SO1P58IC5
(800)225-3384
TABLE 4.—SUITABLE FILTER HOLDERS
Company
NucMoore Con
MCTO Fmraoon
System
moor* Com
Location
Pteasanton.
CaMoma. (8OOI
882-7711.
(4151 828-6010
(800)225-3384
-x- !,*£,
425910!
4104001
^02400'
VT30142MW,
XX10O4700!
t
47
142
14;
47
' »nv a*nc* cacaow 01 soiu'iiin^ m* txtua horn in* so~d
pnaM o' me »«» i> sunaow. orowoy*) mji .1 s zntmcia,
co>*oanoi* wm tn« «ASI* and tn* consbiu«nn to o« ana-
lyzM Plastic otwcas iiot IKMO aoo««i may o* uwo «"*"
o~, 9anc comaminann ar« ot concern
TABLE 5.—SUITABLE FILTER MEDIA
Comoany
Location i Mod*) | ^*,
Mnatmon
Laoofaiom
ine
Cknon. N«> .Mrsry GfF i
(2011 773-S«00 !
1 Non* KM
BH.UNG COM *S«O-SO-U
D-296
-------
21690
Federal Register / VoL 51. No. 114 / Friday. June 13. 1986 / Proposed Rules
FIGlFfc' 1: TCLP Flowchart
WET WASTE SAMPLE
CONTAINS < 0.5 %
NON-FILTERABLE
SOU IB
LIQUID/SOLID
SEPARATION
0.6-0.8 urn
GLASS FIBER
FILTERS
REPRESENTATIVE WASTE
SWPLE
I
CRY WASTE
SAMPLE
SOLID
DISCARD
SOLID
SOLID
REDUCE PARTICLE SIZE IF >9.5 ran
OR SURFACE AREA <3.1 on2
TCLP EXTRACTION1
O? SOLID
0-HEADSPACE EXTRACTOR
REQUIRED FOR VOLATILES
LIQUID/SOLI 0
SEPARATION
0.6-0.3 um GLASS
FIBER FILTERS
WET WASTE SAMPLE
CONEMNS > 0.5 %
NON-FILTERABLE
SOLICB
LIQUID/SOLID
SEPARATION
0.6-0.8 um
GLASS FIBER
FILTERS
LIQUID
~1
STORE AT
4°C
DISCATO
SOLID
LIQUID
TCLP EXTRACT
TCLP EXTRACr
ANALYTICAL
TCLP EXTRACT
The extraction fluid employed is a function of the alkalinity of the 33lid
phase of the waste.
D-297
-------
Federal Register / Vol. 51. Na 114 / Friday. )une 13-. 1966 / Propoaed Rules
21691
tl
c
T3
3
c
c
J?T?_
*
a
D-298
-------
21692
Federal Register / Vol. 51. No. 114 / Friday. June 13. 1986 / Proposed Rules
4. Amend Table 1 of Appendix III of
Part 261 to add the following compounds
and methods in alphabetical order
Appendix III—Chemical Analysis Test
Methods
TABLE 1.— ANALYSIS METHODS FOP ORGANIC
CHEMICALS COHTAINEO m SW-846
Compound
B-42-C
IMM
&•*>«*>.
OcfUorooantanM*)
1.2-Ofc
Z4On*«oajana...
cMorobi
8.02.824 8020.8024,
5030/8240
* 4)
8.01. U4 8010.8240.
3510/8270
• •
8.04.8.25 8040. 4250.
3SIO/8270
801.8.02, 8010.8120.
8.12. 8.25 8250.
3519/8270
8.01, 8.24 8010. 8240,
5030/8240
5030/8X0
8.08. 8.25 8090. 8250,
3510/8270
8.118.25 8120.8250.
3510.8270
8.12. 8-25 8120.8150,
3510/8270
8.12.8.25 8010.8240.
•3510/8270
• •
5030/8240
5030/8240
8.0».8.25 8090. 8250.
3910/8270
TABLE 1.—ANALYSIS METHODS FOR ORGANIC
CHEMICALS CONTAINED IN SW-&46—Contin-
ued
Compound
Pamacftloiminanol
PSanol..._ _..
T*ncnana«i*na 4
4
4
O018
0004
0005
0019
002O
0008
0021
0012
0023
0024
0025
0007
0026
0027
O028
O0t«
0029
0030
0031
0032
0033
O012
0034
OO35
003«
0037
0038
0008
a
x
c
c
X
x
0
0
X
3
0
X
c
c
c
8
a
a
o
o
c
X
100*14% 4)
1ZI0464)
10001*541
1000*1454)
1 910 4S4)
11)04541
!OOO«<22?0>
1 *|0 45*1
100(45 II
VXX)«.'270I
1 310 454)
10no»(454|
1001454
10OI454
100)454
SOOO«t2Z70l
1(045*1
< s(0 444)
I«|Q454|
1<(0454|
I «IO 454)
1XII0454)
D-299
-------
Federal Register / Vol. 51. No. 114 / Friday. June 13. 1986 / Proposed Rules
21693
TABLE 3024.—LIST or HAZARDOUS SUBSTANCES AND REPOHTABLE QUANTITIES—Continued
Summv
CASftN
HO
1.1 JL2-T*»iei4.0^ncMOf^»«.»
?5014
IOOO
to
IOOO
t'
1'
f
1-
!•
I-
IOOO
10
10
I"
CaMgory
1.4
4
1.4
2.4
4
1.2.4
'2.4
'.2.4
4
4
4
4
2.4
2.4
4
'.2.4
1.4
1»
2.4
t.2.4
1.4
1.2.4
1.4
2.3.4
0013
0009
0014
003»
0040
0041
0042
0043
0044
0010
0011
0049
004«
0047
0049
0048
0015
ooso
0051
0052
0053
OOS4
0017
0055
„
X
X
c
o
c
A
C
X
X
X
X
X
X
A
C
x
C
X
c
A
A
S .
X
1*104541
'(04541
'(04SJI
1000(4541
5000(22701
tOOO|454t
I0«(4 s»t
tOOO-*(434»
1 1=10 4541
1**(0«S4|
'10 4541
1»(04J4|
"(0 4541
"(O4S4I
10(4 54)
1000(4541
1*(0 454*
1000(454
1*(0 454
1000*4454
10«(4 54
1O«(454
100(45.4
1* CEHCLA • CAA SKKXI 112.
• MMUnc* uM«t CEBCL* • ACHA S«Mn 3001
itm »n nuutn ta<*e» to umamioo oi ma in
m« itw^jutiiory Mum tor amqn»onal m* na
1*—MOCMM tM «« l-cmM RQ • a CEHCLA MMBiy "O.
|FR Doc. 86-13033 Filed 6-12-8& 8MS am|
•UJNOCOOC IMP 89 II
D-300
-------
EPA METHOD
NO. 245.5
D-301
-------
MERCURY IN SEDIMENT
Method 245.5 (Manual Cold Vapor Technique)
1. Scope and Application
1.1 This procedure'" measures total mercury (organic t inorganic) in soils, sediments,
bottom deposits and sludge type materials.
1.2 The range of the method is 0.2 to 5 ug/g. The range may be extended above or below the
normal range by increasing or decreasing sample size or through instrument and
recorder control.
2. Summary of Method
2.1 A weighed portion of the sample is digested in aqua regia for 2 minutes at 95°C, followed
by oxidation with potassium permanganate. Mercury in the digested sample is then
measured by the conventional cold vapor technique.
2.2 An alternate digestion12' involving the use of an autoclave is described in (8.2).
3. Sample Handling and Preservation
3.1 Because of the extreme sensitivity of the analytical procedure and the omnipresence of
mercury, care must be taken to avoid extraneous contamination. Sampling devices and
sample containers should be ascertained to be free of mercury; the sample should not be
exposed to any condition in the laboratory that may result in contact or air-borne
mercury contamination.
3.2 While the sample may be analyzed without drying, it has been found to be more
convenient to analyze a dry sample. Moisture may be driven off in a drying oven at a
temperature of 60°C. No mercury losses have been observed by using this drying step.
The dry sample should be pulverized and thoroughly mixed before the aliquot is
weighed.
4. Interferences
4.1 The same types of interferences that may occur in water samples are also possible with
sediments, i.e., sulfides, high copper, high chlorides, etc.
4.2 Volatile materials which absorb at 253.7 nm will cause a positive interference. In order to
remove any interfering volatile materials, the dead air space in the BOD bottle should be
purged before the addition of stannous sulfate.
5. Apparatus
5.1 Atomic Absorption Spectrophotometer (See Note 1): Any atomic absorption unit
having an open sample presentation area in which to mount the absorption cell is
suitable. Instrument settings recommended by the particular manufacturer should be
followed.
NOTE 1: Instruments designed specifically for the measurement of mercury using the
cold vapor technique are commercially available and may be substituted for the atomic
absorption spectrophotometer.
Issued 1974
D-302
-------
5.2 Mercury Hollow Cathode Lamp: Westinghouse WL-22847, argon filled, or equivalent.
5.3 Recorder: Any multi-range variable speed recorder that is compatible with the UV
detection system is suitable.
5.4 Absorption Cell: Standard spectrophotometer cells 10 cm long, having quartz end
windows may be used. Suitable cells may be constructed from plexiglass tubing, 1" O.D.
X 4-1/2". The ends are ground perpendicular to the longitudinal axis and quartz
windows (1" diameter X 1/16" thickness) are cemented in place. Gas inlet and outlet
ports (also of plexiglass but 1/4" O.D.) are attached approximately 1/2" from each end.
The cell is strapped to a burner for support and aligned in the light beam to give the
maximum transmittance.
NOTE 2: Two 2" X 2" cards with one inch diameter holes may be placed over each end
of the cell to assist in positioning the cell for maximum transmittance.
5.5 Air Pump: Any peristaltic pump capable of delivering 1 liter of air per minute may be
used. A Masterflex pump with electronic speed control has been found to be satisfactory.
(Regulated compressed air can be used in an open one-pass system.)
5.6 Flowmeter: Capable of measuring an air flow of 1 liter per minute.
5.7 Aeration Tubing: Tygon tubing is used for passage of the mercury vapor from the sample
bottle to the absorption cell and return. Straight glass tubing terminating in a coarse
porous frit is used for sparging air into the sample.
5.8 Drying Tube: 6" X 3/4" diameter tube containing 20 g of magnesium perchlorate (See
Note 3). The apparatus is assembled as shown in the accompanying diagram.
NOTE 3: In place of the magnesium perchlorate drying tube, a small reading lamp with
60W bulb may be used to prevent condensation of moisture inside the cell. The lamp is
positioned to shine on the absorption cell maintaining the air temperature in the cell
about 10°C above ambient.
6. Reagents
6.1 Aqua Regia: Prepare immediately before use by carefully adding three volumes of cone.
HC1 to one volume of cone. HNO>
6.2 Sulfuric Acid, 0.5 N: Dilute 14.0 ml of cone, sulfuric acid to 1 liter.
6.3 Stannous Sulfate: Add 25 g stannous sulfate to 250 ml of 0.5 N sulfuric acid (6.2). This
mixture is a suspension and should be stirred continuously during use.
6.4 Sodium Chloride-Hydroxylamine Sulfate Solution: Dissolve 12 g of sodium chloride
and 12 g of hydroxylamine sulfate in distilled water and dilute to 100ml.
NOTE 4: A 10% solution of stannous chloride may be substituted for (6.3) and
hydroxylamine hydrochloride may be used in place of hydroxylamine sulfate in (6.4).
6.5 Potassium Permanganate: 5% solution, w/v. Dissolve 5 g of potassium permanganate in
100 ml of distilled water.
6.6 Stock Mercury Solution: Dissolve 0.1354 g of mercuric chloride in 75 ml of distilled
water. Add 10 ml of cone, nitric acid and adjust the volume to 100.0 ml. 1.0 ml = 1.0
mg Hg.
6.7 Working Mercury Solution: Make successive dilutions of the stock mercury solution
(6.6) to obtain a working standard containing 0.1 ug/ml. This working standard and the
dilution of the stock mercury solutions should be prepared fresh daily. Acidity of the
D-303
-------
working standard should be maintained at 0.15% nitric acid. This acid should be added
to the flask as needed before the addition of the aliquot.
7. Calibration
7.1 Transfer 0, 0.5, 1.0, 2.0, 5.0 and 10 ml aliquots of the working mercury solution (6.7)
containing 0 to 1.0 ug of mercury to a series of 300 ml BOD bottles. Add enough distilled
water to each bottle to make a total volume of 10 ml. Add 5 ml of aqua regia (6.1) and
heat 2 minutes in a water bath at 95°C. Allow the sample to cool and add 50 ml distilled
water and 15 ml of KMnO4 solution (6.5) to each bottle and return to the water bath for
30 minutes. Cool and add 6 ml of sodium chloride-hydroxylamine sulfate solution (6.4)
to reduce the excess permanganate. Add 50 ml of distilled water. Treating each bottle
individually, add 5 ml of stannous sulfate solution (6.3) and immediately attach the
bottle to the aeration apparatus. At this point, the sample is allowed to stand quietly
without manual agitation. The circulating pump, which has previously been adjusted to
rate of 1 liter per minute, is allowed to run continuously. The absorbance, as exhibited
either on the spectrophotometer or the recorder, will increase and reach maximum
within 30 seconds. As soon as the recorder pen levels off, approximately 1 minute, open
the bypass value and continue the aeration until the absorbance returns to its minimum
value (See Note 5). Close the bypass value, remove the fritted tubing from the BOD
bottle and continue the aeration. Proceed with the standards and construct a standard
curve by plotting peak height versus micrograms of mercury.
NOTE 5: Because of the toxic nature of mercury vapor precaution must be taken to avoid
its inhalation. Therefore, a bypass has been included in the system to either vent the
mercury vapor into an exhaust hood or pass the vapor through some absorbing media,
such as:
a) equal volumes of 0.1 N KMnO4 and 10% H2SO4
b) 0.25% iodine in a 3% KI solution.
A specially treated charcoal that will absorb mercury vapor is also available from
Barnebey and Cheney, E. 8th Ave., and North Cassidy St., Columbus, Ohio 43219,
Cat. #580-13 or #580-22.
8. Procedure
8.1 Weigh triplicate 0.2 g portions of dry sample and place in bottom of a BOD bottle. Add 5
ml of distilled water and 5 ml of aqua regia (6.1). Heat 2 minutes in a water bath at 95°C.
Cool, add 50 ml distilled water and 15 ml potassium permanganate solution (6.5) to each
sample bottle. Mix thoroughly and place in the water bath for 30 minutes at 95°C. Cool
and add 6 ml of sodium chloride-hydroxylamine sulfate (6.4) to reduce the excess
permanganate. Add 55 ml of distilled water. Treating each bottle individually, add 5 ml
of stannous sulfate (6.3) and immediately attach the bottle to the aeration apparatus.
Continue as described under (7.1).
8.2 An alternate digestion procedure employing an autoclave may also be used. In this
method 5 ml of cone. H,SO4 and 2 ml of cone. HNO3 are added to the 0.2 g of sample. 5
ml of saturated KMnO4 solution is added and the bottle covered with a piece of
aluminum foil. The samples are autoclaved at 121°C and 15 Ibs. for 15 minutes. Cool,
make up to a volume of 100 ml with distilled water and add 6 ml of sodium chloride-
D-304
-------
hydroxylamine sulfate solution (6.4) to reduce the excess permanganate. Purge the dead
air space and continue as described under (7.1).
9. Calculation
9.1 Measure the peak height of the unknown from the chart and read the mercury value from
the standard curve.
9.2 Calculate the mercury concentration in the sample by the formula:
_ ug Hg in the aliquot
ugHg g wt of the aliquot in gms
9.3 Report mercury concentrations as follows: Below 0.1 ug/gm, <0.1; between 0.1 and 1
ug/gm, to the nearest 0.01 ug; between 1 and 10 ug/gm, to nearest O.I ug; above 10
ug/gm, to nearest ug.
10. Precision and Accuracy
10.1 The following standard deviations on replicate sediment samples were recorded at the
indicated levels; 0.29 ug/g ±0.02 and 0.82 ug/g ±0.03. Recovery of mercury at these
levels, added as methyl mercuric chloride, was 97% and 94%, respectively.
Bibliography
1. Bishop, J. N., "Mercury in Sediments", Ontario Water Resources Comm., Toronto, Ontario,
Canada, 1971.
2. Salma, M., private communication, EPA Cal/Nev Basin Office, Almeda, California.
D-305
-------
D-306
-------
EPA METHOD
NO. 3020
D-307
-------
METHOD 3020
ACID DIGESTION PROCEDURE FOR FURNACE ATOMIC ABSORPTION SPECTROSCOPY
1.0 Scope and Application
1.1 This digestion procedure is approved for the preparation of
aqueous samples, mobility procedure extracts, and certain nonaqueous
wastes for analysis, by furnace atomic absorption spectroscopy (AAS),
for the metals listed below. The procedure is to be used when one is to
determine the total amount of the metal in the sample.
1.2 Metals for which Method 3020 is the approved furnace AAS procedure
are:
Aluminum Lead
Barium Manganese
Beryllium Molybdenum
Cadmium Nickel
Chromium Silver
Cobalt Thallium
Copper Vanadium
Iron Zinc
1.3 If a nonaqueous sample is not completely digested by this method
and determination as to the total concentration of a metal in the entire
sample is required, then the digestion methods described in Method 3030,
3040, or 3050 should be tried. Some wastes will require fusion techniques to
completely release metals from inorganic matrices. The appropriate fusion
method should be chosen from the literature and its applicability to the
sample of interest proven by analyzing spiked samples and relevant standard
reference materials.
2.0 Summary of Method
2.1 A mixture of nitric acid and the material to be analyzed is
heated to near dryness in a Griffin beaker. This step is repeated with
additional portions of nitric acid until the digestate is light in color or
until its color has stabilized. After the digestate has been brought to
near dryness, it is cooled and brought up in dilute nitric acid such that the
final dilution contains 0.5% (v/v) HN03-
3.0 Interferences
3.1 Interferences are discussed in the referring analytical method.
D-308
-------
2 / WORKUP TECHNIQUES - Inorganic
4.0 Apparatus and Materials
4.1 Griffin beakers of assorted sizes.
4.2 Qualitative filter paper or centrifugation equipment.
5.0 Reagents
5.1 ASTM Type II water (ASTM 01193): Water should be monitored
for impurities.
5.2 Concentrated nitric acid: Acid should be analyzed to determine
level of impurities. If impurities are detected, all analyses should be
blank-corrected.
6.0 Satnple Col 1ection, Preservation^ and Handling
6.1 All samples must have been collected using a sampling plan that
addresses the considerations discussed in Section One of this manual.
6.2 All sample containers must be prewashed with detergents, acids, and
distilled deionized water. Plastic and glass containers are both suitable.
6.3 Aqueous wastewaters must be acidified to a pH of
less than 2 with nitric acid.
6.4 Nonaqueous samples shall be refrigerated when possible, and analyzed
as soon as possible.
7.0 Procedure
7.1 Transfer a representative aliquot of the well-mixed sample to a
Griffin beaker and add 3 ml of cone. HN03- Cover the beaker with a
watch glass. Place the beaker on a hot plate and cautiously evaporate to
near dryness, making certain that the sample does not boil. (DO NOT BAKE.)
Cool the beaker and add another 3-ml portion of cone. HN03. Re-cover the
beaker with a watch glass and return to the hot plate. Increase the temper-
ature of the hot plate so that a gentle reflux action occurs. It should be
noted that if a sample is allowed to go to dryness, low recoveries may result
for tin and antimony.
7.2 Continue heating, adding additional acid as necessary, until the
digestion is complete (generally indicated when the digestate is light in
color or does not change in appearance with continued refluxing). Again,
evaporate to near dryness and cool the beaker. Add a small quantity of
HN03 so that the final dilution contains 0.5% (v/v) HN03, and warm the
beaker to dissolve any precipitate or residue resulting from evaporation.
D-309
-------
3020 / 3
7.3 Wash down the beaker walls and watch glass with distilled water
and when necessary filter or centrifuge the sample to remove silicates and
other insoluble material that could clog the nebulizer. Filtration should be
done only if there is concern that insoluble materials may clog the nebulizer.
This additional step is liable to cause sample contamination unless the
filter and filtering apparatus are thoroughly cleaned and pren'nsed with
dilute nitric acid. Adjust the volume to some predetermined value based on
the expected metal concentrations. The sample is now ready for analysis.
8.0 Quality Control
8.1 For each group of samples processed, procedural blanks (Type II
water and reagents) should be carried throughout the entire sample-preparation
and analytical process. These blanks will be useful in determining if
samples are being contaminated.
8.2 Duplicate samples should be processed on a routine basis. Duplicate
samples will be used to determine precision. The sample load will dictate
the frequency, but 10% is recommended.
8.3 Spiked samples or standard reference materials should be employed
to determine accuracy. A spiked sample should be included with each group of
samples processed and whenever a new sample matrix is being analyzed.
8.4 The concentration of all calibration standards should be verified
against a quality control check sample obtained from an outside source.
8.5 The method of standard addition shall be used for the analysis
of all EP extracts and whenever a new sample matrix is being analyzed.
D-310
-------
EPA METHOD
NO. 204.2
D-311
-------
ANTIMONY
Method 204.2 (Atomic Absorption, furnace technique)
STORET NO. Total 01097
Dissolved 01095
Suspended 01096
Optimum Concentration Range: 20-300 ug/1
Detection Limit: 3ug/l
Preparation of Standard Solution
1. Stock solution: Prepare as described under "direct aspiration method".
2. Prepare dilutions of the stock solution to be used as calibration standards at the time of
analysis. These solutions are also to be used for "standard additions".
3. The calibration standard should be diluted to contain 0.2% (v/v) HNO3.
Sample Preservation
1. For sample handling and preservation, see part 4.1 of the Atomic Absorption Methods
section of this manual.
Sample Preparation
1. The procedures for preparation of the sample as given in parts 4.1.1 thru 4.1.3 of the
Atomic Absorption Methods section of this manual should be followed including the
addition of sufficient 1:1 HC1 to dissolve the digested residue for the analysis of
suspended or total antimony. The sample solutions used for analysis should contain 2%
(v/v) HNO3.
Instrument Parameters (General)
1. Drying Time and Temp: 30 sec-125°C.
2. Ashing Time and Temp: 30 sec-800"C.
3. Atomizing Time and Temp: 10sec-2700°C.
4. Purge Gas Atmosphere: Argon
5. Wavelength: 217.6nm
6. Other operating parameters should be set as specified by the particular instrument
manufacturer.
Analysis Procedure
1. For the analysis procedure and the calculation, see "Furnace Procedure" part 9.3 of the
Atomic Absorption Methods section of this manual.
Approved for NPDES
Issued 1978
D-312
-------
Notes
1. l he above concentration values and instrument conditions are for a Perkin-Elmer HGA-
2100, based on the use of a 20 ul injection, continuous flow purge gas and non-pyrolytic
graphite. Smaller size furnace devices or those employing faster rates of atomization can
be operated using lower atomization temperatures for shorter time periods than the
above recommended settings.
2. The use of background correction is recommended.
3. Nitrogen may also be used as the purge gas.
4. If chloride concentration presents a matrix problem or causes a loss previous to
atomization, add an excess of 5 mg of ammonium nitrate to the furnace and ash using a
ramp accessory or with incremental steps until the recommended ashing temperature is
reached.
5. For every sample matrix analyzed, verification is necessary to determine that method of
standard addition is not required (see part 5.2.1 of the Atomic Absorption Methods
section of this manual).
6. If method of standard addition is required, follow the procedure given earlier in part 8.5
of the Atomic Absorption Methods section of this manual.
7. Data to be entered into STORET must be reported as ug/1.
Precision and Accuracy
1. Precision and accuracy data are not available at this time.
D-313
-------
D-314
-------
EPA METHOD
NO. 206.2
D-315
-------
ARSENIC
Method 206.2 (Atomic Absorption, furnace technique)
STORET NO. Total 01002
Dissolved 01000
Suspended 01001
Optimum Concentration Range: 5-100 ug/1
Detection Limit: 1 ug/1
Preparation of Standard Solution
1. Stock solution: Dissolve 1.320 g of arsenic trioxide, As203 (analytical reagent grade) in
100 ml of deionized distilled water containing 4 g NaOH. Acidify the solution with 20 ml
cone. HNO3 and dilute to 1 liter. 1 ml = 1 mg As (1000 mg/1).
2. Nickel Nitrate Solution, 5%: Dissolve 24.780 g of ACS reagent grade Ni(NO3)2«6H:O in
deionized distilled water and make up to 100ml.
3. Nickel Nitrate Solution, 1%: Dilute 20 ml of the 5% nickel nitrate to 100 ml with
deionized distilled water.
4. Working Arsenic Solution: Prepare dilutions of the stock solution to be used as
calibration standards at the time of analysis. Withdraw appropriate aliquots of the stock
solution, add 1 ml of cone. HNO3, 2ml of 30% H2O2 and 2ml of the 5% nickel nitrate
solution. Dilute to 100 ml with deionized distilled water.
Sample Preservation
1. For sample handling and preservation, see part 4.1 of the Atomic Absorption Methods
section of this manual.
Sample Preparation
1. Transfer 100 ml of well-mixed sample to a 250 ml Griffin beaker, add 2 ml of 30% H:O2
and sufficient cone. HNO3 to result in an acid concentration of l%(v/v). Heat for 1 hour
at 95°C or until the volume is slightly less than 50 ml.
2. Cool and bring back to 50 ml with deionized distilled water.
3. Pipet 5 ml of this digested solution into a 10-ml volumetric flask, add 1 ml of the 1%
nickel nitrate solution and dilute to 10 ml with deionized distilled water. The sample is
now ready for injection into the furnace.
Approved for NPDES and SDWA
Issued 1978
D-316
-------
NOTE: If solubilization or digestion is not required, adjust the HNO3 concentration of
the sample to 1 % (v/v) and add 2 ml of 30%H2O2 and 2 ml of 5% nickel nitrate to each
100 ml of sample. The volume of the calibration standard should be adjusted with
deionized distilled water to match the volume change of the sample.
Instrument Parameters (General)
1. Drying Time and Temp: 30 sec-125°C.
2. Ashing Time and Temp: 30 sec-1100°C.
3. Atomizing Time and Temp: 10sec-2700°C.
4. Purge Gas Atmosphere: Argon
5. Wavelength: 193.7 nm
6. Other operating parameters should be set as specified by the particular instrument
manufacturer.
Analysis Procedure
1. For the analysis procedure and the calculation, see "Furnace Procedure" part 9.3 of the
Atomic Absorption Methods section of this manual.
Notes
1. The above concentration values and instrument conditions are for a Perkin-Elmer HGA-
2100, based on the use of a 20 ul injection, purge gas interrupt and non-pyrolytic
graphite. Smaller size furnace devices or those employing faster rates of atomization can
be operated using lower atomization temperatures for shorter time periods than the
above recommended settings.
2. The use of background correction is recommended.
3. For every sample matrix analyzed, verification is necessary to determine that method of
standard addition is not required (see part 5.2.1 of the Atomic Absorption Methods
section of this manual).
4. If method of standard addition is required, follow the procedure given earlier in part 8.5
of the Atomic Absorption Methods section of this manual.
5. For quality control requirements and optional recommendations for use in drinking
water analyses, see part 10 of the Atomic Absorption Methods section of this manual.
6. Data to be entered into STORET must be reported as ug/1.
Precision and Accuracy
1. In a single laboratory (EMSL), using a mixed industrial-domestic waste effluent
containing 15 ug/1 and spiked with concentrations of 2, 10 and 25 ug/1, recoveries of
85%, 90% and 88% were obtained respectively. The relative standard deviation at these
concentrations levels were ±8.8%, ±fc.2%, ±5.4% and 18.7%, respectively.
2. In a single laboratory (EMSL), using Cincinnati, Ohio tap water spiked at concentrations
of 20, 50 and 100 ug As/1, the standard deviations were ±0.7, ±1.1 and ±1.6
respectively. Recoveries at these levels were 105%, 106% and 101 %, respectively.
D-317
-------
D-318
-------
EPA METHOD
NO. 270.2
D-319
-------
SELENIUM
Method 270.2 (Atomic Absorption, furnace technique)
STORET NO. Total 01147
Dissolved 01145
Suspended 01146
Optimum Concentration Range: 5-100 ug/1
Detection Limit: 2ug/l
Preparation of Standard Solution
I. Stock Selenium Solution: Dissolve 0.3453 g of selenous acid (actual assay 94.6% HiSeO,)
in deionized distilled water and make up to 200 ml. 1 ml = 1 mg Se (1000 mg/1).
2. Nickel Nitrate Solution, 5%: Dissolve 24.780 g of ACS reagent grade Ni(NO,):-6H:O in
deionized distilled water and make up to 100 ml.
3. Nickel Nitrate Solution, 1%: Dilute 20 ml of the 5% nickel nitrate to 100 ml with
deionized distilled water.
4. Working Selenium Solution: Prepare dilutions of the stock solution to be used as
calibration standards at the time of analysis. Withdraw appropriate aliquots of the stock
solution, add 1 ml of cone. HNO3, 2 ml of 30% H2O2 and 2 ml of the 5% nickel nitrate
solution. Dilute to 100 ml with deionized distilled water.
Sample Preservation ;
1. For sample handling and preservation, see part 4.1 of the Atomic Absorption Methods
section of this manual.
Sample Preparation
1. Transfer 100 ml of well-mixed sample to a 250 ml Griffin beaker, add 2 ml of 30% H;O:
and sufficient cone. HNO3 to result in an acid concentration of 1 %(v/v). Heat for 1 hour
at 95°C or until the volume is slightly less than 50 ml.
2. Cool and bring back to 50 ml with deionized distilled water.
3. Pipet 5 ml of this digested solution into a 10-ml volumetric flask, add I ml of the 1%
nickel nitrate solution and dilute to 10 ml with deionized distilled water. The sample is
now ready for injection into the furnace. NOTE: If solubilization or digestion is not
required adjust the HNO3 concentration of the sample to 1% (v/v) and add 2 ml of 30%
H:O; and 2 ml of 5% nickel nitrate to each 100 ml of sample. The volume of the
calibration standard should be adjusted with deionized distilled water to match the
volume change of the sample.
Approved for NPDES and SOW A
Issued 1978
D-320
-------
Instrument Parameters
1. Drying time and temperature: 30 sec @ 125"C
2. Charring time and temperature: 30 sec @ 1200°C
3. Atomizing time and temperature: 10 sec @ 2700°C
4. Purge Gas Atmosphere: Argon
5. Wavelength: 196.0 nm.
6. Other operating parameters should be set as specified by the particular instrument
manufacturer.
Analysis Procedure
1. For the analysis procedure and the calculation see "Furnace Procedure" part 9.3 of the
Atomic Absorption Methods section of this manual.
Notes
1. The above concentration values and instrument conditions are for a Perkin-Elmer HGA-
2100, based on the use of a 20 ul injection, purge gas imenupt and non-pyiolvtic
graphite. Smaller size furnace devices or those employing faster rates of atomization can
be operated using lower atomization temperatures for shorter time periods than the
above recommended settings.
2. The use of background correction is recommended.
3. Selenium analysis suffers interference from chlorides (> 800 mg/1) and sulfate (> 200
mg/1). For the analysis of industrial effluents and samples with concentrations of sulfate
from 200 to 2000 mg/1, both samples and standards should be prepared to contain 1%
nickel.
4. For every sample matrix analyzed, verification is necessary to determine that method of
standard addition is not required (see part 5.2.1 of the Atomic Absorption Methods
section of this manual).
5. For quality control requirements and optional recommendations for use in drinking
water analyses, see part 10 of the Atomic Absorption Methods section of this manual.
6. If method of standard addition is required, follow the procedure given earlier in part 8.5
of the Atomic Absorption Methods section of this manual.
7. Data to entered into STORET must be reported as ug/1.
Precision and Accuracy
1. Using a sewage treatment plant effluent containing <2 ug/1 and spiked with a
concentration of 20 ug/1, a recovery of 99% was obtained.
2. Using a series of industrial waste effluents spiked at a 50 ug/1 level, recoveries ranged
from 94 to 112%.
3. Using a 0.1% nickel nitrate solution as a synthetic matrix with selenium concentrations
of 5, 10, 20, 40, 50, and 100 ug/1, relative standard deviations of 14.2, 11.6, 9.3, 7.2, 6.4
and 4.1 %, respectively, were obtained at the 95% confidence level.
D-321
-------
4. In a single laboratory (EMSL), using Cincinnati, Ohio tap water spiked at concentrations
of 5, 10, and 20 ug Se/1, the standard deviations were ±0.6, ±0.4, and ±0.5,
respectively. Recoveries at these levels were 92%, 98%, and 100%, respectively.
Reference:
"Determining Selenium in Water, Wastewater, Sediment and Sludge By Flameless Atomic
Absorption Spectroscopy", Martin, T. D., Kopp, J. F. and Ediger, R. D. Atomic Absorption
Newsletterl4,109(1975).
D-322
-------
EPA METHOD
NO. 272.2
D-323
-------
SILVER
Method 272.2 (Atomic Absorption, furnace technique)
STORET NO. Total 01077
Dissolved 01075
Suspended 01076
Optimum Concentration Range: 1-25 ug/1
Detection Limit: 0.2 ug/1
Preparation of Standard Solution
I. Stock Solution: Prepare as described under "direct aspiration method".
2. Prepare dilutions of the stock solution to be used as calibration standards at the time of
analysis. These solutions are also to be used for "standard additions".
3. The calibration standard should be diluted to contain 0.5% (v/v) HNO3.
Sample Preservation
1. For sample handling and preservation, see part 4.1 of the Atomic Absorption Methods
section of this manual.
Sample Preparation
1. Prepare as described under "direct aspiration method". Sample solutions for analysis
should contain 0.5% (v/v) HNO3.
Instrument Parameters (General)
1. Drying Time and Temp: 30 sec-125°C.
2. Ashing Time and Temp: 30 sec-400°C.
3. Atomizing Time and Temp: 10 sec-2700'C
4. Purge Gas Atmosphere: Argon
5. Wavelength: 328.1 nm
6. Other operating parameters should be set as specified by the particular instrument
manufacturer.
Analysis Procedure
1. For the analysis procedure and the calculation, see "Furnace Procedure" part 9.3 of the
Atomic Absorption Methods section of this manual.
Approved for NPDES and SDWA
Issued 1978
D-324
-------
Notes
1. The above concentration values and instrument conditions are for a Perkin-Elmer HGA-
2100, based on the use of a 20 ul injection, .continuous flow purge gas and non-pyrolytic
graphite. Smaller size furnace devices or those employing faster rates of atomization can
be operated using lower atomization temperatures for shorter time periods than the
above recommended settings.
2. Background correction may be required if the sample contains high dissolved solids.
3. The use of halide acids should be avoided.
4. If adsorption to container walls or formation of AgCl is suspected, see NOTE 3 under the
Direct Aspiration Method 272.1.
5 For every sample matrix analyzed, verification is necessary to determine that method of
standard addition is not required (see part 5.2.1 of the Atomic Absorption Methods
section of this manual).
6. For quality control requirements and optional recommendations for use in drinking
\\ateranalyses. see part 10 of the Atomic Absorption Methods section of this manual.
7. ff method of standard addition is required, follow the procedure given earlier in part 8.5
of the Atomic Absorption Methods section of this manual.
8. Data to be entered into STORET must be reported as ug/1.
Precision and Accuracy:
1. In a single laboratory (EMSL), using Cincinnati, Ohio tap water spiked at concentrations
of 25, 50, and 75 ug Ag/1, the standard deviations were -0.4, -0.7, and 09.
respectively. Recoveries at these levels were 94%, 100% and 104%, respectively.
D-325
-------
D-326
-------
EPA METHOD
NO. 279.2
D-327
-------
THALLIUM
Method 279.2 (Atomic Absorption, furnace technique)
STORET NO. Total 01059
Dissolved 01057
Suspended 01058
Optimum Concentration Range: 5-100 ug/1
Detection Limit: 1 ug/1
Preparation of Standard Solution
1. Stock solution: Prepare as described under "direct aspiration method".
2. Prepare dilutions of the stock solution to be used as calibration standards at the time of
analysis. These solutions are also to be used for "standard additions".
3. The calibration standard should be diluted to contain 0.5% (v/v) HNO3.
Sample Preservation
1. For sample handling and preservation, see part 4.1 of the Atomic Absorption Methods
section of this manual.
Sample Preparation
I. Prepare as described under "direct aspiration method". Sample solutions for analysis
should contain 0.5% (v/v) HNO3.
Instrument Parameters (General)
1. Drying Time and Temp: 30 see @ 125*C
2. Ashing Time and Temp: 30 sec @ 400°C
3. Atomizing Time and Temp: 10 see ® 2400°C
4. Purge Gas Atmosphere: Argon
5. Wavelength: 276.8 nm
6. Other operating parameters should be set as specified by the particular instrument
manufacturer.
Analysis Procedure
1. For the analysis procedure and the calculation, see "Furnace Procedure" part 9.3 of the
Atomic Absorption Methods section of this manual.
Approved for NPDES
Issued 1978
D-328
-------
Notes
1. The above concentration values and instrument conditions are for a Perkin-Elmer HG A-
2100, based on the use of a 20 ul injection, continuous flow purge gas and non-pyrolytic
graphite. Smaller size furnace devices or those employing faster rates of atomization can
be operated using lower atomization temperatures for shorter time periods than the
above recommended settings.
2. The use of background correction is recommended.
3. Nitrogen may also be used as the purge gas.
4. For every sample matrix analyzed, verification is necessary to determine that method of
standard addition is not required (see part 5.2.1 of the Atomic Absorption Methods
section of this manual).
5. If method of standard addition is required, follow the procedure given earlier in part 8.5
of the Atomic Absorption Methods section of this manual.
6. Data to be entered into STORET must be reported as ug/1.
Precision and Accuracy
1. Precision and accuracy data are not available at this time.
D-329
-------
D-330
-------
ACID DIGESTION
(FROM CLP SOW NO. 785)
D-331
-------
ATTACHMENT 1
SAMPLE PREPARATION OP SEDIMENTS, SLUDGES AND SOILS
1. Scope and Application
1.1 This method is an acid digestion procedure used to prepare sediments,
sludges, and soil samples for analysis by flame or furnace atomic
absorption spectroscopy (AAS) or by inductively coupled argon plasma
spectroscopy (ICP). Samples prepared by this method may be analyzed
by AAS or ICP for the following metals:
Aluminum Chromium Potassium
Antimony Cobalt Selenium
Arsenic Copper Silver
Barium Iron Sodium
beryllium Lead Thallium
Cadmium Magnesium Vanadium
Calcium Manganese Zinc
Nickel
2. Summary of Method
NOTE: A separate digestion procedure is required for furnace AA and ICP
analysis.
2.1 A representative 1 g (wet weight) sample is digested in nitric acid and
hydrogen peroxide. The digestate is then refluxed with either nitric
acid or hydrochloric acid. Hydrochloric acid is used as the final
reflux acid for the furnace AA analysis of Sb, the flame AA or ICP
analysis of Al, Sb, Ba, Be, Ca, Cd, Cr, Co, Cu, Fe, Pb, Mg, Mn,
Ni, £, Ag, Na, Tl, V and Zn. Nitric acid is employed as the final
reflux acid for the furnace AA analysis of As, Be, Cd, Cr, Co, Cu, Fe,
Pb, Mn, Ni, Se, Ag, Tl, V, and Zn. A separate sample shall be dried
for a total solids determinaeion (Exhibit 0, Attachment 9).
J. Apparatus and Materials
J.I 250 ml beaker or other appropriate vessel.
J.2 Watch glasses
3.3 Thermometer that covers range of U° to 20(J°C
J.4 Whatman No. 4
-------
4.3 Concentrated Hydrochloric Acid (sp. gr. 1.19)
4.4 Hydrogen Peroxide (30%)
5. Sample Preservation, and Handling
5.1 Non-aqueous samples must be refrigerated upon receipt until analysis.
6. Procedure
6.1 Mix the sample thoroughly to achieve homogeniety. For each digestion
procedure, weigh (to the nearest 0. Olgms) a 1.0 to 1.5 gm portion of
sample and transfer to a beaker.
6.2 Add 10 ml of 1:1 nitric acid (HWOj), mix the slurry, and cover with
a watch glass. Heat the sample to 95°C and reflux for 10 minutes
without boiling. Allow the sample to cool, add 5 ml of concentrated
HNO^, replace the watch glass, and reflux for 30 minutes. L)o not
allow the volume to be reduced to less than 5 ml while maintaining
a covering of solution over the bottom of the beaker.
6.3 After the second reflux step has been completed and the sample has
cooled, add 2 ml of Type 11 water and 3 ml of 302 hydrogen peroxide
(H202). Return the beaker to the hot plate for warming to start the
peroxide reaction. Care must be taken to ensure that losses do not
occur due to excessively vigorous effervescence. Heat until effer-
vescence subsides, and cool the beaker.
6.4 Continue to add 30% ^2^2 in 1 ml aliquots with warming until the
effervescence is minimal or until the general sample appearance is
unchanged. (NOTE: Do not add more than a total of 10 ml 30% H202. )
6.5 If the sample is being prepared for the furnace AA analysis of Sb,
the flame AA or 1CP analysis of Al, Sb, Ba, Be, Ca, Cd, Cr, Co, Cu,
Fe, Pb, Mg, tin, Hi, K, Ag, Na, Tl, V, and 2n, add 5 ml of 1:1 HC1
and 10 ml of Type 11 water, return the covered beaker to the hot
plate, and heat for an additional 10 minutes. After cooling, filter
through Whatman No. 42 filter paper (or equivalent) and dilute to
100 ml with Type 11 water (or centrifuge the sample - see Note 1).
The diluted sample has an approximate acid concentration of 2.5*
(v/v) HC1 and 5£ (v/v) UNO 3. Dilute the digestate 1:1 (200 ml final
volume) with the deionized water. The sample is now ready for
analysis.
6.6 if the sample is beiny prepared for the furnace analysis ot" As, Be,
Cd, Cr, Co, Cu, Fe, Pb, tin, Hi, be, Ag, Tl, V, and Zn, continue heat-
ing the acid-peroxide digestate until the volume has been reduced to
approximately 2 ml, add 10 ml of Type 11 water, and warm the mixture
After cooling, filter through Whatman No. 42 filter paper (or equi-
valent - see l«ote I) and dilute to 100 ml with Type 11 water (or
centrifuge the sample). The diluted digestate solution contains
D-333
-------
approximately 2% (v/v) HN03- Dilute the digestate 1:1 (200 tnL final
volume) with deionized water. For analysis, withdraw aliquots of
appropriate volume, and add any required reagent or matrix modifier.
The sample is now ready for analysis.
7. Calculations
7.1 A separate determination of percent solids must be performed
(Exhibit D, Attachment 9).
7.2 The concentrations determined in the digest are to be reported
on the basis of the dry weight of the sample.
Concentration (dry wt.) (mg/kg) =
where C = Concentration (mg/L)
V = Final volume in liters after sample preparation
W = Weight in kg of wet sample
S = % Solids/100
R£F: tlodification of Method 3050 from SW-846, Test Methods for Evaluating
Solid Waste, EPA Office of Solid Waste and Emergency Response, July 1982.
ti. Bibliography
1. Modification (by committee) of llethod 3050, SW-6A6, 2nd ed., Test
Methods for Evaluating Solid Waste, EPA Office of Solid Waste and
Emergency Response, July 1982.
D-334
-------
EPA METHOD
NO. 200.7M
D-335
-------
Federal Register / Vol. 49. No. 209 / Friday. October 26, 1984 / Rules and Regulations 199
(S
where'ZTSai.is equal to ti
(d) The gsStatigdence limits'
denved in 7c are commuted accordingMo the
following equations denvilMcpm precentiles
[ the chi squared over degreesot-iVsedom
where LCL and UCLaYaO^e lower and upper
95* confidence limits respettwejvbased on
14 aliquots. ^""^^^
STUDENTS' t VALUES AT THE 99*
T CONFIDENCE LEVEL
Raagrting
Thear>aMical method used must be
specificallyKraqhfied by number or title and
the MDL for eacnSnajyte expressed in the
appropriate method repbvuna units. If the
analytical method permits opfmqs which
affSBlthe method detection limit/ft**^
conditi&mjnust be specified with the MDL
value. The saiqple matrix used to determine
the MDL must alswj?e identified with MDL
value. Report the mealv^nalyte level with the
MDLand indicate if the iCjSL^procedure was
iterared^lf a laboratory standard*or a sample
that con tawed a known amount anaHy^e was
used for this determination, also report the
mean recovery.
^if the level of anaiyfe-m the sample was
beloVlhe determined M0t or does not
exceed HUtjnes the MDL of thV-analyte in
reagent water, do not report a valueXor the
MDL.
Appendix C to Part 136—Inductively
Coupled Plasma—Atomic Emission
Spectrometric Method for Trace Element
Analysis of Water and Wastes Method
200.7
1 Scupt*
-------
200 Federal Register / Vol. 49, No. 209 / Friday. October 26. 1984 / Rules and Regulations
the line emission of high concentration
elements. The first of these effects can be
compensated by utilizing a computer
correction of the raw data, requiring the
monitoring and measurement of the
interfering element The second effect may
require selection of an alternate wavelength.
The third and fourth effects can usually be
compensated by a background correction
adjacent to the analyte line. In addition, users
of simultaneous multi-element
instrumentation must assume the
responsibility of verifying the absence of
spectral interference from an element that
could occur in a sample but for which there is
no channel in the instrument array. Listed in
Table 2 are some interference effects for the
recommended wavelengths given in Table 1.
The data in Table 2 are intended for use only
as a rudimentary guide for the indication of
potential spectral interferences. For this
purpose, linear relations between
concentration and intensity for the analytes
and the interferents can be assumed. The
Interference information, which was
collected at the Ames Laboratory,1 is
expressed as analyte concentration
equivalents (i.e. false analyte concentrations]
arising from 100 mg/L of the interferent
element. The suggested use of this
information is as follows: Assume that
arsenic (at 193.696 nm) is to be determined in
a sample containing approximately 10 mg/L
of aluminum. According to Table Z. 100 mg/L
of aluminum would yield a false signal for
arsenic equivalent to approximately 1.3 mg/L.
Therefore, 10 mg/L of aluminum would result
in a false signal for arsenic equivalent to
approximately 0.13 mg/L The reader is
cautioned that other analytical systems may
exhibit somewhat different levels of
interference than those shown in Table 2, and
that the interference effects must be
evaluated for each individual system.
Only those interferents listed were
investigated and the blank spaces in Table 2
indicate that measurable interferences were
not observed for the interferent
concentrations listed in Table 3. Generally.
interferences were discernible if they
produced peaks or background shifts
corresponding to 2-5% of the peaks generated
by the analyte concentrations also listed in
Table 3.
At present, information on the listed silver
and potassium wavelengths are not available
but it has been reported that second order
energy from the magnesium 383.231 nm
wavelength interferes with the listed
potassium line at 766.491 nm.
5.1.2 Physical interferences are generally
considered to be effects associated with the
sample nebuhzation and transport processes.
Such properties as change in viscosity dnd
surface tension can cause significant
inaccuracies especially in samoles which
may contain high dissolved solids and/or
acid concentrations. The use of a peristaltic
pump may lessen these interferences. If these
types of interferences are operative, they
must be reduced by dilution of the sample
and/or utilization of standard addition
techniques. Another problem which can
1 Ames La bora lory. USDOE. Iowa Slate
University. Ames Iowa 50011
occur from high dissolved solids is salt
buildup at the tip of the nebulizer. This
affects aersol flow rate causing instrumental
drift. Wetting the argon prior to nebulization,
the use of a tip washer, or sample dilution
have been used to control this problem. Also,
it has been reported that better control of the
argon flow rate improves instrument
performance. This is accomplished with the
use of mass flow controllers.
5.1.3 Chemical Interferences are
characterized by molecular compound
formation, ionization effects and solute
vaporization effects. Normally these effects
are not pronounced with the ICP technique,
however, if observed they can be minimized
by careful selection of operating conditions
(that is, incident power, observation position.
and so forth), by buffering of the sample, by
matrix matching, and by standard addition
procedures. These types of interferences can
be highly dependent on matrix type and the
specific analyte element.
5.2 It is recommended that whenever a
new or unusual sample matrix is
encountered, a series of tests be performed
prior to reporting concentration data for
analyte elements. These tests, as outlined in
5.2.1 through 5.2.4. will ensure the analyst
that neither positive nor negative interference
effects are operative on any of the analyte
elements thereby distorting the accuracy of
the reported values.
5.2.1 Serial dilution—If the analyte
concentration is sufficiently high (minimally a
factor of 10 above the instrumental detection
limit after dilution), an analysis of a dilution
should agree within 5 percent of the original
determination (or within some acceptable
control limit (14.3) that has been established
for that matrix.). If not, a chemical or physical
interference effect should be suspected.
5.2.2 Spike addition— The recovery of a
spike addition added at a minimum level of
10X the instrumental detection limil
(maximum 100X) to the original
determination should be recovered to within
90 to 110 percent or within the established
control limit for that matrix. If not, a matrix
effect should be suspected. The use of a
standard addition analysis procedure can
usually compensate for this effect.
Caution: The standard addition technique
does not detect coincident spectral overlap. If
suspected, use of computerized
compensation, an alternate wavelength, or
comparison with an alternate method is
recommended (See 5.2.3).
5.2.3 Comparison with alternate method
of analysis—When investigating a new
sample matrix, comparison tests may be
performed with other analytical techniques
such as atomic absorption spectrometry, or
other approved methodology.
5.2.4 Wavelength scanning of analyte line
region—If the appropriate equipment is
available, wavelength scanning can be
performed to detect potential spectral
interferences.
6. Apparatus
6.1 Inductively Coupled Plasma-Atomic
Emission Spectrometer.
6.1.1 Computer controlled atomic
emission spectrometer with background
correction.
6.1.2 Radiofrequency generator.
6.1.3 Argon gas supply, welding grade or
better.
6.2 Operating conditions—Because of the
differences between various makes and
models of satisfactory instruments, no
detailed operating instructions can be
provided. Instead, the analyst should follow
the instructions provided by the manufacturer
of the particular instrument. Sensitivity.
instrumental detection limit, precision, linear
dynamic range, and interference effects must
be investigated and established for each
individual analyte line on that particular
instrument. It is the responsibility of the
analyst to verify that the instrument
configuration and operating conditions used
satisfy the analytical requirements and to
maintain quality control data confirming
instrument performance and analytical
results.
7. Reagents and Standards
7.1 Acids used in the preparation of
standards and for sample processing must be
ultra-high purity grade or equivalent.
Redistilled acids are acceptable.
7.1.1 Acetic acid. cone, (sp gr 1.06).
7.1.2 Hydrochloric acid. cone, (sp gr 1.19).
7.1.3 Hydrochloric acid. (1+1): Add 500
mL cone. HO (sp gr 1.19) to 400 mL deionized,
distilled water and dilute to 1 liter.
7.1.4 Nitric acid. cone, (sp gr 1.41).
7.1.5 Nitric acid. (1+1): Add 500 mL cone.
HNO, (sp gr 1.41) to 400 mL deionized,
distilled water and dilute to 1 liter.
7.2 Deionized distilled water Prepare by
passing distilled water through a mixed bed
of cation and anion exchange resins. Use
deionized, distilled water for the preparation
of all reagents, calibration standards and as
dilution water. The purity of this water must
be equivalent to ASTMType II reagent water
of Specification D1193 (14.6).
7.3 Standard stock solutions may be
purchased or prepared from ultra high purity
grade chemicals or metals. All salts must be
dried for 1 h at 105 *C unless otherwise
specified.
(CAUTION: Many metal salts are
extremely toxic and may be fatal if
swallowed. Wash hands thoroughly after
handling.)
Typical stock solution preparation
procedures follow:
7.3.1 Aluminum solution, stock. 1 mL = /ig
Al: Dissolve 0.100 g of aluminum metal in an
acid mixture of 4 mL of (1 +\) HCI and l mL
of cone. HNO] in a beaker. Warm gently to
effect solution. When solution is complete.
transfer quantitatively to a liter flask add an
additional 10 mL of (1 +1) HCI and dilute to
1,000 mL with deionized. distilled water.
7.3.2 Antimony solution stock, 1 mL = 100
Hg Sb: Dissolve 0.2669 g K(SbO)C.H4O, in
deionized distilled water, add 10 mL (1 + IJ
HCI and dilute to 1,000 mL with deionized.
distilled water.
7.3.3 Arsenic solution, stock. 1 mL = 100
(ig As: Dissolve 0.1320 g of AsjO] in 100 mL of
deionized. distilled water containing 0.4 g
NaOH. Acidify the solution with 2 mL cone.
HNO] and dilute to 1.000 mL with deionized.
distilled water.
D-337
-------
Federal Register / Vol. 49, No. 209 / Friday, October 26, 1984 / Rules and Regulations 201
7.3.4 Barium solution, stock. 1 mL=100 fig
Ba: Dissolve 0.1516 g BaCI, (dried at 250 *C
for 2 hrs) in 10 mL deionized. distilled water
with 1 mL (1+1! HC1. Add 10.0 mL (1+1) HC1
and dilute to 1.000 with mL deionized.
distilled water.
7.3.5 Beryllium solution, stock. 1 raL^lOO
fig Be: Do not dry. Dissolve 1.966 g
BeSO. -4H.O. in deionized. distilled water.
add 10.0 mL cone. HNO» and dilute to 1.000
mL with deionized. distilled water.
7.3.6 Boron solution, stock. I mL—lOO fig
B: Do not dry. Dissolve 0.5716 g anhydrous
Hi BO] in deionized. distilled water and dilute
to 1.000 mL. Use a reagent meeting ACS
specifications, keep the bottle tightly
stoppered and store in a desiccator to
prevent the entrance of atmospheric
moisture.
7.3.7 Cadmium solution, stock. 1 mL = 100
fig Cd: Dissolve 0.1142 g CdO in a minimum
amount of (1 +1) HNOj. Heat to increase rate
of dissolution. Add 10.0 mL cone. HNOj and
dilute to 1.000 mL with deionized. distilled
water.
7.3.8 Calcium solution, stock. 1 mL=100
fig Ca: Suspend 0.2498 g CaCOj dried at 180
'C for 1 h before weighing in deionized.
distilled water and dissolve cautiously with a
minimum amount of(1+1) HNOj. Add 10.0
mL cone. HNOj and dilute to 1.000 mL with
deionized. distilled water.
7 3.9 Chromium solution, stock. 1 mL=100
fig Cr: Dissolve 0.1923 g of CrOj in deionized.
distilled water. When solution is complete,
acidify with 10 mL cone. HNO> and dilute to
1.000 mL with deionized. distilled water.
7 3.10 Cobalt solution, stock. 1 ml=100
fig Co: Dissolve 0.1000 g of cobalt metal in a
minimum amount of (1 +1) HNOj. Add 10.0
mL (1 + 1) HC1 and dilute to 1.000 mL with
deionized. distilled water.
7.3.11 Copper solution, stock. 1 mL=100
fig Cu: Dissolve 0.1252 g CuO in a minimum
amount of (1+1) HNOj. Add 10.0 mL cone.
HNOj and dilute to 1.000 mL with deionized.
distilled water.
7.112 Iron solution, stock. 1 mL=100 fig
Fe: Dissolve 0.1430 g Fe>O> in a warm mixture
of 20 mL (1 +1) HCI and 2 mL of cone. HNO>.
Cool, add an additional 5 mL of cone. HNOj
and dilute to 1.000 mL with deionized.
distilled water.
7.3.13 Lead solution, stock. \ mL = 100fig
Pb: Dissolve 0.1599 g Pb(NOj)i in a minimum
amount of (1 +1) HNOj. Add 10.0 mL cone.
HNOi and dilute to 1.000 mL with deionized.
distilled water.
7314 Magnesium solution, stock. 1
mL ---100 fiij Mg: Dissolve 0.1658 " MgO in a
minimum jmount of (1 -Ml HNOi. Add 10.0
ml. r.onc UNO, and dilute to 1,000 mL with
: Do not dry. Dissolve 0.4730 g NaiSiOj
«9HtO in deionized. distilled water. Add 10.0
mL cone HNO> and dilute to 1,000 mL with
deionized, distilled water.
7.3.21 Silver solution, stock. 1 mL=100 fig
Ag: Dissolve 0.1575 g AgNOj in 100 mL of
deionized, distilled water and 10 mL cone.
HNOj. Dilute to 1.000 mL with deionized.
distilled water.
7.3.22 Sodium solution, stock. 1 mL = 100
fig Na: Dissolve 0.2542 g NaCl in deionized.
distilled water. Add 10.0 mL cone. HNOj and
dilute to 1.000 mL with deionized. distilled
water.
7.3.23 Thallium solution, stock. 1 mL = 100
fig Tl: Dissolve 0.1303 g TlNCs in deionized.
distilled water. Add 10.0 mL cone. HNOj and
dilute to 1.000 mL with deionized. distilled
water.
7.3.24 Vanadium solution, stock. 1
mL=100 fig V: Dissolve 0.2297 NH.VO, in a
minimum amount of cone HNOi. Heat to
increase rate of dissolution. Add 10.0 mL
cone. HNOj and dilute to 1.000 mL with
deionized. distilled water.
7.3.25 Zinc solution, stock. 1 mL = 100 fig
Zru Dissolve 0.1245 g ZnO in a minimum
amount of dilute HNOj. Add 10.0 mL cone.
HNOj and dilute to 1.000 mL deionized.
distilled water.
7:4 Mixed calibration standard
solutions—Prepare mixed calibration
standard solutions by combining appropriate
volumes of the stock solutions in volumetric
flash*. (See 7.4.1 thro 7.4.5) Add 2 mL of
(1+1) HNOi and 10 mL of (1 + 1) HCl and
dilute to 100 mL with deionized, distilled
water. (See Notes 1 and 6.) Prior to preparing
the mixed standards, each stock solution
should be analyzed separately to determine
possible spectral interference or the presence
of impurities. Care should be taken when
preparing the mixed standards that the
elements are compatible and stable. Transfer
the mixed standard solutions to a FEP
fluorocarbon or unused polyethylene bottle
for storage. Fresh mixed standards should be
prepared as needed with the realization that
concentration can change on aging.
Calibration standards must be initially
verified using a quality control sample and
monitored weekly for stability (See 7 6.3).
Although not specifically required, some
typical calibration standard combinations
follow when using those specific wavelengths
listed m Table 1.
7.4.1 Mixed standard solution I—
Manganese, beryllium, cadmium, lead, and
zinc.
7.4.2 Mixed standard solution II—Barium.
copper, iron, vanadium, and cobalt.
7.4.3 Mixed standard solution III—
Molybdenum, silica, arsenic, and selenium.
7.4.4 Mixed standard solution IV—
Calcium, sodium, potassium, aluminum.
chromium and nickel.
7.4.5 Mixed standard solution V—
Antimony, boron, magnesium, silver, and
thallium.
Note 1.—If the addition of silver to the
recommended acid combination results in an
initial precipitation, add 15 mL of deionized
distilled water and warm the flask until the
solution clears. Cool and dilute to 100 mL
with deionized, distilled water. For this acid
combination the silver concentration should
be limited to 2 mg/U Silver under these
conditions is stable in a tap water matrix for
30 days. Higher concentrations of silver
require additional HCI.
7.5 Two types of blanks are required for
the analysis. The calibration blank (3.13) is
used in establishing the analytical curve
while the reagent blank (3.12) is used to
correct for possible contamination resulting
from varying amounts of the acids used in the
sample processing.
7.5.1 The calibration blank is prepared by
diluting 2 mL of (1 +1) HNOj and 10 mL of
(1+1) HCI to 100 mL with deionized. distilled
water. (See Note 6.) Prepare a sufficient
quantity to be used to flush the system
between standards and samples.
7.5.2 The reagent blank must contain all
the reagents and in the same volumes as used
in the processing of the samples. The reagent
blank must be carried through the complete
procedure and contain the same acid
concentration in the final solution as the
sample solution used for analysts.
7.8 In addition to the calibration
standards, an instrument check standard
(3.7), an interference check sample (3.8) and a
quality control sample (3.9) are also required
for the analyses.
7,6.1 The instrument check standard is
prepared by the analyst by combining
compatible elements at a concentration
equivalent to the midpoint of their respective
calibration curves. (See 12.1.1.)
7.6.2 The interference check sample is
prepared by the analyst in the following
manner. Select a representative sample
which contains minimal concentrations of the
analytes of interest but known concentration
of interfering elements that will provide an
adequate test of the correction factors. Spike
the sample with the elements of interest at
the approximate concentration of either 100
fig/L or 5 times the estimated detection limits
given in Table 1. (For effluent samples of
expected high concentrations, spike at an
appropriate level.) If the type of samples
analyzed are varied, a synthetically prepared
sample may be used if the above criteria and
intent are met. A limited supply of a synlhetic
interference check sample will be available
from the Quality Assurance Branch of EMSL-
Cincmnati. (See 12.1.2).
7 6.3 The quality control sample should
be prepared in the same acid matrix as the
calibration standards at a concentration near
1 mg/L and in accordance with the
instructions provided by the supplier. The
Quality Assurance Branch of EMSL-
Cincinnati will either supply a quality control
sample or information where one of equal
quality can be procured. (See 12.1.3.)
D-338
-------
202
Federal Register / Vol. 49. No. 209 / Friday. October 26. 1984 / Rules and Regulations
8. Sample Handling and Preservation
8.1 For the determination of trace
elements, contamination and loss are of
prime concern. Dust in the laboratory
environment, impurities in reagents and
impurities on laboratory apparatui which the
sample contacts are all sources of potential
contamination. Sample containers can
introduce either positive or negative errors in
the measurement of trace elements by (a)
contributing contaminants through leaching
or surface desorption and (b) by depleting
concentrations through adsorption. Thus the
collection and treatment of the sample prior
to analysis requires particular attention.
Laboratory glassware including the sample
bottle (whether polyethylene, polyproplyene
or FEP-fluorocarbon) should be thoroughly
washed with detergent and tap water rinsed
with (1+1) nitnc acid, tap water. (1 + 1)
hydrochloric acid, tap and finally deiomzed.
distilled water in that order (See Notes 2 and
3).
Note 2.—Chromic acid may be useful to
remove organic deposits from glassware:
however, the analyst should be cautioned
that the glassware must be thoroughly rinsed
with water to remove the last traces of
chromium. This is especially important if
chromium is to be included in the analytical
scheme. A commercial product.
NOCHROMIX available from Godax
Laboratories, 8 Vanck St., New York, NY
10013, may be used in place of chromic acid.
Chromic acid should not be used with plastic
bottles.
Note 3.—If it can be documented through
an active analytical quality control program
using spiked samples and reagent blanks.
that certain steps in the cleaning procedure
are not required for routine samples, those
steps may be eliminated from the procedure.
8.2 Before collection of the sample a
decision must be made as to the type of data
desired, that is dissolved, suspended or total,
so that the appropriate preservation and
pretreatment steps may be accomplished.
Filtration, acid preservation, etc., are to be
performed at the time the sample is collected
or as soon as possible thereafter.
8.2.1 For the determination of dissolved
elements the sample must be filtered through
a 0.45-^m membrane filter as soon as
practical after collection. (Class or plastic
filtering apparatus are recommended to avoid
possible contamination.) Use the first 50-100
mL to rinse the filter flask. Discard this
portion and collect the required volume of
filtrate. Acidify the filtrate with (1 +1) HNO3
to a pH of 2 or less. Normally. 3 mL of (1 +1)
acid per liter should be sufficient to preserve
the sample.
8.2.2 For the determination of suspended
elements a measured volume of unpreserved
sample must be filtered through a OAS-pm
membrane filter as soon as practical after
collection. The filter plus suspended material
should be transferred to A suitable container
for storage and/or shipment. No preservative
is required.
8.2.3 For the determination of total or
total recoverable elements, the sample is
acidified with (1 +1) HNOj to pH 2 or less as
soon as possible, preferably at the time of
collection. The sample is not filtered before
processing.
9. Sample Preparation
9.1 For the determinations of dissolved
elements, the filtered, preserved sample may
often be analyzed as received. The acid
matrix and concentration of the samples and
calibration standards must be the same. (See
Note 8.) If a precipitate formed upon
acidification of the sample or during transit
or storage, it must be redissolved before the
analysis by adding additional acid and/or by
heat as described in 9.3.
9.2 For the determination of suspended
elements, transfer the membrane filter
containing the insoluble material to a 150-mL
Griffin beaker and add 4 mL cone. HNCv
Cover the beaker with a watch glass and heat
gently. The warm acid will soon dissolve the
membrane. Increase the temperature of the
hot plate and digest the material. When the
acid has nearly evaporated, cool the beaker
and watch glass and add another 3 mL of
cone. HNOj. Cover and continue heating until
the digestion is complete, generally indicated
by a light colored digestate. Evaporate to
near dryness (2 mL). cool, and 10 mL HC1
(1+1) and 15 mL deionized, distilled water
per 100 mL dilution and warm the beaker
gently for 15 min. to dissolve any precipitated
or residue material. Allow to cool, wash
down the watch glass and beaker walls with
deionized distilled water and filter the
sample to remove insoluble material that
could clog the nebulizer. (See Note 4.) Adjust
the volume based on the expected
concentrations of elements present. This
volume will vary depending on the elements
to be determined (See Note 8). The sample is
now ready for analysis. Concentrations so
determined shall be reported as "suspended."
Note 4.—In place of filtring, the sample
after diluting and mixing may be centrifuged
or allowed to settle by gravity overnight to
remove insoluble material.
9.3 For the determination of total
elements, choose a measured volume of the
well mixed acid preserved sample
appropriate for the expected level of
elements and transfer to a Griffin beaker.
(See Note 5.) Add 3 mL of cone. HNOi. Place
the beaker on a hot plate and evaporate to
near dryness cautiously, making certain that
the sample does not boil and that no area of
the bottom of the beaker is allowed to go dry.
Cool the beaker and add another 5 mL
portion of cone. HNOi. Cover the beaker with
a watch glass and return to the hot plate.
Increase the temperature of the hot plate so
that a gently reflux action occurs. Continue
heating, adding additional acid as necessary.
until the digestion is complete (generally
indicated when the digestate is light in color
or does not change in appearance with
continued refluxmg.) Again, evaporate to
near dryness and cool the beaker. Add 10 mL
of 1 +1 HC1 and 15 mL of deionized, distilled
water per 100 mL of final solution and warm
the beaker gently for 15 mm. to dissolve any
precipitate or residue resulting from
evaporation. Allow to cool, wash down the
beaker walls and watch glass with deionized
distilled water and filter the sample to
remove insoluble material that could clog the
nebulizer. (See Note 4.) Adjust the sample to
a predetermined volume based on the
expected concentrations of elements present.
The sample is now ready for analysis (See
Note 6). Concentrations so determined shall
be reported as "total."
Note 5.—If low determinations of boron are
critical, quartz glassware should be used.
Note 6.—If the sample analysis solution
has a different acid concentration from that
given in 9.4, but does not introduce a physical
interference or affect the analytical result, the
same calibration standards may be used.
9.4 For the determination of total
recoverable elements, choose a measured
volume of a well mixed, acid preserved
sample appropriate for the expected level of
elements and transfer to a Griffin beaker.
(See Note 5.) Add 2 mL of (1 + 1) HNO> and 10
mL of (1 +1) HC1 to the sample and heat on a
steam bath or hot plate until the volume has
been reduced to near 25 mL making certain
the sample does not boil. After this treatment.
cool the sample and filter to remove insoluble
material that could clog the nebulizer. (See
Note 4.) Adjust the volume to 100 mL and
mix. The sample is now ready for analysis.
Concentrations so determined shall be
reported as "total."
10. Procedure
10.1 Set up instrument with proper
operating parameters established in Section
8.2. The instrument must be allowed to
become thermally stable before beginning.
This usually requires at least 30 min. of
operation prior to calibration.
10.2 Initiate appropriate operating
configuration of computer.
10.3 Profile and calibrate instrument
according- to instrument manufacturer's
recommended procedure*, using the typical
mixed calibration standard solutions
described in Section 7.4. Flush the system
with the calibration blank (7.5.1} between
each standard. (See Note 7.) (The use of the
average intensity of multiple exposures for
both standardization and sample analysis
has been found to reduce random error.)
Note 7.—For boron concentrations greater
than 500 j*g/L extended flush times of 1 to 2
minutes may be required.
10.4 Before beginning the sample run.
reanalyze the highest mixed calibration
standard as if it were a sample.
Concentration values obtained should not
deviate from the actual values by more than
+5 percent (or the established control limits
whichever is lower). If they do, follow the
recommendations of the instrument
manufacturer to correct for this condition.
10.5 Begin the sample run flushing the
system with the calibration blank solution
(7.5.1) between each sample. (See Note 7.)
Analyze the instrument check standard (761)
and the calibration blank (7 5.1) each 10
samples.
10.6 If it has been found that methods of
standard addition are required, the following
procedure is recommended.
10.6.1 The standard addition technique
(14.2) involves preparing new standards in
the sample matrix by adding known amounts
of standard to one or more aliquots of the
processed sample solution. This technique
compensates for a sample constitutent that
enhances or depresses the analyte signal thus
D-339
-------
Federal Register / Vol. 49. No. 209 / Friday. October 26. 1984 / Rules and Regulations
producing a different slope from that of the
calibration standards. It will not correct for
additive interference which causes a baseline
shift. The simplest version of this technique is
the single-addition method. The procedure is
as follows. Two identical aliquots of the
sample solution, each of volume V,. are
taken. To the first (labeled A) is added a
small volume V. of a standard analyte
solution of concentration c,. To the second
(labeled B) is added the same volume V, of
the solvent. The analytical signals of A and B
are measured and corrected for nonanalyte
signals. The unknown sample concentration
c, is calculated:
S.V.C,
(SA-S.) V,
where SA and S, are the analytical signals
(corrected fur the blank) of solutions A and B.
respectively. V, and c, should be chosen 50
that S» is roughly twice SB on the average. It
is best if V, is made much less than V,. and
thus c, is much greater than c,. to avoid
excess dilution of the sample matrix. If a
separation or concentration step is used, the
additions are best made first and carried
through the entire procedure. For the results
from this technique to be valid, the following
limitations must be taken into consideration:
1. The analytical curve must be linear.
2. The chemical form of the analyte added
must respond the same as the analyte in the
sample.
3. The interference effect must be constant
over the working range of concern.
4. The signal must be corrected for any
additive interference.
:;. Calculation
11.1 Reagent blanks (7.5.2) should be
subtracted from all samples. This is
particularly important for digested samples
requiring large quantities of acids to complete
the digestion.
11.2 If dilutions were performed, the
appropriate factor must be applied to sample
values.
11.3 Data should be rounded to the
thousandth place and all results should be
reported in mg/L up to three significant
figures.
!2. Quality Control (Instrumental)
12.1 Check the instrument standardization
by aridlyzmg appropriate quality control
check standards as follow:
12.1.1 Analyze and appropriate
instrument check standard (7.6.1) containing
the elements of interest at a frequency of 10%.
This check standard is used to determine
instrument drift. If agreement is not within
±5% of the expected values or within the
established control limits, whichever is
lower, the analysis is out of control. The
analysis should be terminated, the problem
corrected, and the instrument recalibrated.
Analyze the calibration blank (7.5.1) at a
frequency of 10%. The result should be within
the established control limits of 2 standard
deviations of the mean value. If not. repeat
the analysis two more times and average the
three results. If the average is not within the
control limit, terminate the analysis, correct
the problem and recalibrate the instrument.
12.1.2 To verify interelement and
background correction factors analyze the
interference check sample (7.6.2) at the
beginning, end. and at periodic intervals
throughout the sample run. Results should fall
within the established control limits of 1.5
times the standard deviation of the mean
value. If not, terminate the analysis, correct
the problem and recalibrate the instrument.
12.1.3 A quality control sample (7.6.3)
obtained from an outside source must first be
used for the initial verification of the
calibration standards. A fresh dilution of this
sample shall be analyzed every week
thereafter to monitor their stability. If the
results are not within ±591 of the true value
listed for the control sample, prepare a new
calibration standard and recalibrate the
instrument. If this does not correct the
problem, prepare a new stock standard and a
new calibration standard and repeat the
calibration.
13. Precision and Accuracy
13.1 In an EPA round robin phase 1 study.
even laboratories applied the IGP technique
to acid-distilled water matrices that had been
dosed with various metal concentrates. Table
4 lists the true value, the mean reported value
and the mean * relative standard deviation.
14. References
14.1 Winge. R.K.. V.J. Peterson, and V.A.
Fassel. "Inductively Coupled Plasma-Atomic
Emission Spectroscopy: Prominent Lines.
EPA-600/4-79-017.
14.2 Winefordner. J.D.. 'Trace Analysis:
Spectroscopic Methods for Elements."
Chemical Analysis. Vol. 48. pp. 41-42.
14.3 Handbook for Analytical Quality
Control in Water and Wastewater
Laboratories. EPA-600/4-79-019.
14.4 Garbarino. J.R. and Taylor. H.E.. "An
Inductively-Coupled Plasma Atomic Emission
Spectrometric Method for Routine Water
Quality Testing." Applied Spectroscopy 33.
No. 3 (1979).
14.5 "Methods for Chemical Analysis of
Water and Wastes." EPA-600/4-79-020.
14.8 Annual Book of ASTM Standards.
Part 31.
14.7 "Carcinogens—Working With
Carcinogens." Department of Health.
Education, and Welfare. Public Health
Service. Center for Disease Control. National
Institute for Occupational Safety and Health.
Publication No. 77-206. Aug. 1977
14.8 "OSHA Safety and Health
Standards. General Industry." (29 CFR 1910).
Occupational Safety and Health
Administration. OSHA 2206. (Revised.
January 1976).
14.9 "Safety in Academic Chemistry
Laboratories. American Chemical Society
Publication. Committee on Chemical Safety.
3rd Edition. 1979.
TABLE 1 —RECOMMENDED WAVELENGTHS '
and Estimated Instrumental Detection Limits
_
Aluminum ..
Anamc .
Antimony
Banum
Beryllium
Boron
Cadmium
Cataum
Cnromum
Coba*.
Copper
Iron
L4ad
Maona*um ,!...'.. " '.!'.' '.'.".'. ..'.....
Manganese
Mofybdtnum ....
Ndiai
Potaaawm
5elenmn
Sifcca (SO,)
SJver
Sodium...
Thanum
Vanadun . ..
Zinc . .
Wvjtn.
nm
309215
•33696
2C€ 933
455 4^3
313 042
249 773
226 502
3 1 ? 933
267 718
229616
32« 754
259340
220353
2T9 079
257610
202030
231 604
766 491
2!S 158
329068
568 995
292 J02
2-3956 {
Estimated
detection
MIM.
45
0 3
e
4
7
7
6
7
42
30
2
9
15
75
58
7
40
8
2
'The wevewjngtns luted am recommended Because of
me» sensnvily and overall acceptance Ounr wavetangtnj
may be substituted 4 they can provide the needed sensitivity
and are treated «mi me same correcave leotmaues for
spectral interference. (See 511).
'The estimated instrumental detection »rvs IS snown are
laken from "Inductively Coupled Rasr-^.*iorr»c Emission
Specvoacopy-Promnenl Unes." EPA-600'i-79-017 They
are grven as a guide for an instrumental >
-------
204 Federal Register / Vol. 49. No. 209 / Friday. October 26. 1984 / Rules and Regulations
TABLE 1.—ANALYTE CONCENTRATION EQUIVALENTS (MG/L) ARISING FROM INTERFERENTS AT THE 100 MG/L LEVEL—Continued
1 eat)
MaQneaum
IHaUaqMiaM , ...... u . . „... ,,...
Molybdenum
Nicttel
Setonum
«-brfln
Sodwn - _ .
ThaNum
Vanednim
Zinc
Wave-
nm
220353
279079
2*7810
231.804
19ft (KM
206 198
S88.9BS
190.884
292.402
213.8S6
A1
017
0.005
O.OS
0.23
0.30
Ca
0.02
Cr
0.11
0.01
007
DOS
Cu
0 14
Wart*
F.
013
0.002
0.03
009
0005
rant—
"0
0.002
Mn
0.25
Mi
Ti
007
006
V
TABLE 3. INTERFERENT AND ANALYTE ELEMENTAL CONCENTRATIONS USED FOR INTERFERENCE MEASUREMENTS IN TABLE 2
AnalyWa
At
AS
8
Ba
Be
Ca
Cd
Co
Cr
Cu
Fe
Mg
Mn
Mo
Na
Mi
PtJ ...
Sb „
Se
$i
Tl
V
Zn . ...
(mg/u
10
to
10
1
1
1
10
1
1
1
1
t
t
10
10
10
10
10
10
1
10
1
10
Intarierents
Al .
Ca
Cr
Cu
Fa
Mg
Mn
Ni
Ti
V
MfVMa)
vital j*/L
733
349
749
206>
f49
239
594
(96
40
512
245
236
201
32
Mean
p«an»MB
62
2.7
1 (
75
38
51
30
56
12
10
58
16
56
21 9
TnMvakM
MS/1
20
15
TO
22
11
20
60
25
30
24
)«
Samp**No. 2
Mean
repoftw*
vatua»ig/L
15
Mean
perc*rtRSO
Tnwvvlua
M4/1
*
Sampla No. 3
Maan
rcpoflad
valua^g/L
Wean
percent flSD
"
14
14
h4ot M uloiiionia war* anatyud by aH labonrtonaa.
[Doc. 84-26189 Filed 10-23-84: 8:45 am)
BILLING COO€ 65«O-50-*I
D-341
-------
SUP6RSCAN ELEMENTS, WAVELENGTHS, i, LTL
Element
Aluminum
Ant tmony
Arsenic
Barium
Bury I Hum
Bismuth
Baron
Cadmium
Calcium
Cerium
Chr om ium
Cobalt
Copper
Dysprosium
Erbium
Europium
Sado1inium
Gallium
Germanium
Sold
Hafnium
Holmium
Indium
Iodine
I r i d i urn
Iron
Lanthanum
Lead
Lithium
Lutetium
Magnesium
Manganese
Mercury
Molybdenum
Neodymium
Nickel
Niobium
Osmium
Palladium
Phosphorus
PI a t i num
Potassium
Praseodymium
Rhenium
Rhod ium
Ruthenium
Samar ium
Scandium
Selenium
Si 1 icon
Silver
Sod ium
Strontium
Sulfur
Tantalum
Tellurium
Teroium
Thallium
Thar ium
Thulium
Tin
Ti tanium
Tungsten
Uranium
Vanadium
Ytterbium
Yttrium
Zinc
Zirconium
Symbo1
fll-SS
Sb-SS
A»-SS
9a-SS
Se-SS
9i-SS
B-SS
Cd-SS
Ca-SS
Ce-SS
Cr-SS
Co-SS
Cu-SS
Dy-SS
Er-SS
Eu-SS
Gd-SS
G»-SS
G«-SS
Au-SS
Hf-SS
Ho-SS
In-SS
I-S3
Ir-SS
Fe-SS
La-SS
Pb-SS
Li-SS
Lu-SS
ng-SS
nn-SS
Hg-SS
Mo-SS
Nd-SS
Ni-SS
Nb-SS
Os-SS
Pd-SS
P-SS
Pt-SS
K-SS
Pr-SS
Re-SS
Rh-SS
Ru-SS
Sm-SS
Se-SS
Se-SS
Si-S3
Ag-SS
Na-SS
Sr-SS
s-ss
Ta-SS
Te-SS
Tb-SS
Tl-SS
Th-SS
Tm-SS
Sn-SS
Ti-SS
UI-SS
u-ss
V-SS
Yb-SS
Y-SS
Zr>-SS
Zr-SS
Wavelength*
396. i3a
306.833
197. 197
313.0*2
S23.061
2<»9.773
393.366
M3.76S
203 . 332
238.892
333 . 1 70
3<»9.910
381.967
263. 113
2^2.763
277.336
32
279.333
237.610
19<».232
202.030
309.<4l8
231 .60
-------
EPA METHOD
NO. 350.2
D-343
-------
NITROGEN, AMMONIA
Method 350.2 (Colorimetric; Titrimetric; Potentiometric -
Distillation Procedure)
STORET NO. Total 00610
Dissolved 00608
1. Scope and Application
1.1 This distillation method covers the determination of ammonia-nitrogen exclusive of total
Kjeldahl nitrogen, in drinking, surface and saline waters, domestic and industrial wastes.
It is the method of choice where economics and sample load do not warrant the use of
automated equipment.
1.2 The method covers the range from about 0.05 to 1.0 mg NH3-N/1 for the colorimetric
procedure, from 1.0 to 25 mg/1 for the titrimetric procedure, and from 0.05 to 1400
mg/1 for the electrode method.
1.3 This method is described for macro glassware; however, micro distillation equipment
may also be used.
2. Summary of Method
2.1 The sample is buffered at a pH of 9.5 with a borate buffer in order to decrease hydrolysis
of cyanates and organic nitrogen compounds, and is then distilled into a solution of boric
acid. The ammonia in the distillate can be determined colorimethcally by nesslerization,
titrimetrically with standard sulfuric acid with the use of a mixed indicator, or
potentiometrically by the ammonia electrode. The choice between the first two
procedures depends on the concentration of the ammonia.
3. Sample Handling and Preservation
3.1 Samples may be preserved with 2 ml of cone. H2SO4 per liter and stored at 4*C.
4. Interferences
4.1 A number of aromatic and aliphatic amines, as well as other compounds, both organic
and inorganic, will cause turbidity upon the addition of Nessler reagent, so direct
nesslerization (i.e., without distillation), has been discarded as an official method.
4.2 Cyanate, which may be encountered in certain industrial effluents, will hydroiyze to
some extent even at the pH of 9.5 at which distillation is carried out. Volatile alkaline
compounds, such as certain ketones, aldehydes, and alcohols, may cause an off-color
upon nesslerization in the distillation method. Some of these, such as formaldehyde, may
be eliminated by boiling off at a low pH (approximately 2 to 3) prior, to distillation and
nesslerization.
4.3 Residual chlorine must also be removed by pretreatment of the sample with sodium
thiosulfate before distillation.
Approved fcr NPDES
Issued 1971
Editorial region 1974
D-344
-------
5. Apparatus
5.1 An all-glass distilling apparatus with an 800-1000 ml flask.
5.2 Spectrophotometer or filter photometer for use at 425 nm and providing a light path of 1
cm or more.
5.3 Nessler tubes: Matched Nessler tubes (APHA Standard) about 300 mm long, 17 mm
inside diameter, and marked at 225 mm ±1.5 mm inside measurement from bottom.
5.4 Erlenmeyer flasks: The distillate is collected in 500 ml glass-stoppered flasks. These
flasks should be marked at the 350 and the 500 ml volumes. With such marking, it is not
necessary to transfer the distillate to volumetric flasks.
6. Reagents
6.1 Distilled water should be free of ammonia. Such water is best prepared by passage
through an ion exchange column containing a strongly acidic cation exchange resin
mixed with a strongly basic anion exchange resin. Regeneration of the column should be
carried out according to the manufacturer's instructions.
NOTE 1: All solutions must be made with ammonia-free water.
6.2 Ammonium chloride, stock solution: 1.0 ml = 1.0 mg NH3-N. Dissolve 3.819 g NH4C1
in distilled water and bring to volume in a 1 liter volumetric flask.
6.3 Ammonium chloride, standard solution: 1.0 ml = 0.01 mg. Dilute 10.0 ml of stock
solution (6.2) to 1 liter in a volumetric flask.
6.4 Boric acid solution (20 g/1): Dissolve 20 g H3BO3 in distilled water and dilute to 1 liter.
6.5 Mixed indicator: Mix 2 volumes of 0.2% methyl red in 95% ethyl alcohol with 1 volume
of 0.2% methylene blue in 95% ethyl alcohol. This solution should be prepared fresh
every 30 days.
NOTE 2: Specially denatured ethyl alcohol conforming to Formula 3 A or 30 of the U.S.
Bureau of Internal Revenue may be substituted for 95% ethanol.
6.6 Nessler reagent: Dissolve 100 g of mercuric iodide and 70 g of potassium iodide in a small
amount of water. Add this mixture slowly, with stirring, to a cooled solution of 160 g of
NaOH in 500 ml of water. Dilute the mixture to 1 liter. If this reagent is stored in a Pyrex
bottle out of direct sunlight, it will remain stable for a period of up to 1 year.
NOTE 3: This reagent should give the characteristic color with ammonia within 10
minutes after addition, and should not produce a precipitate with small amounts of
ammonia (0.04 mg in a 50 ml volume).
6.7 Borate buffer: Add 88 ml of 0.1 N NaOH solution to 500 ml of 0.025 M sodium
tetraborate solution (5.0 g anhydrous Na2B4O7 or 9.5 g Na2BtO7»10H;,O per liter) and
dilute to 1 liter.
6.8 Sulfuric acid, standard solution: (0.02 N, 1 ml = 0.28 mg NH3-N). Prepare a stock
solution of approximately 0.1 N acid by diluting 3 ml of cone. H2SO4 (sp. gr. 1.84) to 1
liter with CO2-free distilled water. Dilute 200 ml of this solution to 1 liter with CO2-free
distilled water.
NOTE 4: An alternate and perhaps preferable method is to standardize the
approximately 0.1 N H,SO4 solution against a 0.100 N Na2CO3 solution. By proper
dilution the 0.02 N acid can then be prepared.
D-345
-------
6.8.1 Standardize the approximately 0.02 N acid against 0.0200 N Na:CO3 solution.
This last solution is prepared by dissolving 1.060 g anhydrous Na:CO3, oven-dried
at 140'C, and diluting to 1000 ml with CO:-free distilled water.
6.9 Sodium hydroxide, I N: Dissolve 40 g NaOH in ammonia-free water and dilute to 1 liter.
6.10 Dechlorinating reagents: A number of dechlorinating reagents may be used to remove
residual chlorine prior to distillation. These include:
a. Sodium thiosulfate (1/70 N): Dissolve 3.5 g Na,S,O3»5H:O in distilled water and
dilute to 1 liter. One ml of this solution will remove 1 mg/1 of residual chlorine in
500 ml of sample.
b. Sodium arsenite (1/70 N): Dissolve 1.0 g NaAsO: in distilled water and dilute to 1
liter.
7. Procedure
7.1 Preparation of equipment: Add 500 ml of distilled water to an 800 ml Kjeldahl flask. The
addition of boiling chips which have been previously treated with dilute NaOH will
prevent bumping. Steam out the distillation apparatus until the distillate shows no trace
of ammonia with Messier reagent.
7.2 Sample preparation: Remove the residual chlorine in the sample by adding
dechlorinating agent equivalent to the chlorine residual. To 400 ml of sample add 1 N
NaOH (6.9), until the pH is 9.5, checking the pH during addition with a pH meter or by
use of a short range pH paper.
7.3 Distillation: Transfer the sample, the pH of which has been adjusted to 9.5, to an 800 ml
Kjeldahl flask and add 25 ml of the borate buffer (6.7). Distill 300 ml at the rate of 6-10
ml/min. into 50 ml of 2% boric acid (6.4) contained in a 500 ml Erlenmeyer flask.
NOTE 5: The condenser tip or an extension of the condenser tip must extend below the
level of the boric acid solution.
Dilute the distillate to 500 ml with distilled water and nesslerize an aliquot to obtain an
approximate value of the ammonia-nitrogen concentration. For concentrations above 1
mg/1 the ammonia should be determined titrimetrically. For concentrations below this
value it is determined colorimetncally. The electrode method may also be used.
7.4 Determination of ammonia in distillate: Determine the ammonia content of the distillate
titrimetrically, colorimetrically or potentiometrically as described below.
7.4.1 Titrimetric determination: Add 3 drops of the mixed indicator to the distillate and
titrate the ammonia with the 0.02 N H:SO^ matching the end point against a blank
containing the same volume of distilled water and H,BO3 solution.
D-346
-------
7.4.2 Colorimetric determination: Prepare a series of Nessler tube standards as follows:
ml of Standard
1.0 mi = 0.01 mg NH3-N mg NH3-N/50.0 ml
0.0 0.0
0.5 0.005
1.0 0.01
2.0 0.02
3.0 0.03
4.0 0.04
5.0 0.05
8.0 0.08
10.0 0.10
Dilute each tube to 50 ml with distilled water, add 2.0 ml of Nessler reagent (6.6)
and mix. After 20 minutes read the absorbance at 425 nm against the blank. From
the values obtained plot absorbance vs. mg NH3-N for the standard curve.
Determine the ammonia in the distillate by nesslerizing 50 ml or an aliquot diluted
to 50 ml and reading the absorbance at 425 nm as described above for the
standards. Ammonia-nitrogen content is read from the standard curve.
7.4.3 Potentiometric determination: Consult the method entitled Nitrogen, Ammonia:
Selective Ion Electrode Method (Method 350.3) in this manual.
7.5 It is not imperative that all standards be distilled in the same manner as the samples. It is
recommended that at least two standards (a high and low) be distilled and compared to
similar values on the curve to insure that the distillation technique is reliable. If distilled
standards do not agree with undistilled standards the operator should find the cause of
the apparent error before proceeding.
8. Calculations
8.1 Titrimetric
,. KI1J v. A x 0.28 x 1.000
mg/1 NHi - N = s '
where:
A = ml0.02NH2SO4used.
S = ml sample.
8.2 Spectrophotometric
x
where:
A = mg NH3-N read from standard curve.
B = ml total distillate collected, including boric acid and dilution.
C = ml distillate taken for nesslerization.
D = ml of original sample taken.
D-347
-------
8.3 Potentiometric
9.
mg/l NH, - N = — x A
D
where:
A = mgNHj-N/l from electrode method standard curve.
D = ml of original sample taken.
Precision and Accuracy
9.1 Twenty-four analysts in sixteen laboratories analyzed natural water samples containing
exact increments of an ammonium salt, with the following results:
Increment as
Nitrogen, Ammonia
mg N/Uter
0.21
0.26
1.71
1.92
Precision as
Standard Deviation
mgN/liter
0.122
0.070
0.244
0.279
Accuracy as
Bias,
-5.54
-18.12
+0.46
-2.01
Bias,
mg N/liter
-0.01
-0.05
4-0.01
-0.04
(FWPCA Method Study 2, Nutrient Analyses)
Bibliography
1. Standard Methods for the Examination of Water and Wastewater, 14th Edition, p 410,
Method 418A and 41 SB (1975).
2. Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Part 31, "Water", Standard D1426-74, Method A, p 237
(1976).
D-348
-------
EPA METHOD
NO. 350.3
D-349
-------
NITROGEN, AMMONIA
Method 350.3 (Potentiometric, Ion Selective Electrode)
STORET NO. Total 00610
Dissolved 00608
1. Scope and Application
1.1 This method is applicable to the measurement of ammonia-nitrogen in drinking, surface
and saline waters, domestic and industrial wastes.
1.2 This method covers the range from 0.03 to 1400 mg NH3-N/1. Color and turbidity have
no effect on the measurements, thus, distillation may not be necessary.
2. S ummary of Method
2.1 The ammonia is determined potentiometrically using an ion selective ammonia electrode
and a pH meter having an expanded millivolt scale or a specific ion meter.
2.2 The ammonia electrode uses a hydrophobic gas-permeable membrane to separate the
sample solution from an ammonium chloride internal solution. Ammonia in the sample
diffuses through the membrane and alters the pH of the internal solution, which is sensed
by a pH electrode. The constant level of chloride in the internal solution is sensed by a
chloride selective ion electrode which acts as the reference electrode.
3. Sample Handling and Preservation
3.1 Samples may be preserved with 2 ml of cone. HjSO4 per liter and stored at 4°C.
4. Interferences
4.1 Volatile amines act as a positive interference.
4.2 Mercury interferes by forming a strong complex with ammonia. Thus the samples cannot
be preserved with mercuric chloride.
5. Apparatus
5.1 Electrometer (pH meter) with expanded m V scale or a specific ion meter.
5.2 Ammonia selective electrode, such as Orion Model 95-10 or EIL Model 8002-2.
5.3 Magnetic stirrer, thermally insulated, and Teflon-coated stirring bar.
6. Reagents
6.1 Distilled water: Special precautions must be taken to insure that the distilled water is free
of ammonia. This is accomplished by passing distilled water through an ion exchange
column containing a strongly acidic cation exchange resin mixed with a strongly basic
anion exchange resin.
6.2 Sodium hydroxide, ION: Dissolve 400 g of sodium hydroxide in 800 ml of distilled water.
Cool and dilute to 1 liter with distilled water (6.1).
6.3 Ammonium chloride, stock solution: 1.0 ml = 1.0 mg NH3-N. Dissolve 3.819 g NH4C1
in water and bring to volume in a 1 liter volumetric flask using distilled water (6.1).
Issued 1974
D-350
-------
6.4 Ammonium chloride, standard solution: 1.0 ml = 0.01 mg NH3-N. Dilute 10.0 ml of the
stock solution (6.3) to 1 liter with distilled water (6.1) in a volumetric flask.
NOTE 1: When analyzing saline waters, standards must be made up in synthetic ocean
water (SOW); found in Nitrogen, Ammonia: Colorimetric, Automated Phenate Method
(350.1).
7. Procedure
7.1 Preparation of standards: Prepare a series of standard solutions covering the
concentration range of the samples by diluting either the stock or standard solutions of
ammonium chloride.
7.2 Calibration of electrometer: Place 100 ml of each standard solution in clean 150 ml
beakers. Immerse electrode into standard of lowest concentration and add 1 ml of ION
sodium hydroxide solution while mixing. Keep electrode in the solution until a stable
reading is obtained.
NOTE 2: The pH of the solution after the addition of NaOH must be above 11.
Caution: Sodium hydroxide must not be added prior to electrode immersion, for
ammonia may be lost from a basic solution.
7.3 Repeat this procedure with the remaining standards, going from lowest to highest
concentration. Using semilogarithmic graph paper, plot the concentration of ammonia in
mg NH3-N/1 on the log axis vs. the electrode potential developed in the standard on the
linear axis, starting with the lowest concentration at the bottom of the scale.
7.4 Calibration of a specific ion meter: Follow the directions of the manufacturer for the
operation of the instrument.
7.5 Sample measurement: Follow the procedure in (7.2) for 100 ml of sample in 150 ml
beakers. Record the stabilized potential of each unknown sample and convert the
potential reading to the ammonia concentration using the standard curve. If a specific
ion meter is used, read the ammonia level directly in mg NH3-N/1.
8. Precision and Accuracy
8.1 In a single laboratory (EMSL), using surface water samples at concentrations of 1.00,
0.77, 0.19, and 0.13 mg NH3-N/1, standard deviations were ±0.038, ±0.017, ±0.007,
and ±0.003, respectively.
8.2 In a single laboratory (EMSL), using surface water samples at concentrations of 0.19 and
0.13 mg NH3-N/1, recoveries were 96% and 91 %, respectively.
Bibliography
1. Booth, R. L., and Thomas, R. P., "Selective Electrode Determination of Ammonia in Water
and Wastes", Envir. Sci. Technology, 7, p 523-526 (1973).
2. Banwart, W. L., Bremner, J. M., and Tabatabai, M. A., "Determination of Ammonium in Soil
Extracts and Water Samples by an Ammonia Electrode", Comm. Soil Sci. Plant.,3,p 449
(1952).
3. Midgley, D., and Torrance, K., "The Determination of Ammonia in Condensed Steam and
Boiler Feed-Water with a Potentiometric Ammonia Probe", Analyst. 97 p 626-633 (1972).
D-351
-------
D-352
-------
EPA METHOD
NO. 405.1
D-353
-------
BIOCHEMICAL OXYGEN DEMAND
Method 405.1 (5 Days, 20°O
STORET NO. 00310
Carbonaceous 80082
1. Scope and Application
1.1 The biochemical oxygen demand (BOD) test is used for determining the relative oxygen
requirements of municipal and industrial wastewaters. Application of the test to organic
waste discharges allows calculation of the effect of the discharges, on the oxygen
resources of the receiving water. Data from BOD tests are used for the development of
engineering criteria for the design of wastewater treatment plants.
1.2 The BOD test is an empirical bioassay-type procedure which measures the dissolved
oxygen consumed by microbial life while assimilating and oxidizing the organic matter
present. The standard test conditions include dark incubation at 20'C for a specified time
period (often 5 days). The actual environmental conditions of temperature, biological
population, water movement, sunlight, and oxygen concentration cannot be accurately
reproduced in the laboratory. Results obtained must take into account the above factors
when relating BOD results to stream oxygen demands.
2. Summary of Method
2.1 The sample of waste, or an appropriate dilution, is incubated for 5 days at 20°C in the
dark. The reduction in dissolved oxygen concentration during the incubation period
yields a measure of the biochemical oxygen demand.
3. Comments
3.1 Determination of dissolved oxygen in the BOD test may be made by use of either the
Modified Winkler with Full-Bottle Technique or the Probe Method in this manual.
3.2 Additional information relating to oxygen demanding characteristics of wastewaters can
be gained by applying the Total Organic Carbon and Chemical Oxygen Demand tests
(also found in this manual).
3.3 The use of 60 ml incubation bottles in place of the usual 300 mi incubation bottles, in
conjunction with the probe, is often convenient.
4. Precision and Accuracy
4.1 Eighty-six analysts in fifty-eight laboratories analyzed natural water samples plus an
exact increment of biodegradable organic compounds. At a mean value of 2.1 and 175
mg/1 BOD, the standard deviation was tO.7 and -26 mg/1. respectively (EPA Method
Research Study 3).
4.2 There is no acceptable procedure for determining the accuracy of the BOD test.
Appmvrd fm NPDKS C.HOO: pending .ippioval loi SCMIOII il)l(li). (A\ A
Issued 1971
Editorial revision 1974
D-354
-------
5. References
5.1 The procedure to be used for this determination is found in: /
Standard Methods for the Examination of Water and Wastewater, 15th
Edition, p. 483, Method 507 (1980).
5.2 Young, J. C., "Chemical Methods for Nitrification Control," J. Water
Poll. Control Fed., 45, p. 637 (1973).
D-355
-------
D-356
-------
EPA METHOD
NO. 300
D-357
-------
United States
Environmental Protection
Agency
Environmental Monitoring and
Support Laboratory
Cincinnati OH 45268
Research and Development
EPA-600/ 4-84-017 Mar. 1984
vvEPA
Test Method
The Determination of
Inorganic Anions in
Water by Ion Chromatography
Method 300.0
James W. O'Oell. John 0. Pfaff. Morris E. Gales, and Gerald 0. McKee
1. Scope and Application
1.1 This method covers the
determination of the following
inorganic anions.
Analvte
Chloride
Fluoride
Nitrate-N
Nitrtte-N
Ortho-Phosphate-P
Sulfate
Storet No.
Total Dissolved
00940 —
00951 00950
00620 —
00615 —
— 00671
00945 —
1.2 This is an ion chromatographic
(1C) method applicable to the
determination of the anions listed
above in drinking water, surface
water, and mixed domestic and
industrial wastewater.
1.3 The Method Detection Umit
(MOL defined m Section 13) for the
above analytes is listed in Table 1.
The MDL for a specific matrix may
differ from those listed, depending
upon the nature of the sample.
1.4 This method is restricted to use
by or under the supervision of
analysts experienced in the use of ion
Chromatography and in the
mtrepretation of the resulting ion
chromatogram. Each analyst must
demonstrate the ability to generate
acceptable results with this method.
using the procedure described in
Section 10.2.
1.5 When this method is used to
analyze unfamiliar samples for any of
the above anions. anion identification
should be supported by the addition
of spike solutions covering the anions
of interest. The spike procedure is
described in Section 11.6.
— 2. Summary of Method
2.1 A small volume of sample.
typically 2 to 3 mL. is introduced into
an ion chromatograph. The anions of
interest are separated and measured.
using a system comprised of a guard
.column, separator column, suppressor
column, and conductivity detector.
3. Definitions
3.1 Stock standard solution — a
concentrated solution containing a
certified standard that is a method
analyte. Stock standard solutions are
used to prepare secondary standard
solutions.
3.2 Calibration standards — a
solution of analytes prepared in the
laboratory from stock standard
solutions and diluted as needed to
prepare aqueous calibration solutions.
3.3 Quality control check sample —
a solution containing known
concentrations of analytes. prepared
by a laboratory other than the
laboratory performing the analysis.
The analyzing laboratory uses this
solution to demonstrate that it can
D-358
an J384
-------
obtain acceptable identifications and
measurements with a method.
3.4 Performance evaluation sample
— a solution of method analytes
distributed by the Quality Assurance
Branch (QAB). Environmental
Monitoring and Support Laboratory
(EMSL-Cincmnati). USEPA, Cincinnati.
Ohio, to multiple laboratories for
analysis. A volume of the solution is
added to a known volume of reagent
water and analyzed with procedures
used for samples. Results of analyses
are used by the QAB to determine
statistically the accuracy and precision
that can be expected when a method
is performed by a competent analyst.
Analyte true values are unknown to
the analyst.
3.5 Laboratory control standards —
a solution of analytes prepared in the
laboratory by adding appropriate
volumes of the stock standard
solutions to reagent water.
3.6 Laboratory duplicates — two
aliquots of the same sample that are
treated exactly the same throughout
laboratory analytical procedures.
Analyses of laboratory duplicates
indicate precision associated with
laboratory procedures but not the
sample collection, preservation, or
storage procedures.
3.7 Field duplicates — two samples
taken at the same time and place
under identical circumstances and
treated exactly the same throughout
field and laboratory procedures.
Analyses of field duplicates indicate the
precision associated with sample
collection, preservation and storage,
as well as with laboratory procedures.
4. Interferences
4.1 Interferences can be caused by
substances with retention times that
are similar to and overlap those of the
anion of interest. Large amounts of an
an ion can interfere with the peak
resolution of an adjacent anion.
Sample dilution and/or spiking can be
used to solve most interference
problems.
4.2 The water dip or negative peak
that elutes near and can interfere
with the fluoride peak can be
eliminated by the addition of the
equivalent of 1 mL of concentrated
eluent (7.3 100X) to 100 mL of each
standard and sample.
4.3 Method interferences may be
caused by contaminants in the
reagent water, reagents, glassware,
and other sample processing
apparatus that lead to discrete
artifacts or elevated baseline in ion
chromatograms.
4.4 Samples that contain particles
larger than 0.45 microns and reagent
solutions that contain particles larger
than 0.20 microns require filtration to
prevent damage to instrument
columns and flow systems.
5. Safety
5.1 Normal, accepted laboratory
safety practices should be followed
during reagent preparation and
instrument operation. No known
carcinogenic materials are used in
this method.
6. Apparatus and Materials
6.1 Balance — Analytical, capable of
accurately weighing to the nearest
0.0001 g.
6.2 Ion chromatograph — Analytical
system complete with ion
chromatograph and all required
accessories including syringes,
analytical columns, compressed air,
detector, and stripchart recorder. A
data system is recommended for peak
integration.
6.2.1 Anion guard column: 4 x 50
mm. Dionex P/N 030825. or
equivalent.
6.2.2 Anion separator column: 4 x
250 mm, Dionex P/N 030827, or
equivalent.
6.2.3 Anion suppressor column:
fiber, Dionex P/N 35350. or
equivalent
6.2.4 Detector — Conductivity cell:
approximately 6 i/L volume, Dionex, or
equivalent.
7. Reagents and
Consumable Materials
7.1 Sample bottles: Glass or
polyethylene of sufficient volume to
allow replicate analyses of anions of
interest.
7.2 Reagent water: Distilled or
deionized water, free of the anions of
interest. Water should contain
particles no larger than 0.20 microns.
7.3 Eluent solution: Sodium
bicarbonate (CAS RN 144-55-8) 0.003
M, sodium carbonate (CAS RN 497-
19-8)0.0024M. Dissolve 1.0081 g
sodium bicarbonate (NaHCOs) and
1.0176 g of sodium carbonate
(NajCOj) in reagent water and dilute
to 4 liters.
7.4 Regeneration solution (fiber
suppressor): Sulfunc acid (CAS RN
7664-93-9) 0.025N. Dilute 2.8 mL
cone, sulfuric acid (HgSO*) to 4 liters
with reagent water.
7.5 Stock standard solutions, 1000
mg/L(1 mg/mL): Stock standard
solutions may be purchased as
certified solutions or prepared from
ACS reagent grade materials (dried
at 105°C for 30 mm.) as listed below.
7.5.1 Chloride (CL1 1000 mg/L
Dissolve 1.6485 g sodium chloride
(NaCL CAS RN 7647-14-5) in reagent
water and dilute to 1 liter.
7.5.2 Fluoride (f~] 1000 mg/L:
Dissolve 2.2100 g sodium fluoride
(NaF, CAS RN 7681 -49-4) in reagent
water and dilute to 1 liter.
7.5.3 Nitrate (NdJ-N) 1000 mg/L:
Dissolve 6.0679 g sodium nitrate
(NaNOs, CAS RN 7631-99-4) in
reagent water and dilute to 1 liter.
7.5.4 Nitrite (NO*-N) 1000 mg/L
Dissolve 4.9257 g sodium nitrite
(NaNOi CAS RN 7632-00-0) in
reagent water and dilute to 1 liter.
7.5.5 Phosphate (POl-P) 1000 mg/L
Dissolve 4.3937 g potassium
phosphate (KH2PO4. CAS RN 7778-77-
0) in reagent water and dilute to 1
liter.
7.5.5 Sulfate (SOT) 1000 mg/L
Dissolve 1.8141 g potassium sulfate
(KjSCu. CAS RN 7778-80-5) in
reagent water and dilute to 1 liter.
7.5.7 Stability of standards: Stock
standards (7.5) are stable for at least
one month when stored at 4°C. Dilute
working standards should be prepared
weekly, except those that contain
nitrite and phosphate should be~
prepared fresh daily.
8. Sample Collection,
Preservation and Storage
8.1 Samples should be collected in
scrupulously clean glass or
polyethylene bottles.
8.2 Sample preservation and holding
times for the anions that can be
determined by this method are as
follows:
noiumy
Analyte Preservation Time
Chloride None required 28 days
Fluoride None required 28 days
Nitrate-N Cool to 4°C 48 hours
Nitrite-N Cool to 4°C 48 hours
O-Phosphate-P Filter and cool 48 hours
to4°C
Sulfate
Cool to 4°C 28 days
Jtn. 1984
D-359
-------
8.3 The method of preservation and
the holding time for samples analyzed
by this method are determined by the
anions of interest. In a given sample.
the anion that requires the most
preservation treatment and the
shortest holding time will determine
the preservation treatment and
holding time for the total sample.
9. Calibration and
Standardization
9.1 Establish ion chromatographic
operating parameters equivalent to
those indicated in Table 1.
9.2 For each analyte of interest.
prepare calibration standards at a
minimum of three concentration
levels and a blank by adding
accurately measured volumes of one
or more stock standards (7.5) to a
volumetric flask and diluting to
volume with reagent water. If the
working range exceeds the linear
range of the system, a sufficient
number of standards must be
analyzed to allow an accurate
calibration curve to be established.
One of the standards should be
representative of a concentration
near, but above, the method detection
limit if the system is operated on an
applicable attenuator range. The other
standards should correspond to the
range of concentrations expected in
the sample or should define the
working range of the detector. Unless
the attenuator range settings are
proven to be linear, each setting must
be calibrated individually.
9.3 Using injections of 0.1 to 1.0 mL
(determined by infection loop volume)
of each calibration standard, tabulate
peak height or area responses against
the concentration. The results are
used to prepare a calibration curve for
each analyte. During this procedure.
retention times must be recorded. The
retention time is inversely
proportional to the concentration.
9.4 The working calibration curve
must be verified on each working day,
or whenever the anion eluent is
changed, and after every 20 samples.
If the response or retention time for
any analyte vanes from the expected
values by more than = 10%. the test
must be repeated, using fresh
calibration standards. If the results
are still more than r 10%. an entire
new calibration curve must be
prepared for that analyte.
9.5 Nonlinear response can result
when the separator column capacity
is exceeded (overloading). Maximum
column loading (all anions) should not
exceed about 400 ppm.
10. Quality Control
10.1 Each laboratory using this
method should have a formal quality
control program. The minimum
requirements of this program consist
of an initial demonstration of
laboratory capability (10.2) and the
analysis of spiked samples as a
continuing check on performance. The
laboratory should maintain
performance records to define the
quality of data that are generated.
10.1.1 In recognition of the rapid
advances occurring in
chromatography. the analyst is
permitted certain options to improve
the separations or lower the cost of
measurements. Each time such
modifications to the method are made,
the analyst is required to repeat the
procedure in Section 10.2
10.1.2 The laboratory should spike
and analyze a minimum of 10% of all
samples to monitor continuing
laboratory performance. Field and
laboratory duplicates should also be
analyzed.
10.2 Before performing any
analyses, the analyst should
demonstrate the ability to generate
acceptable accuracy and precision
with this method, using a laboratory
control standard.
10.2.1 Select a representative
spike concentration for each analyte
to be measured. Using stock
standards, prepare a quality control
check sample concentrate in reagent
water 100 nmes more concentrated
than the selected concentrations.
10.2.2 Using a pipet. add 1.00 mL
of the check sample concentrate
(10.2.1) to each of a minimum of four
100-mL aliquots of reagent water.
Analyze the aliquots according to the
procedure in Section 11.
10.2.3 Calculate the average
percent recovery (R), and the standard
deviation^) of the percent recovery, for
the results.
10.2.4 Using the appropriate data
from Table 2. determine the recovery
and single operator precision expected
for the method, and compare these
results to the values calculated in
Section 10.2.3. If the data are not
comparable within control limits
(10.3.1). review potential problem
areas and repeat the test.
10.3 The analyst must calculate
method performance criteria and
define the performance of the
laboratory for aach spike
concentration of analyte being
measured.
10-3.1 Calculate upper and lower
control limits for method performance
as follows:
Upper Control Limit (UCL) = R + 3 s
Lower Control Limit (LCD - R - 3 s
where R and s are calculated as in
Section 10.2.3. The UCL and LCL can
be used to construct control Chans
that are useful in observing trends in
performance.
10.4 The laboratory should develop
and maintain separate accuracy
statements of laboratory performance
for water and wastewater samples.
An accuracy statement for the method
is defined as R ± s. The accuracy
statement should be developed by the
analyses of four aliquots of water or
wastewater. as described in Section
10.2.2. followed by the calculation of
R and s.
10.5 Sefore processing any
samples, the analyst must
demonstrate through the analysis of
an aliquot of reagent water that all
glassware and reagent interferences
are under control. Each time there is
a change in reagents, a laboratory
reagent blank must be processed as a
safeguard against laboratory
contamination.
10.6 It is recommended that the
laboratory adopt additional quality
assurance practices for use with this
method. The specific practices that
are most productive depend upon the
needs of the laboratory andnhe nature
of the samples. Field duplicates may
be analyzed to monitor the precision
of the sampling technique. When
doubt exists over the identification of
a peak in the chromatogram,
confirmatory techniques such as
sample dilution and spiking, must be
used. Whenever possible, the
laboratory should perform analysis of
quality control check samples and
participate in relevant performance
evaluation sample studies.
11. Procedure
11.1 Table 1 summarizes the
recommended operating conditions for
the ion chromatograph. Included m
this table are estimated retention
times that can be achieved by this
method. Other columns.
chromatographic conditions, or
D-360
Jan.
-------
detectors may be used if the
requirements of Section 10.2 are met.
11.2 Check system calibration daily
and, if required, recalibrate as
described in Section 9.
11.3 Load and inject a fixed amount
of well mixed sample. Flush injection
loop thoroughly, using each new
sample. Use the same size loop for
standards and samples. Record the
resulting peak size in area or peak
height units. An automated constant
volume injection system may also be
used.
11.4 The width of the retention time
window used to make identifications
should be based upon measurements
of actual retention time variations of
standards over the course of a day.
Three times the standard deviation of
a retention time can be used to
calculate a suggested window size for
a compound. However, the experience
of the analyst should weigh heavily in
the interpretation of chromatograms.
11.5 If the response for the peak
exceeds the working range of the
system, dilute the sample with an
• appropriate amount of reagent water
and reanalyze.
11.6 If the resulting chromatogram
fails to produce adequate resolution.
or if identification of specific anions is
questionable, spike the sample with
an appropriate amount of standard
and reanalyze.
Note: Retention time is inversely
proportional to concentration. Nitrate
and sulfate exhibit the greatest
amount of change, although all anions
are affected to some degree. In some
cases, this peak migration can
produce poor resolution or
misidentification.
12. Calculation
12.1 Prepare separate calibration
curves for each anion of interest by
plotting peak size in area, or peak
height units of standards against
concentration values. Compute
sample concentration by comparing
sample peak response with the
standard curve.
12.2 Report results in mg/L
zero. The MDL concentrations listed m
Table 1 were obtained using reagent
water.
13.2 Single-operator accuracy and
precision for reagent, drinking and
surface water, and mixed domestic
and industrial wastewater are listed in
Table 2.
14. References
14.1 An nual Book of ASTM
Standards. Part 31 Water, proposed
test method for "Anions in Water by
Ion Chromatography." p. 1485-1492
(1982).
14.2 Standard Methods for the
Examination of Water and
Wastewater, Method 400Z. "Anions
by Ion Chromatography" proposed for
the 16th Edition of Standard Methods.
14.3 Dionex, 1C 16 operation and
maintenance manual. PN 30579,
Oionex Corp., Sunnyvale, California
94086.
14.4 Method detection limit (MOD
as described in 'Trace Analyses for
Wastewater." J. Glaser. 0. Foerst.
G. McKee. S. Quave. W. Budde.
Environmental Science and
Technology. Vol. 15, Number 12, p.
1426, December 1981.
13. Precision and Accuracy
— Method Detection Limit
13.1 The method detection limit
(MOD is defined as the minimum
concentration of a substance that can
be measured and reported with 99%
confidence that the value is above
J»n. 1384
D-361
-------
Table I. Chramatographic Conditions and Method Detection Limits in Reagent
Water
Retention' Relative Method1
Time Retention Detection Limit
Analyte (Mint Time mg/L
Fluoride
Chloride
Nitrite-N
0-Phosphate-P
Nitrate-N
Sulfate
1.2
3.4
4.5
3.0
11.3
21.4
1.0
2.8
3.8
7.5
9.4
17.8
0.005
0.015
0.004
0.061
0.013
0.206
Sample Loop — 10O (iL
Pump Volume — 2.30 mL/Min
Standard Conditions:
Columns — 4s specified in 6.2
Detector — As specified in 6.2
Sluent — As specified in 7.3
1 Concentrations of mixed standard fmg/U
Fluoride 3.0 0-Phosphate-P 9.0
Chloride 4.0 Nitrate-N 30.0
Nitrite-N 10.0 Sulfate 50.0
*• MDL calculated from data obtained using an attenuator setting of 1 itMHO full
scale. Other settings would produce an MDL proportional to their value.
Table 2. Single-Operator Accuracy and Precision
Number
Sample Spike of
Anelvte Type fmg/LJ Replicates
Chloride
Fluoride
Nitrate-N
Nitrite-N
0-Phosphate-P
Sulfate
RW
ow .
sw
ww
RW
OW
SW
ww
RW
DW
SW
WW
RW
DW
SW
WW
RW
DW
SW
ww
RW
DW
SW
ww
0.050
10.0
1.0
7.5
0.24
9.3
0.50
1.0
0.10
31.0
0.50
4.0
0.10
19.6
0.51
0.52
0.50
46.7
0.51
4.0
1.02
98.5
10.0
12.5
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
Mean
Recovery
%
97.7
98.2
10S.O
82.7
103.1 -
87.7
74.0
920
100.9
100,7
100.0
94.3
97.7
103.3
88.2
10O.O
100.4
102.5
94.1
97.3
102.1
104.3
111.6
134.9
Standard
Deviation
(mo/Li
0.0047
0.289
0.139
0.445
0.0009
0.075
0.0038
0.011
0.0041
0.356
0.0058
0.058
0.0014
0.1 SO
0.0053
0.018
0.019
0.386
0.020
0.04
0.066
1.475
0.709
0.466
RW = Reagent Water
DW * Drinking Water
SW = Surface Water
WW - Wastawater
D-362
J»n. 198'-
TBCPO: 1984-759-102-862
-------
FREE CHLORINE
(FIELD DETERMINATION)
D-363
-------
FREE CHLORINE
Liquid samples were tested in the field for free chlorine content orior
to the addition of any preservatives. This was done to determine whether A
VOfl vial preserved with sodium thiosulfate was necessary. Free chlorine
tests were conducted using a chlorine test kit made by Coastal Chemical
Cornoany. The kit is equiped with a cell in which to place the test sample,
a color chart to compare the sample with, and a small bottle of orthotoli-
dine. The color chart ranges from pale yellow (0.2 ppm chlorine) to bright
yellow (1.0 ppm chlorine). The chart measures color changes corresponding
to quantities of 0.2, 8.4, 0.6, 0.8, and 1.0 ppm chlorine. Intermediate
chlorine levels can be estimated.
To test for free chlorine, liquid is placed in the test cell up to a
measured limit. Four drops of orthotolidine are added and the cell con-
tents are mixed. Any color change is compared to the color chart.
D-364
-------
EPA METHOD
NO. 410.4M
D-365
-------
CHEMICAL OXYGEN DEMAND
Method 410.4 (Colorimetric, Automated; Manual)
STORET NO. 00340
1. Scope and Application
1.1 This method covers the determination of COD in surface waters, domestic and industrial
wastes.
1.2 The applicable range of the automated method is 3-900 mg/1 and the range of the
manual method is 20 to 900 mg/1.
2. Summary of Method
2.1 Sample, blanks and standards in sealed tubes are heated in an oven or block digester in
the presence of dichromate at 15CTC. After two hours, the tubes are removed from the
oven or digester, cooled and measured spectrophotometrically at 600 nm.
3. Sample Handling and Preservation
3.1 Collect the samples in glass bottles if possible. Use of plastic containers is permissible if it
is known that no organic contaminants are present in the containers.
3.2 Samples should be preserved with sulfuric acid to a pH < 2 and maintained at 4*C until
analysis.
4. Interferences
4.1 Chlorides are quantitatively oxidized by dichromate and represent a positive
interference. Mercuric sulfate is added to the digestion tubes to complex the chlorides.
5. Apparatus
5.1 Drying oven or block digestor, 150"C
5.2 Corning culture tubes, 16 x 100 mm or 25 x 150 mm with Teflon lined screw cap
5.3 Spectrophotometer or Technicon AutoAnalyzer
5.4 Muffle furnace, SOOTC.
6. Reagents
6.1 Digestion solution: Add 10.2 g K2Cr2O7, 167 ml cone. H2SO4 and 33.3 g HgSO4 to 500 ml
of distilled water, cool and dilute to 1 liter.
6.2 Catalyst solution: Add 22 g Ag2SO4 to a 4.09kg bottle of cone. H7SO4. Stir until
dissolved.
6.3 Sampler wash solution: Add 500 ml of cone H7SOt to 500 ml of distilled water.
6.4 Stock potassium acid phthalate: Dissolve 0.850 g in 800 ml of distilled water and dilute to
1 liter. 1ml = ImgCOD
6.4.1 Prepare a series of standard solutions that cover the expected sample
concentrations by diluting appropriate volumes of the stock standard.
7. Procedure
7.1 Wash all culture tubes and screw caps with 20% H2SO4 before their first use to prevent
contamination. Trace contamination may be removed from the tubes by igniting them in
a muffle oven at 500*C for 1 hour.
Issued 1978
D-366
-------
7.2 Automated
7.2.1 Add 2.5 ml of sample to the 16 x 100 mm tubes.
7.2.2 Add 1.5 ml of digestion solution (6.1) and mix.
7.2.3 Add 3.5 ml of catalyst solution (6.2) carefully down the side of the culture tube.
7.2.4 Cap tightly and shake to mix layers.
7.2.5 Process standards and blanks exactly as the samples.
7.2.6 Place in oven or block digestor at 150°C for two hours.
7.2.7 Cool, and place standards in sampler in order of decreasing concentration.
Complete filling sampler tray with unknown samples.
7.2.8 Measure color intensity on Auto Analyzer at 600 nm.
7.3 Manual
7.3.1 The following procedure may be used if a larger sample is desired or a
spectrophotometer is used in place of an Auto Analyzer.
7.3.2 Add 10 ml of sample to 25 x 150 mm culture tube.
7.3.3 Add 6 ml of digestion solution (6.1) and mix.
7.3.4 Add 14 ml of catalyst solution (6.2) down the side of culture tube.
7.3.5 Cap tightly and shake to mix layers.
7.3.6 Place in oven or block digestor at 150°C for 2 hours.
7.3.7 Cool, allow any precipitate to settle and measure intensity in spectrophotometer at
600 nm. Use only optically matched culture tubes or a single cell for spectro-
photometric measurement.
8. Calculation
8.1 Prepare a standard curve by plotting peak height or percent transmittance against known
concentrations of standards.
8.2 Compute concentration of samples by comparing sample response to standard curve.
9. Precision and Accuracy
9.1 Precision and accuracy data are not available at this time.
Bibliography
1. Jirka, A. M., and M. J. Carter, "Micro-Semi-Automated Analysis of Surface and Wastewaters
for Chemical Oxygen Demand." Anal. Chem. ^7:1397. (1975).
D-367
-------
D-368
-------
EPA METHOD
NO. 335.2
D-369
-------
CYANIDE, TOTAL
Method 335.2 (Titrimetric; Spectrophotometric)
STORET NO. 00720
1. Scope and Application
1.1 This method is applicable to the determination of cyanide in drinking, surface and saline
waters, domestic and industrial wastes.
1.2 The titration procedure using silver nitrate with p-dimethylamino-benzal-rhodanine
indicator is used for measuring concentrations of cyanide exceeding I mg/1 (0.25
mg/250 ml of absorbing liquid).
1.3 The colorimetric procedure is used for concentrations below 1 mg/1 of cyanide and is
sensitive to about 0.02 mg/1.
2. Summary of Method
2.1 The cyanide as hydrocyanic acid (HCN) is released from cyanide complexes by means of
a reflux-distillation operation and absorbed in a scrubber containing sodium hydroxide
solution. The cyanide ion in the absorbing solution is then determined by volumetric
titration or colorimetrically.
2.2 In the colorimetric measurement the cyanide is converted to cyanogen chloride, CNC1.
by reaction with chloramme-T at a pH less than 8 without hydrolyzing to the cyanate.
After the reaction is complete, color is formed on the addition of pyridine-pyrazolone or
pyndine-barbituric acid reagent. The absorbance is read at 620 nm when using pyndine-
pyrazolone or 378 nm for pyridine-barbitune acid. To obtain colors of comparable
intensity, it is essential to have the same salt content in both the sample and the
standards.
2.3 The titrimetrie measurement uses a standard solution of silver nitrate to titrate cyanide in
the presence of a silver sensitive indicator.
3. Definitions
3.1 Cyanide is defined as cyanide ion and complex cyanides converted to hydrocyanic acid
(HCN) by reaction in a reflux system of a mineral acid in the presence of magnesium ion.
4. Sample Handling and Preservation
4.1 The sample should be collected in plastic or glass bottles of 1 liter or larger size. All
bottles must be thoroughly cleansed and thoroughly rinsed to remove soluble material
from containers.
4.2 Oxidizing agents such as chlorine decompose most of the cyanides. Test a drop of the
sample with potassium iodide-starch test paper (Kl-starch paper); a blue color indicates
the need for treatment. Add ascorbic acid, a few crystals at a time, until a drop of sample
produces no color on the indicator paper. Then add an additional 0.06 g ol .i
,K id lor each liter of sample volume.
Approved for NPDES
Issued 1974
Editorial revision 1974 and 1978
Technical Revision 1980
D-370
-------
4.3 Samples must be preserved with 2 ml of 10 N sodium hydroxide per liter of sample
(pH > 12) at the time of collection.
4.4 Samples should be analyzed as rapidly as possible after collection. If storage is required,
the samples should be stored in a refrigerator or in an ice chest filled with water and ice to
maintain temperature at 4°C.
5. Interferences
5.1 Interferences are eliminated or reduced by using the distillation procedure described
in Procedure 8.1, 8.2 and 8.3.
5.2 Su If ides adversely affect the colorimetric and titration procedures. Samples thai
contain hydrogen sulfide, metal sulfides or other compounds that may pioduce
hydrogen sulfide during the distillation should be distilled by the optional procedure
described in Procedure 8.2. The apparatus for this procedure is shown in Figure 3.
5.3 Fatty acids will distill and form soaps under the alkaline titration conditions, making the
end point almost impossible to detect.
5.3.1 Acidify the sample with acetic acid (1+9) to pH 6.0 to 7.0.
Caution: This operation must be performed in the hood and the sample left there
until it can be made alkaline again after the extraction has been performed.
5.3.2 Extract with iso-octane, hexane, or chloroform (preference in order named) with a
solvent volume equal to 20% of the sample volume. One extraction is usually
adequate to reduce the fatty acids below the interference level. Avoid multiple
extractions or a long contact time at low pH in order to keep the loss of HCN at a
minimum. When the extraction is completed, immediately raise the pH of the
sample to above 12 with NaOH solution.
5.4 High results may be obtained for samples that contain nitrate and/or nitrite. During
the distillation nitrate and nitrite will form nitrous acid which will react with some
organic compounds to form oximes. These compounds formed will decompose under
test conditions to generate HCN. The interference of nitrate and nitrite is eliminated
by pretreatment with sulfamic acid.
6. Apparatus
6.1 Reflux distillation apparatus such as shown in Figure 1 or Figure 2. The boiling P.ask
should be of 1 liter size with inlet tube and provision for condenser. The gas absorber may
be a Fisher-Milligan scrubber.
6.2 Microburet, 5.0 ml (for titration).
6.3 Spectrophotometer suitable for measurements at 578 nm or 620 nm with a 1.0 cm cell or
larger.
(i. 1 Reflux distillation apparatus for sulfide removal a.s shown in Figuif .1 The boiling
I task same as (i.l. The suit idesnuhbei may be a Wheaton Rubber *709ti82 with 29 11'
joints, sue 100 ml. The air inlet tube should not IK- fritted. The cyanide absoipumi
vessel should be the same as the sulfide scrubber. The air inlet tube should \H- li itted.
f> "> Flow meter, such as Lab Crest with stainless steel flout (Fisher 1l-164-.">(».
7. Reagents
7.1 Sodium hydroxide solution, 1.25N: Dissolve 50 g of NaOH in distilled water, and dilute
to 1 liter with distilled water.
D-371
-------
7.2 Lead acetate: Dissolve 30 g of Pb(C2H3O2)«3H2O in 950 ml of distilled water. Adjust
the pH to 4.5 with acetic acid. Dilute to 1 liter.
7.5 Sulfuric acid; 18N: Slowly add 500 ml of concentrated HaSO4 to 500 rnl of distilled
water.
7.6 Sodium dihydrogenphosphate, 1 M: Dissolve 138 g of NaH2PO4«H2O in 1 liter of
distilled water. Refrigerate this solution.
7.7 Stock cyanide solution: Dissolve 2.51 g of KCN and 2 g KOH in 900 ml of distilled
water. Standardize with 0.0192 N AgNO3- Dilute to appropriate concentration so thai
1 ml = 1 mg CN.
7.8 Standard cyanide solution, intermediate: Dilute 100.0 ml of stock (I ml = I rngC.N) to
1000 ml with distilled water (1 ml = 100.0 ug).
7.9 Working standard cyanide solution: Prepare fresh daily by diluting 100.0 ml ot
intermediate cyanide solution to 1000 ml with distilled water and store in a glass
stoppered bottle. 1 ml = 10.0 ugCN.
7.10 Standard silver nitrate solution, 0.0192 N: Prepare by crushing approximately 5 g
AgNO3 crystals and drying to constant weight at 40"C. Weigh out 3.2647 g of dried
AgNO], dissolve in distilled water, and dilute to 1000 ml (1 ml = 1 mg CN).
7.11 Rhodanine indicator: Dissolve 20 mg of p-dimethyl-amino-benzalrhodanine in 100 ml of
acetone.
7.12 Chloramine T solution: Dissolve 1.0 g of white, water soluble Chloramine T in 100 ml of
distilled water and refrigerate until ready to use. Prepare fresh daily.
7.13 Color Reagent — One of the following may be used:
7.13.1 Pyridine-Barbituric Acid Reagent: Place 15 g of barbituric acid in a 250 mi
volumetric flask and add just enough distilled water to wash the sides of the
flask and wet the barbituric acid. Add 75 ml of pyridine and mix. Add 15 ml
of cone. HC1, mix, and cool to room temperature. Dilute to 250 ml with
distilled water and mix. This reagent is stable for approximately six months
if stored in a cool, dark place.
7.13.2 Pyridine-pyrazolone solution:
7.13.2.1 3-Methyl-I-phenyl-2-pyrazolin-5-one reagent, saturated solution: Add
0.25 g of 3-methyI-l-phenyl-2-pyrazolin-5-one to 50 ml of distilled
water, heat to 60°C with stirring. Cool to room temperature.
7.13.2.2 3,3'Dimethyl-l, l'-diphenyl-[4,4'-bi-2 pyrazoline]-5,5'dion« (bispyra-
zolone): Dissolve 0.01 g of bispyrazolone in 10 ml of pyridine.
7.13.2.3 Pour solution (7.13.2.1) through non-acid-washed filter paper. Collect
the filtrate. Through the same filter paper pour solution (7 13.2.2)
collecting the filtrate in the same container as filtrate from (7 13.2.1).
Mix until the filtrates are homogeneous. The mixed reagent develops a
pink color but this does not affect the color production with cyanide if
used within 24 hours of preparation.
7.14 Magnesium chloride solution: Weight 510 g of MgCl2«6H;O into a 1000 ml flask, dissolve
and dilute to 1 liter with distilled water.
7.1") Sulfamu arid.
D-372
-------
8. Procedure
8.1 For samples without sulfide.
8.1.1 Place 500 ml of sample, or an aliquot diluted to 500 ml in the 1 liter boiling
flask. Pipet 50 ml of sodium hydroxide (7.1) into the absorbing tube. If the
apparatus in Figure 1 is used, add distilled water until the spiral is covered.
Connect the boiling flask, condenser, absorber and trap in the train. (Figure 1
or 2)
8.1.2 Start a slow stream of air entering the boiling flask by adjusting the vacuum
source. Adjust the vacuum so that approximately two bubbles of air per second
enters the boiling flask through the air inlet tube. Proceed to 8.4.
8.2 For samples that contain sulfide.
8.2.1 Place 500 ml of sample, or an aliquot diluted to 500 ml in the 1 liter boiling
flask. Pipet 50 ml of sodium hydroxide (7.1) to the absorbing tube. Add 25 ml of
lead acetate (7.2) to the sulfide scrubber. Connect the boiling flask, condenser.
scrubber and absorber in the train. (Figure3) The flow meter is connected to the
outlet tube of the cyanide absorber.
8.2.2 Start a stream of air entering the boiling flask by adjusting the vacuum source.
Adjust the vacuum so that approximately 1.5 liters per minute enters the
boiling flask through the air inlet tube. The bubble rate may not remain
constant while heat is being applied to the flask. It may be necessary to readj ust
the air rate occasionally. Proceed to 8.4.
8.3 If samples contain NOS and or NO2 add 2 g of sulfamic acid solution (7.15) after the air
rate is set through the air inlet tube. Mix for 3 minutes prior to addition of HjSO^
8.4 Slowly add 50 ml 18N sulfuric aeid (7.5) through the air inlet tube. Rinse the tube with
distilled water and allow the airflow to mix the flask contents for 3 min. Pour 20 ml of
magnesium chloride (7.14) into the air inlet and wash down with a stream of water.
8.5 Heat the solution to boiling. Reflux for one houF. Turn oil heat and continue the
airflow for at least 15 minutes. After cooling the boiling flask, disconnect absorber and
close off the vacuum source.
8.6 Drain the solution from the absorber into a 250 mt volumetric flask. Wash the absorber
with distilled water and add the washings to the flask. Dilute to the mark with distilled
water.
8.7 Withdraw 50 ml or less of the solution from the flask and transfer to a 100 ml volumetric
flask. If less than 50 ml is taken, dilute to 50 ml with 0.25N sodium hydroxide solution
(7.4). Add 15.0 ml of sodium phosphate solution (7.6) and mix.
8.7.1 Pyridine-barbituric acid method: Add 2 ml of chloramine T (7.12) and mix.
See Note 1. After 1 to 2 minutes, add 5 ml of pyridine-barbituric acid solution
(7.13.1) and mix. Dilute to mark with distilled water and mix again. Allow 8
minutes for color development then read absorbance at 578 nm in a 1 cm cell
within 15 minutes.
8.7.2 Pyridine-pyrazolene method: Add 0.5 ml of chloramine T (7.12) and mix. See
Note 1 and 2. After 1 to 2 minutes add 5 ml of pyridine-pyrazolone solution
D-373
-------
(7.13.1) and mix. Dilute to mark with distilled water and mix again. After 40
minutes read absorbance at 620 nm in a I cm cell.
NOTE 1: Some distillates may contain compounds that have a chlorine
demand. One minute after the addition of chloramine T, test for
residual chlorine with Kl-starch paper. If the test is negative, add an
additional 0.5 ml of chlorine T. After one minute, recheck the sample.
NOTE 2: More than 05. ml of chloramine T will prevent the color from
developing with pyridine-pyrazolone.
8.8 Standard curve for samples without sulfide.
8.8.1 Prepare a series of standards by pipeting suitable volumes of standard solution
(7.9) into 250 ml volumetric flasks. To each standard add 50 ml of 1.25 X
sodium hydroxide and dilute to 250 ml with distilled water. Prepare as follows:
ML of Working Standard Solution Cone, fjg CN
(1 ml = 10//gCN) per 250 ml
0 BLANK
1.0 10
2.0 20
5.0 50
10.0 100
15.0 150
20.0 200
8.8.2 It is not imperative that all standards be distilled in the same manner as the
samples. It is recommended that at least two standards (a high and low) be
distilled and compared to similar values on the curve to insure that the distil-
lation technique is reliable. If distilled standards do not agree within ±10%
of the undistilled standards the analyst should find the cause of the apparent
error before proceeding.
8.8.3 Prepare a standard curve by plotting absorbance of standard vs. cyanide
concentrations.
8.8.4 To check the efficiency of the sample distillation, add an increment of cyanide
from either the intermediate standard (7.8) or the working standard (7.9) to
500 ml of sample to insure a level of 20 pg/1. Proceed with the analysis as in
Procedure (8.1.1).
8.9 Standard curve for samples with sulfide.
8.9.1 It is imperative that all standards be distilled in the same manner as the samples.
Standards distilled by this method will give a linear curve, but as the concen-
tration increases, the recovery decreases. It is recommended that at least 3
standards be distilled.
8.9.2 Prepare a standard curve by plotting absorbance of standard vs. cyanide con-
centrations.
D-374
-------
8.10 Titrimetric method.
8.10.1 If the sample contains more than 1 mg/1 of CM, transfer the distillate or a
suitable aliquot diluted to 250 ml, to a 500 ml Erlenmeyer flask. Add 10-12 drops
of the benzalrhodanine indicator.
8.10.2 Titrate with standard silver nitrate to the first change in color from yellow to
brownish-pink. Titrate a distilled water blank using the same amount of sodium
hydroxide and indicator as in the sample.
8.10.3 The analyst should familiarize himself with the end point of the titration and the
amount of indicator to be used before actually titrating the samples.
9. Calculation
9.1 If the colorimetric procedure is used, calculate the cyanide, in ug/1, in the original
sample as follows:
CN,ug/l = A x 1.000 x 50
B C
where:
A = ug CN read from standard curve
B = ml of original sample for distillation
C = ml taken for colorimetric analysis
D-375
-------
9.2 Using the titrimetric procedure, calculate concentration of CN as follows:
-M ,, (A - B)1.000 250
CN, mg/l = -^-.—:—L-i—— x —:—7.—r : ?
ml ong. sample ml ot aliquot titrated
where:
A = volume of AgNO3 for titration of sample.
B = volume of AgNO3 for deration of blank.
10. Precision and Accuracy
10.1 In a single laboratory (EMSL), using mixed industrial and domestic waste samples at
concentrations of 0.06, 0.13, 0.28 and 0.62 mg/l CN, the standard deviations were
±0.005, ;0.007, -0.031 and ±0.094, respectively.
10.2 In a single laboratory (EMSL), using mixed industrial and domestic waste samples at
concentrations of 0.28 and 0.62 mg/l CN, recoveries were 85% and 102%, respectively.
Bibliography
1. Bark, L. S., and Higson, H. G. "Investigation of Reagents for the Colorimetric Determination
of Small Amounts of Cyanide", Talanta. 2:471^*79(1964).
2. Elly, C. T. "Recovery of Cyanides by Modified Seifass Distillation". Journal Water Pollution
Control Federation 40:848-856 (1968).
3. Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Part 31, "Water", Standard D2036-75, Method A, p 503
(1976).
4. Standard Methods for the Examination of Water and Wastewater, 14th Edition, p 367 and 370,
Method 413B and D( 1975).
5.. Egekeze. J. Q.. and Oehne, F. W., "Direct Potentiometric Determination of Cyanide in
Biological Materials." J. Analytical Toxicology, Vol. 3, p. 119, May/June 1979.
6. Casey, J. P., Bright, J. W., and Helms, B. D., "Nitrosation Interference in Distillation Tests
for Cvanide." Gulf Coast Waste Disposal Authority, Houston. Texas.
D-376
-------
ALLIHN CONDENSER
AIR INLET TUBE
— CONNECTING TUBING
ONE LITER
BOILING FLASK
SUCTION
FIGURE 1
CYANIDE DISTILLATION APPARATUS
D-377
-------
COOLING WATER
INLET TUBE^
HEATER*
SCREW CLAMP
&
TO LOW VACUUM
SOURCE
- ABSORBER
DISTILLING FLASK
O
FIGURE 2
CYANIDE DISTILLATION APPARATUS
D-378
-------
EPA METHOD
NO. 340.1
D-379
-------
FLUORIDE, TOTAL
Method 340.1 (Colorimetric, SPADNS with Bellack Distillation)
STORET NO. Total 00951
Dissolved 00950
1. Scope and Application
1.1 This method is applicable to the measurement of fluoride in drinking, surface, and saline
waters, domestic and industrial wastes.
1.2 The method covers the range from 0.1 to about 2.5 mg/1 F. This range may be extended
to 1000 mg/l using the Fluoride Ion Selective Electrode Method (340.2) after
distillation.
2. Summary of Method
2.1 Following distillation to remove interferences, the sample is treated with the SPADNS
reagent The loss of color resulting from the reaction of fluoride with the zirconyl-
SPADNS dye is a function of the fluoride concentration.
3. Comments
3.1 The SPADNS reagent is more tolerant of interfering materials than other accepted
fluoride reagents. Reference to Table 414:1, p 388, Standard Methods for the
Examination of Waters and Wastewaters, 14th Edition, will help the analyst decide if
distillation is required. The addition of the highly colored SPADNS reagent must be
done with utmost accuracy because the fluoride concentration is measured as a difference
of absorbance in the blank and the sample. A small error in reagent additon is the most
prominent source of error in this test.
3.2 Care must be taken to avoid overheating the flask above the level of the solution. This is
done by maintaining an even flame entirely under the boiling flask.
4. Apparatus
4.1 Distillation apparatus: A 1-liter round-bottom, long-necked pyrex boiling flask,
connecting tube, efficient condenser, thermometer adapter and thermometer reading to
200*C. All connections should be ground glass. Any apparatus equivalent to that shown
in Figure 1 is acceptable.
4.2 Colorimeter One of the following
4.2.1 Spectrophotometer for use at 570 nm providing a light path of at least 1 cm.
4.2.2 Filter photometer equipped with a greenish yellow filter having maximum
transmittance at 550 to 580 nm and a light path of at least 1 cm.
5. Reagents
5.1 Sulfuric acid, H2SO4, cone.
Approved for NPDES and SDWA
Issued 1971
Editorial revision 1974 and 1978
D-380
-------
5,2 Silver sulfate, Ag2SO4 crystals.
5.3 Stock fluoride solution: Dissolve 0.221 g anhydrous sodium fluoride, NaF, in distilled
water in a 1-liter volumetric flask and dilute to the mark with distilled water; 1.00 ml =
O.lmgF.
5.4 Standard fluoride solution: Place 100 ml stock fluoride solution (5.3) in a 1 liter
volumetric flask and dilute to the mark with distilled water; 1.00 ml = 0.010 mg F.
5.5 SPADNS solution: Dissolve 0.958 g SPADNS, sodium 2-(parasulfophenylazo)-l,8-
dihydroxy-3,6-naphthalene disulfonate, in distilled water in a 500 ml volumetric flask
and dilute to the mark. Stable indefinitely if protected from direct sunlight.
5.6 Zirconyl-acid reagent: Dissolve 0.133 g zirconyl chloride octahydrate, ZrOCI2»8H2O in
approximately 25 ml distilled water in a 500 ml volumetric flask. Add 350 ml cone HCI
and dilute to the mark with distilled water.
5.7 Acid-zirconyl-SPADNS reagent: Mix equal volumes of SPADNS solution (5.5) and
zirconyl-acid reagent (5.6). The combined reagent is stable for at least 2 years.
5.8 Reference solution: Add 10 ml SPADNS solution (5.5) to 100 ml distilled water. Dilute 7
ml cone HCI to 10 ml and add to the dilute SPADNS solution. This solution is used for
zeroing the spectrophotometer or photometer. It is stable and may be used indefinitely.
5.9 Sodium arsenite solution: Dissolve 5.0 g NaAsO2 in distilled water in a 1-liter volumetric
flask and dilute to the mark with distilled water (CAUTION: Toxic-avoid ingestion).
6. Procedure
6.1 Preliminary distillation
6.1.1 Place 400 ml distilled water in the distilling flask.
6.1.2 Carefully add 200 ml cone. H2SO4 and swirl until contents are homogeneous.
6.1.3 Add 25 to 35 glass beads, connect the apparatus (Figure 1) making sure all joints
are tight.
6.1.4 Heat slowly at first, then as rapidly as the efficiency of the condenser will permit
(distillate must be cool) until the temperature of the flask contents reaches exactly
180'C. Discard the distillate. This process removes fluoride contamination and
adjusts the acid-water ratio for subsequent distillations.
6.1.5 Cool to 120*C or below.
6.1.6 Add 300 ml sample, mix thoroughly, distill as in 6.1.4 until temperature reaches
180*C. Do not heat above 180*C to prevent sulfate carryover.
6.1.7 Add Ag,SO4 (5.2) at a rate of 5 mg/mg Cl when high chloride samples are distilled.
6.1.8 Use the sulfuric acid solution in the flask repeatedly until the contaminants from
the samples accumulate to such an extent that recovery is affected or interferences
appear in the distillate. Check periodically by distilling standard fluoride samples.
6.1.9 High fluoride samples may require that the still be flushed by using distilled water
and combining distillates.
6.2 Colorimetric Determination:
6.2.1 Prepare fluoride standards in the range 0 to 1.40 mg/1 by diluting appropriate
quantities of standard fluoride solution (5.4) to 50 ml with distilled water.
D-381
-------
CONNECTING TUBE
THERMOMETER
THERMOMETER ADAPTER ^
1-liter
ROUND BOTTOM
FLASK
CONDENSER
BURNER
300-ml
O VOLUMETRIC
FLASK
FIGURE 1 DIRECT DISTILLATION APPARATUS
FOR FLUORIDE. .
D-382
-------
6.2.2 Pipet 5.00 ml each of SPADNS solution (5.5) and zirconyl-acid reagent (5.6) or
10.00 ml of the mixed acid-zirconyl-SPADNS reagent (5.7) to each standard and
mix well.
6.2.3 Set photometer to zero with reference solution (5.8) and immediately obtain
absorbance readings of standards.
6.2.4 Plot absorbance versus concentration. Prepare a new standard curve whenever
fresh reagent is made.
6.2.5 If residual chlorine is present pretreat the sample with 1 drop (0.05 ml) NaAsO2
solution (5.9) per 0.1 mg residual chlorine and mix. Sodium arsenite
concentrations of 1300 mg/1 produce an error of 0. 1 mg/1 at 1 .0 mg/1 F.
6.2.6 Use a 50 ml sample or a portion diluted to 50 ml. Adjust the temperature of the
sample to that used for the standard curve.
6.2.7 Perform step 6.2.2 and 6.2.3.
7. Calculations
7. 1 Read the concentration in the 50 ml sample using the standard curve (6.2.4)
7.2 Calculate as follows:
mgF x 1.000
mg/1 F = ml sample
7.3 When a sample (ml sample) is dilutee! to a volume (B) and then a portion (C) is analyzed,
use:
8. Precision and Accuracy
8. 1 On a sample containing 0.83 mg/1 F with no interferences, 53 analysts using the Bellack
distillation and the SPADNS reagent obtained a mean of 0.81 mg/1 F with a standard
deviation of ±0.089 mg/1.
8.2 On a sample containing 0.57 mg/1 F (with 200 mg/1 SO4 and 10 mg/1 Al as
interferences) 53 analysts using the Bellack distillation obtained a mean of 0.60 mg/IF
with a standard deviation of ±0. 103 mg/1.
8.3 On a sample containing 0.68 mg/1 F (with 200 mg/1 SO4, 2 mg/1 Al and 2.5 mg/1
[Na(PO3)6] as interferences), 53 analysts using the Bellack distillation obtained a mean of
0.72 mg/1 F with a standard deviation of ±0.092 mg/1. (Analytical Reference Service,
Sample 1 1 1-B water, Fluoride, August, 1961.)
Bibliography
1. Standard Methods for the Examination of Water and Wastewater, p. 389-390 (Method No.
414A, Preliminary Distillation Step) and p. 393-394 (Method 414C SPADNS) 14th Edition,
(1975).
2. Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Part 3 1 , "Water", Standard D 1 1 79-72, Method A, p. 3 1 0
(1976).
D-383
-------
t>
00
00
-------
PH
(FIELD DETERMINATION)
D-385
-------
oH
Liquid and sludge samoles were tested for- oH in the field orior to tne
addition of any preservatives. Values of oH were measured usinq "AlKacia
Test Ribbon" manufactured by Fiscner Scientific Cornoany. Tnis oH paoer
provides 5 distinct color changes ranqing from violet ( DH = cl) to dark olue
(pH = 10) . fl color comparison chart is included with the paoer. The cnart
indicates the colors for pH values of S, 4, 6, 8, and liZl. Intermediate oH
values can be estimated.
To determine the pH a liquid sample, a section of the oH ribbon is
removed from the dispenser and a small amount of liquid (a few droos) is
aoplied to the paper. flny color change will occur immediately and is corn-
pared to the color chart while the paper is still wet. To determine the DH
of a sludge sample, a small amount of sludge is aoplied to the paper. Time
is allowed for the fluid content of the sludge to absorb into the oH rib-
bon. Once this has occurred, any color change is compared to the chart.
D-386
-------
EPA METHOD
NO. 150.1
D-387
-------
pH
Method 150.1 (Electrometric)
STORET NO.
Determined on site 00400
Laboratory 00403
1. Scope and Application
1.1 This method is applicable to drinking, surface, and saline waters, domestic and industrial
wastes.
2. Summary of Method
2.1 The pH of a sample is determined electrometrically using either a glass electrode in
combination with a reference potential or a combination electrode.
3. Sample Handling and Preservation
3.1 Samples should be analyzed as soon as possible preferably in the field at the time of
sampling.
3.2 High-purity waters and waters not at equilibrium with the atmosphere are subject to
changes when exposed to the atmosphere, therefore the sample containers should be
filled completely and kept sealed prior to analysis.
4. Interferences
4.1 The glass electrode, in general, is not subject to solution interferences from color,
turbidity, colloidal matter, oxidants, reductants or high salinity.
4.2 Sodium error at pH levels greater than 10 can be reduced or eliminated by using a "low
sodium error" electrode.
4.3 Coatings of oily material or paniculate matter can impair electrode response. These
coatings can usually be removed by gentle wiping or detergent washing, followed by
distilled water rinsing. An additional treatment with hydrochloric acid (1+9) may be
necessary to remove any remaining film.
4.4 Temperature effects on the electrometric measurement of pH arise from two sources.
The first is caused by the change in electrode output at various temperatures. This
interference can be controlled with instruments having temperature compensation or by
calibrating the electrode-instrument system at the temperature of the samples. The
second source is the change of pH inherent in the sample at various temperatures. This
error is sample dependent and cannot be controlled, it should therefore be noted by
reporting both the pH and temperature at the time of analysis.
5. Apparatus
5.1 pH Meter-laboratory or field model. A wide variety of instruments are commercially
available with various specifications and optional equipment.
Approved for NPDES
Issued 1971
Editorial revision 1978
D-388
-------
5.2 Glass electrode.
5.3 Reference electrode-a calomel, silver-silver chloride or other reference electrode of
constant potential may be used.
NOTE 1: Combination electrodes incorporating both measuring and reference
functions are convenient to use and are available with solid, gel type filling materials that
require minimal maintenance.
5.4 Magnetic stirrer and Teflon-coated stirring bar.
5.5 Thermometer or temperature sensor for automatic compensation.
6. Reagents
6.1 Primary standard buffer salts are available from the National Bureau of Standards and
should be used in situations where extreme accuracy is necessary.
6.1.1 Preparation of reference solutions from these salts require some special precautions
and handling'" such as low conductivity dilution water, drying ovens, and carbon
dioxide free purge gas. These solutions should be replaced at least once each
month.
6.2 Secondary standard buffers may be prepared from NBS salts or purchased as a solution
from commercial vendors. Use of these commercially available solutions, that have been
validated by comparison to NBS standards, are recommended for routine use.
7. Calibration
7.1 Because of the wide variety of pH meters and accessories, detailed operating procedures
cannot be incorporated into this method. Each analyst must be acquainted with the
operation of each system and familiar with all instrument functions. Special attention to
care of the electrodes is recommended.
7.2 Each instrument/electrode system must be calibrated at a minimum of two points that
bracket the expected pH of the samples and are approximately three pH units or more
apart.
7.2.1 Various instrument designs may involve use of a "balance" or "standardize" dial
and/or a slope adjustment as outlined in the manufacturer's instructions. Repeat
adjustments on successive portions of the two buffer solutions as outlined in
procedure 8.2 until readings are within 0.05 pH units of the buffer solution value.
8. Procedure
8.1 Standardize the meter and electrode system as outlined in Section 7.
8.2 Place the sample or buffer solution in a clean glass beaker using a sufficient volume to
cover the sensing elements of the electrodes and to give adequate clearance for the
magnetic stirring bar.
8.2.1 If field measurements are being made the electrodes may be immersed directly in
the sample stream to an adequate depth and moved in a manner to insure sufficient
sample movement across the electrode sensing element as indicated by drift free
(< 0.1 pH) readings.
8.3 If the sample temperature differs by more than 2°C from the buffer solution the measured
pH values must be corrected. Instruments are equipped with automatic or manual
'"National Bureau of Standards Special Publication 260.
D-389
-------
9.
10.
compensators that electronically adjust for temperature differences. Refer to
manufacturer's instructions.
8.4 After rinsing and gently wiping the electrodes, if necessary, immerse them into the
sample beaker or sample stream and stir at a constant rate to provide homogeneity and
suspension of solids. Rate of stirring should minimize the air transfer rate at the air water
interface of the sample. Note and record sample pH and temperature. Repeat
measurement on successive volumes of sample until values differ by less than 0.1 pH
units. Two or three volume changes are usually sufficient.
Calculation
9.1 pH meters read directly in pH units. Report pH to the nearest 0.1 unit and temperature
to the nearest *C.
Precision and Accuracy
10.1 Forty-four analysts in twenty laboratories analyzed six synthetic water samples
containing exact increments of hydrogen-hydroxyl ions, with the following results:
pH Units
3.5
3.5
7.1
7.2
8.0
8.0
Standard Deviation
pH Units
0.10
0.11
0.20
0.18
0.13
0.12
Bias,
Accuracy as
-0.29
-0.00
+ 1.01
-0.03
-0.12
+0.16
Bias,
pH Units
-0.01
+0.07
-0.002
-0.01
+0.01
(FWPCA Method Study I, Mineral and Physical Analyses)
10.2 In a single laboratory (EMSL), using surface water samples at an average pH of 7.7, the
standard deviation was tO.l.
Bibliography
1. Standard Methods for the Examination of Water and Wastewater, 14th Edition, p 460, (1975).
2. Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Part 31, "Water", Standard D1293-65, p 178 (1976).
D-390
-------
EPA METHOD
NO. 413.1
D-391
-------
OIL AND GREASE, TOTAL, RECOVERABLE
Method 413.1 (Gravimetric, Separatory Funnel Extraction)
STORET NO. 00556
1. Scope and Application
1.1 This method includes the measurement of fluorocarbon-113 extractable matter from
surface and saline waters, industrial and domestic wastes. It is applicable to the
determination of relatively non-volatile hydrocarbons, vegetable oils, animal fats, waxes,
soaps, greases and related matter.
1.2 The method is not applicable to measurement of light hydrocarbons that volatilize at
temperatures below 70*C. Petroleum fuels from gasoline through #2 fuel oils are
completely or partially lost in the solvent removal operation.
1.3 Some crude oils and heavy fuel oils contain a significant percentage of residue-type
materials that are not soluble in fluorocarbon-113. Accordingly, recoveries of these
materials will be low.
1.4 The method covers the range from 5 to 1000 mg/1 of extractable material.
2. Summary of Method
2.1 The sample is acidified to a low pH (< 2) and serially extracted with fluorocarbon-113 in
a separatory funnel. The solvent is evaporated from the extract and the residue weighed.
3. Definitions
3.1 The definition of oil and grease is based on the procedure used. The nature of the oil
and/or grease, and the presence of extractable non-oily matter will influence the material
measured and interpretation of results.
4. Sampling and Storage
4.1 A representative sample of 1 liter volume should be collected in a glass bottle. If analysis
is to be delayed for more than a few hours, the sample is preserved by the addition of 5 ml
HC1 (6.1) at the time of collection and refrigerated at 4*C.
4.2 Because losses of grease will occur on sampling equipment, the collection of a composite
sample is impractical. Individual portions collected at prescribed time intervals must be
analyzed separately to obtain the average concentration over an extended period.
5. Apparatus
5.1 Separatory funnel, 2000 ml, with Teflon stopcock.
5.2 Vacuum pump, or other source of vacuum.
5.3 Flask, boiling, 125 ml (Corning No. 4100 or equivalent).
5.4 Distilling head, Claisen or equivalent.
5.5 Filter paper, Whatman No. 40,11 cm.
6. Reagents
6.1 Hydrochloric acid, 1:1. Mix equal volumes of cone. HC1 and distilled water.
Approved for NPDES
Issued 1974
Editorial revision 1978
D-392
-------
6.2 Flurocarbon-113,(l,l,2-trichloro-l,2,2-trifluoroethane), b. p. 48°C.
6.3 Sodium sulfate, anhydrous crystal.
7. Procedure
7.1 Mark the sample bottle at the water meniscus for later determination of sample volume.
If the sample was not acidified at time of collection, add 5 ml hydrochloric acid (6.1) to
the sample bottle. After mixing the sample, check the pH by touching pH-sensitive paper
to the cap to insure that the pH is 2 or lower. Add more acid if necessary.
7.2 Pour the sample into a separatory funnel.
7.3 Tare a boiling flask (pre-dried in an oven at 103°C and stored in a desiccator).
7.4 Add 30 ml fluorocarbon-113 (6.2) to the sample bottle and rotate the bottle to rinse the
sides. Transfer the solvent into the separatory funnel. Extract by shaking vigorously for 2
minutes. Allow the layers to separate, and filter the solvent layer into the flask through a
funnel containing solvent moistened filter paper.
NOTE: An emulsion that fails to dissipate can be broken by pouring about 1 g sodium
sulfate (6.3) into the filter paper cone and slowly draining the emulsion through the salt.
Additional 1 g portions can be added to the cone as required.
7.5 Repeat (7.4) twice more, with additional portions of fresh solvent, combining all solvent
in the boiling flask.
7.6 Rinse the tip of the separatory funnel, the filter paper, and then the runnel with a total of
10-20 ml solvent and collect the rinsings in the flask.
7.7 Connect the boiling flask to the distilling head and evaporate the solvent by immersing
the lower half of the flask in water at 70*C. Collect the solvent for reuse. A solvent blank
should accompany each set of samples.
7.8 When the temperature in the distilling head reaches 50°C or the flask appears dry remove
the distilling head. Sweep out the flask for 15 seconds with air to remove solvent vapor by
inserting a glass tube connected to a vacuum source. Immediately remove the flask from
the heat source and wipe the outside to remove excess moisture and fingerprints.
7.9 Cool the boiling flask in a desiccator for 30 minutes and weigh.
8. Calculation
8.1 mg/1 total oil and grease =
where:
R = residue, gross weight of extraction flask minus the tare weight, in milligrams.
B = blank determination, residue of equivalent volume of extraction solvent, in
milligrams.
V = volume of sample, determined by refilling sample bottle to calibration line and
correcting for acid addition if necessary, in liters.
D-393
-------
( 9. Precision and Accuracy
9.1 The two oil and grease methods in this manual were tested by a single laboratory (EMSL)
on sewage. This method determined the oil and grease level in the sewage to be 12.6
mg/1. When 1 liter portions of the sewage were dosed with 14.0 mg of a mixture of #2
fuel oil and Wesson oil, the recovery was 93% with a standard deviation of ±0.9 mg/1.
Bibliography
1. Standard Methods for.the Examination of Water and Wastewater, 14th Edition, p 515,
Method 502A,( 1975).
2. Blum, K. A., and Taras, M. J., "Determination of Emulsifying Oil in Industrial Wastewater",
JWPCF Research Suppl. 40, R404 (1968).
D-394
-------
OIL AND GREASE ANALYSIS OF SLUDGE SAMPLES
-RETORT METHOD-
D-395
-------
Oil and Grease Analysis of Sludge Samples
A study was performed to determine a quick, reliable method for
the determination of oil and grease in sludge samples. Oil and
grease is defined to mean that material which can be extracted
from the sample by freon extraction and which is determined by
gravimetry after evaporating the freon from sodium sulfate dried
-extract. Three methods were compared: the straight freon
extraction method (A); the sonication assisted freon extraction
method (8) and the freon extraction following retort (C). A
brief description of each method will be given below.
Method A: A weighed aliquot (approximately 10 grams) of
well mixed sludge is acidified to pH 2 by addition a few
drops of dilute HC1. The sample is extracted by shaking
with three successive portions (30 mL each) of freon. The
extracts are dried by passing them through anhydrous sodium
sulfate contained in a filter tube plugged with glass wool.
The sodium sulfate is rinsed with an additional aliquot of
clean freon which is then combined with the extracts. The
freon is then removed by evaporation over a steam-bath and
the oil and grease residue is determined by gravimetric
analysis.
Method B: Method 8 is identical to Method A except that the
extraction is assisted by sonicating the freon and sludge to
attempt to get a better recovery of oil and grease.
Method C-- A weighed aiiquot (approximately 20 grama) of
well mixed sludge is acidified to pH 2 by addition of a feu
drops of dilute HC1. The sample is then placed in a retort
apparatus. The sample is heated frow ambient to approxim-
ately 500 degrees centigrade over 30 minutes. The
distillate is condensed and collected in a aide arm
receiver. The oil and grease is determined in the
distillate by the procedure outlined in Method A.
The results of this study suggest that the retort step (Method C)
yields a higher oil and grease result with considerably lass
variability than either Methods A or 8. The sonication step
(Method B) actually yielded a lower oil and grease result than
either Methods A or C. This was contrary to our expectations,
however, there was no specific attempt to discover the reason for
the lower results.
The results of this study are presented graphically in figures 1
and 2. Two actual field samples were used. One was considered
to have a moderate oil and grease value and the other a high
value.
D-396
-------
46 1320
VO
--a
-------
CO
OS
I
Q
-------
EPA METHOD
NO. 160.1
D-399
-------
RESIDUE, FILTERABLE
Method 160.1 (Gravimetric, Dried at 180°Q
STORET NO. 70300
1. Scope and Application
1.1 This method is applicable to drinking, surface, and saline waters, domestic and industrial
wastes.
1.2 The practical range of the determination is 10 mg/1 to 20,000 mg/1.
2. Summary of Method
2.1 A well-mixed sample is filtered through a standard glass fiber filter. The filtrate is
evaporated and dried to constant weight at 180*C.
2.2 If Residue, Non-Filterable is being determined, the filtrate from that method may be
used for Residue, Filterable.
3. Definitions
3.1 Filterable residue is defined as those solids capable of passing through a glass fiber filter
and dried to constant weight at 18CTC.
4. Sample Handling and Preservation
4.1 Preservation of the sample is not practical; analysis should begin as soon as possible.
Refrigeration or icing to 4*C, to minimize microbiological decomposition of solids, is
recommended.
5. Interferences
5. 1 Highly mineralized waters containing significant concentrations of calcium, magnesium,
chloride and/or sulfate may be hygroscopic and will require prolonged drying,
desiccation and rapid weighing.
5.2 Samples containing high concentrations of bicarbonate will require careful and possibly
prolonged drying at 180*C to insure that all the bicarbonate is converted to carbonate.
5.3 Too much residue in the evaporating dish will crust over and entrap water that will not
be driven off during drying. Total residue should be limited to about 200 mg.
6. Apparatus
6.1 Glass fiber filter discs, 4.7 cm or 2.1 cm, without organic binder, Reeve Angel type 934-
AH, Gelman type A/E, or equivalent.
6.2 Filter holder,, membrane filter funnel or Gooch crucible adapter.
6.3 Suction flask, 500 ml.
6.4 Gooch crucibles, 25 ml (if 2.1 cm filter is used).
6.5 Evaporating dishes, porcelain, 100 ml volume. (Vycor or platinum dishes may be
substituted).
6.6 Steam bath.
6.7 Drying oven, 180*C ±2*C.
6.8 Desiccator.
Approved for NPDES
Issued 1971
D-400
-------
6.9 Analytical balance, capable of weighing to 0.1 mg.
7. Procedure
7.1 Preparation of glass fiber filter disc: Place the disc on the membrane filter apparatus or
insert into bottom of a suitable Gooch crucible. While vacuum is applied, wash the disc
with three successive 20 ml volumes of distilled water. Remove all traces of water by
continuing to apply vacuum after water has passed through. Discard washings.
7.2 Preparation of evaporating dishes: If Volatile Residue is also to be measured heat the
clean dish to 550 ±50°C for one hour in a muffle furnace. If only Filterable Residue is to
be measured heat the clean dish to 180 ±2°C for one hour. Cool in desiccator and store
until needed. Weigh immediately before use.
7.3 Assemble the filtering apparatus and begin suction. Shake the sample vigorously and
rapidly transfer 100 ml to the funnel by means of a 100 ml graduated cylinder. If total
filterable residue is low, a larger volume may be filtered.
7.4 Filter the sample through the glass fiber filter, rinse with three 10 ml portions of distilled
water and continue to apply vacuum for about 3 minutes after filtration is complete to
remove as much water as possible.
7.5 Transfer 100 ml (or a larger volume) of the filtrate to a weighed evaporating dish and
evaporate to dryness on a steam bath.
7.6 Dry the evaporated sample for at least one hour at 180 ±2°C. Cool in a desiccator and
weigh. Repeat the drying cycle until a constant weight is obtained or until weight loss is
less than 0.5 mg.
8. Calculation
8.1 Calculate filterable residue as follows:
FUterable residue, mg/1 = ^ -tr-—'•—
where:
A = weight of dried residue + dish in mg
B = weight of dish in mg
C = volume of sample used in ml
9. Precision and Accuracy
9.1 Precision and accuracy are not available at this time.
Bibliography
1. Standard Methods for the Examination of Water and Wastewater, 14th Edition, p 92, Method
208B,(1975).
D-401
-------
t
£>
O
-------
EPA METHOD
NO. 160.2
D-403
-------
RESIDUE, NON-FILTERABLE
Method 160.2 (Gravimetric, Dried at 103-105°O
STORET NO. 00530
1. Scope and Application
1.1 This method is applicable to drinking, surface, and saline waters, domestic and industrial
wastes.
1.2 The practical range of the determination is 4 mg/1 to 20,000 mg/1.
2. Summary of Method
2.1 A well-mixed sample is filtered through a glass fiber filter, and the residue retained on the
filter is dried to constant weight at 103-105*C.
2.2 The filtrate from this method may be used for Residue, Filterable.
3. Definitions
3.1 Residue, non-filterable, is defined as those solids which are retained by a glass fiber filter
and dried to constant weight at 103-105*C.
4. Sample Handling and Preservation
4.1 Non-representative particulates such as leaves, sticks, fish, and lumps of fecal matter
should be excluded from the sample if it is determined that their inclusion is not desired
in the final result.
4.2 Preservation of the sample is not practical; analysis should begin as soon as possible.
Refrigeration or icing to 4*C, to minimize microbiological decomposition of solids, is
recommended.
5. Interferences
5.1 Filtration apparatus, filter material, pre-washing, post-washing, and drying temperature
are specified because these variables have been shown to affect the results.
5.2 Samples high in Filterable Residue (dissolved solids), such as saline waters, brines and
some wastes, may be subject to a positive interference. Care must be taken in selecting the
filtering apparatus so that washing of the filter and any dissolved solids in the filter (7.5)
minimizes this potential interference.
6. Apparatus
6.1 Glass fiber filter discs, without organic binder, such as Millipore AP-40, Reeves Angel
934-AH, Gelman type A/E, or equivalent.
NOTE: Because of the physical nature of glass fiber filters, the absolute pore size cannot
be controlled or measured. Terms such as "pore size", collection efficiencies and effective
retention are used to define this property in glass fiber filters. Values for these parameters
vary for the filters listed above.
6.2 Filter support: filtering apparatus with reservoir and a coarse (40-60 microns) fritted
disc as a filter support.
Approved for NPDES
Issued 1971
D-404
-------
NOTE: Many funnel designs are available in glass or porcelain. Some of the most
common are Hirsch or Buchner funnels, membrane filter holders and Gooch crucibles.
All are available with coarse fritted disc.
6.3 Suction flask.
6.4 Drying oven, 103-105°C.
6.5 Desiccator.
6.6 Analytical balance, capable of weighing to 0.1 mg.
7. Procedure
7.1 Preparation of glass fiber filter disc: Place the glass fiber filter on the membrane filter
apparatus or insert into bottom of a suitable Gooch crucible with wrinkled surface up.
While vacuum is applied, wash the disc with three successive 20 ml volumes of distilled
water. Remove all traces of water by continuing to apply vacuum after water has passed
through. Remove filter from membrane filter apparatus or both crucible and filter if
Gooch crucible is used, and dry in an oven at 103-105°C for one hour. Remove to
desiccator and store until needed. Repeat the drying cycle until a constant weight is
obtained (weight loss is less than 0.5 mg). Weigh immediately before use. After weighing,
handle the filter or crucible/filter with forceps or tongs only.
7.2 Selection of Sample Volume
For a 4.7 cm diameter filter, filter 100 ml of sample. If weight of captured residue is less
than 1.0 mg, the sample volume must be increased to provide at least 1.0 mg of residue. If
other filter diameters are used, start with a sample volume equal to 7 ml/cm2 of filter area
and collect at least a weight of residue proportional to the 1.0 mg stated above.
NOTE: If during filtration of this initial volume the filtration rate drops rapidly, or if
filtration time exceeds 5 to 10 minutes, the following scheme is recommended: Use an
unweighed glass fiber filter of choice affixed in the filter assembly. Add a known volume
of sample to the filter funnel and record the time elapsed after selected volumes have
passed through the filter. Twenty-five ml increments for timing are suggested. Continue
to record the time and volume increments until fitration rate drops rapidly. Add
additional sample if the filter funnel volume is inadequate to reach a reduced rate. Plot
the observed time versus volume filtered. Select the proper filtration volume as that just
short of the time a significant change in filtration rate occurred.
7.3 Assemble the filtering apparatus and begin suction. Wet the filter with a small volume of
distilled water to seat it against the fritted support.
7.4 Shake the sample vigorously and quantitatively transfer the predetermined sample
volume selected in 7.2 to the filter using a graduated cylinder. Remove all traces of water
by continuing to apply vacuum after sample has passed through.
7.5 With suction on, wash the graduated cylinder, filter, non-filterable residue and filter
funnel wall with three portions of distilled water allowing complete drainage between
washing. Remove all traces of water by continuing to apply vacuum after water has
passed through.
NOTE: Total volume of wash water used should equal approximately 2 ml per cm:. For a
4.7 cm filter the total volume is 30 ml.
D-405
-------
7.6 Carefully remove the filter from the filter support. Alternatively, remove crucible and
filter from crucible adapter. Dry at least one hour at 103-105*C. Cool in a desiccator and
weigh. Repeat the drying cycle until a constant weight is obtained (weight loss is less than
0.5 mg).
8. Calculations
8.1 Calculate non-filterable residue as follows:
Non-filterable residue, mg/1 = ^ Bj* 1.000
where:
A = weight of filter (or filter and crucible) -t- residue in mg
B = weight of filter (or filter and crucible) in mg
C = ml of sample filtered
9. Precision and Accuracy
9.1 Precision data are not available at this time.
9.2 Accuracy data on actual samples cannot be obtained.
Bibliography
1. NCASI Technical Bulletin No. 291, March 1977. National Council of the Paper Industry for
Air and Stream Improvement, Inc., 260 Madison Ave., NY.
D-406
-------
EPA METHOD
NO. 160.3
D-407
-------
RESIDUE, TOTAL
Method 160.3 (Gravimetric, Dried at 103-105T)
STORET NO. 00500
1. Scope and Application
1.1 This method is applicable to drinking, surface, and saline waters, domestic and industrial
wastes.
1.2 The practical range of the determination is from 10 mg/1 to 20,000 mg/1.
2. Summary of Method
2.1 A well mixed aliquot of the sample is quantitatively transferred to a pre-weighed
evaporating dish and evaporated to dryness at 103-105°C.
3. Definitions
3.1 Total Residue is defined as the sum of the homogenous suspended and dissolved
materials in a sample.
4. Sample Handling and Preservation
4.1 Preservation of the sample is not practical; analysis should begin as soon as possible.
Refrigeration or icing to 4°C, to minimize microbiological decomposition of solids, is
recommended.
5. Interferences
5.1 Non-representative particulates such as leaves, sticks, fish and lumps of fecal matter
should be excluded from the sample if it is determined that their inclusion is not desired
in the final result.
5.2 Floating oil and grease, if present, should be included in the sample and dispersed by a
blender device before aliquoting.
6. Apparatus
6.1 Evaporating dishes, porcelain, 90 mm, 100 ml capacity. (Vycor or platinum dishes may
be substituted and smaller size dishes may be used if required.)
7. Procedure
7.1 Heat the clean evaporating dish to 103-105'C for one hour, if Volatile Residue is to be
measured, heat at 550 ±50"C for one hour in a muffle furnace. Cool, desiccate, weigh and
store in desiccator until ready for use.
7.2 Transfer a measured aliquot of sample to the pre-weighed dish and evaporate to dryness
on a steam bath or in a drying oven.
7.2.1 Choose an aliquot of sample sufficient to contain a residue of at least 25 mg. To
obtain a weighable residue, successive aliquots of sample may be added to the same
dish.
7.2.2 If evaporation is performed in a drying oven, the temperature should be lowered to
approximately 98*C to prevent boiling and splattering of the sample.
Approved for NPDES
Issued 1971
D-408
-------
7.3 Dry the evaporated sample for at least 1 hour at 103-105'C. Cool in a desiccator and
weigh. Repeat the cycle of drying at 103-105°C, cooling, desiccating and weighing until a
constant weight is obtained or until loss of weight is less than 4% of the previous weight,
or 0.5 mg, whichever is less.
8. Calculation
8.1 Calculate total residue as follows:
Total residue, mg/1 =
-------
D-410
-------
EPA METHOD
NO. 120.1
D-411
-------
CONDUCTANCE
Method 120.1 (Specific Conductance, umhos at 25°O
STORET NO. 00095
1. Scope and Application
1.1 This method is applicable to drinking, surface, and saline waters, domestic and industrial
wastes.
2. Summary of Method
2.1 The specific conductance of a sample is measured by use of a self-contained conductivity
meter, Wheatstone bridge-type, or equivalent.
2.2 Samples are preferably analyzed at 25*C. If not, temperature corrections are made and
results reported at 25*C.
3. Comments
3.1 Instrument must be standardized with KC1 solution before daily use.
3.2 Conductivity cell must be kept clean.
3.3 Field measurements with comparable instruments are reliable.
4. Precision and Accuracy
4.1 Forty-one analysts in 17 laboratories analyzed six synthetic water samples containing
increments of inorganic salts, with the following results:
Increment as Precision as Accuracy as
Specific Conductance Standard Deviation Bias, Bias,
—————— % mnhos/cm
100 7.55 -2.02 -2.0
106 8.14 -0.76 -0.8
808 66.1 -3.63 -29.3
848 79.6 -4.54 -38.5
1640 106 -5.36 -87.9
1710 119 -5.08 -86.9
(FWPCA Method Study 1, Mineral and Physical Analyses.)
4.2 In a single laboratory (EMSL) using surface water samples with an average conductivity
of 536 umhos/cm at 25*C, the standard deviation was ±6.
5. References
5.1 The procedure to be used for this determination is found in:
Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Part 31, "Water", Standard D1125-64, p 120 (1976).
Standard Methods for the Examination of Water and Wastewater, 14th Edition, p 71,
Method 205, (1975).
Approved for NPDES
Issued 1971
-------
EPA METHOD
NO. 376.2
D-413
-------
SULFIDE
Method 376.2 (Colorimetric, Methylene Blue)
STORET NO. Total 00745
Dissolved 00746
1. Scope and Application
1.1 This method is applicable to the measurement of total and dissolved sulfides in drinking,
surface and saline waters, domestic and industrial wastes.
1.2 Acid insoluble sulfides are not measured by this method. Copper sulfide is the only
common sulfide in this class.
1.3 The method is suitable for the measurement of sulfide in concentrations up to 20 mg/1.
2. Summary of Method
2.1 Sulfide reacts with dimethyl-p-phenylenediamine (p-aminodimethyl aniline) in the
presence of ferric chloride to produce methylene blue, a dye which is measured at a
wavelength maximum of 625 nm.
3. Comments
3.1 Samples must be taken with a minimum of aeration. Sulfide may be volatilized by
aeration and any oxygen inadvertently added to the sample may convert the sulfide to an
immeasurable form. Dissolved oxygen should not be present in any water used to dilute
standards.
3.2 The analysis must be started immediately.
3.3 Color and turbidity may interfere with observations of color or with photometric
readings.
4. Apparatus
4.1 Matched test tubes, approximately 125 mm long and 15 mm O. D.
4.2 Droppers, delivering 20 drops/ml. To obtain uniform drops, hold dropper in vertical
position and allow drops to form slowly.
4.3 Photometer, use either 4.3.1 or 4.3.2.
4.3.1 Spectrophotometer, for use at 625 nm with cells of 1 cm and 10 cm light path.
4.3.2 Filter photometer, with filter providing transmittance near 625 nm.
5. Reagents
5.1 Amino-sulfuric acid stock solution: Dissolve 27 g N,N-dimethyl-p-phenylenediamine
oxalate (p-aminodimethylaniline) in a cold mixture of 50 ml cone. H2SO4 and 20 ml
distilled water in a 100 ml volumetric flask. Cool and dilute to the mark. If dark discard
and purchase fresh reagent. Store in dark glass bottle.
5.2 Amino-sulfuric acid reagent: Dissolve 25 ml amino-sulfuric acid stock solution (5.1) with
975 ml of 1 +1 H,SO4 (5.4). Store in a dark glass bottle. This solution should be clear.
5.3 Ferric chloride solution: Dissolve 100 g FeCl3«6H2O in 40 ml distilled water.
Approved for NPDES
/ Issued 1978
D-414
-------
5.4 Sulfuric acid solution, H2SO4,1 +1
5.5 Diammonium hydrogen phosphate solution: Dissolve 400 g (NH4)2HPO4 in 800 ml
distilled water.
5.6 Methylene blue solution I: Dissolve 1.0 g of methylene blue in distilled water in a 1 liter
volumetric flask and dilute to the mark. Use U.S.P. grade or one certified by the
Biological Stain Commission. The dye content reported on the label should be 84% or
more. Standardize (5.8) against sulfide solutions of known strength and adjust
concentration so that 0.05 ml (1 drop) equals 1.0 mg/1 sulfide.
5.7 Methylene blue solution II: Dilute 10.00 ml of adjusted methylene blue solution I (5.6) to
100 ml with distilled water in a volumetric flask.
5.8 Standardization of methylene blue I solution:
5.8.1 Place several grams of clean, washed crystals of sodium sulfide Na2S«9H2O in a
small beaker.
5.8.2 Add somewhat less than enough water to cover the crystals.
5.8.3 Stir occasionally for a few minutes. Pour the solution into another vessel. This
reacts slowly with oxygen but the change is insignificnat over a few hours. Make
the solution daily.
5.8.4 To 1 liter of distilled water add 1 drop of solution and mix.
5.8.5 Immediately determine the sulfide concentration by the methylene blue procedure
(6) and by the titrimetric iodide procedure (Method 376.1, this manual).
5.8.6 Repeat using more than one drop of sulfide solution or less water until at least five
tests have been made in the range of 1 to 8 mg/1 sulfide.
5.8.7 Calculate the average percent error of the methylene blue procedure (6) as
compared to the titrimetric iodide procedure (Method 376.1).
5.8.8 Adjust by dilution or by adding more dye to methylene blue solution I (5.6).
6. Procedure
6.1 Color development
6.1.1 Transfer 7.5 ml of sample to each of two matched test tubes using a special wide
tipped pipet or filling to a mark on the test tubes.
6.1.2 To tube A add 0.5 ml amine-sulfuric acid reagent (5.2) and 0.15 ml (3 drops) FeCl3
solution (5.3).
6.1.3 Mix immediately by inverting the tube only once.
6.1.4 To tube B add 0.5 ml 1 +1 H2SO4 (5.4) and 0.15 ml (3 drops) JFeCl3 solution (5.3)
and mix.
6.1.5 Color will develop in tube A in the presence of sulfide. Color development is
usually complete in about 1 minute, but a longer time is often required for the
fading of the initial pink color.
6.1.6 Wait 3 to 5 minutes.
6.1.7 Add 1.6 ml (NH4)2HPO4 solution (5.5) to each tube.
6.1.8 Wait 3 to 5 minutes and make color comparisons. If zinc acetate was used wait at
least 10 minutes before making comparison.
D-415
-------
6.2 Color comparison
_ 6.2.1 Visual
' . 6.2.1.1 Add methylene blue solution I (5.6) and/or II (5.7) (depending on
sulfide concentration and accuracy desired) dropwise to tube B (6.1.4)
until the color matches that developed in the first tube.
6.2.1.2 If the concentration exceeds 20 mg/1, repeat 6.2.1.1 using a portion of
the sample diluted to one tenth.
6.2.2 Photometric
6.2.2.1 Use a 1 cm cell for 0.1 to 2.0 mg/1. Use a 10 cm cell for up to 20 mg/1.
6.2.2.2 Zero instrument with portion of sample from tube B (6.1.4).
6.2.2.3 Prepare calibration curve from data obtained in methylene blue
standardization (5.8), plotting concentraton obtained from titrimetric
iodide procedure (Method 376.1) versus absorbance. A straight line
relationship can be assumed from 0 to 1.0 mg/1.
6.2.2.4 Read the sulfide concentration from the calibration curve.
7. Calculations
7.1 Visual comparison: With methylene blue solution I (5.6), adjusted so that 0.05 ml (1
drop) = 1.0 mg/1 sulfide and a 7.5 ml sample
mg/1 sulfide = number drops methylene blue solution I (5.6) + 0.1 x [number of drops
methylene blue solution II (5.7)].
7.2 Photometric: see 6.2.2.4
8. Precision and Accuracy:
8.1 The precision has not been determined. The accuracy is about ±10%.
Bibliography
1. Standard Methods for he Examination of Water and Wastewater, 14th edition, p. 503, Method
428C(1975).
D-416
-------
EPA METHOD
NO. 415.1
D-417
-------
ORGANIC CARBON, TOTAL
Method 415.1 (Combustion or Oxidation)
STORET NO. Total 00680
Dissolved 00681
1. Scope and Application
1.1 This method includes the measurement of organic carbon in drinking, surface and saline
waters, domestic and industrial wastes. Exclusions are noted under Definitions and
Interferences.
1.2 The method is most applicable to measurement of organic carbon above 1 mg/1.
2. Summary of Method
2.1 Organic carbon in a sample is converted to carbon dioxide (CO2) by catalytic combustion
or wet chemical oxidation. The CO2 formed can be measured directly by an infrared
detector or converted to methane (CH4) and measured by a flame ionization detector.
The amount of CO2 or CH« is directly proportional to the concentration of carbonaceous
material in the sample.
3. Definitions
3.1 The carbonaceous analyzer measures all of the carbon in a sample. Because of various
properties of carbon-containing compounds in liquid samples, preliminary treatment of
the sample prior to analysis dictates the definition of the carbon as it is measured. Forms
of carbon that are measured by the method are:
A) soluble, nonvolatile organic carbon; for instance, natural sugars.
B) soluble, volatile organic carbon; for instance, mercaptans.
C) insoluble, partially volatile carbon; for instance, oils.
D) insoluble, particulate carbonaceous materials, for instance; cellulose fibers.
E) soluble or insoluble carbonaceous materials adsorbed or entrapped on insoluble
inorganic suspended matter, for instance, oily matter adsorbed on silt particles.
3.2 The final usefulness of the carbon measurement is in assessing the potential oxygen-
demanding load of organic material on a receiving stream. This statement applies
whether the carbon measurement is made on a sewage plant effluent, industrial waste, or
on water taken directly from the stream. In this light, carbonate and bicarbonate carbon
are not a part of the oxygen demand in the stream and therefore should be discounted in
the final calculation or removed prior to analysis. The manner of preliminary treatment
of the sample and instrument settings defines the types of carbon which are measurer1
Instrument manufacturer's instructions should be followed.
Approved for NPDES
Issued 1971
Editorial revision 1974
D-418
-------
4. Sample Handling and Preservation
4.1 Sampling and storage of samples in glass bottles is preferable. Sampling and storage in
plastic bottles such as conventional polyethylene and cubitainers is permissible if it is
established that the containers do not contribute contaminating organics to the samples.
NOTE 1: A brief study performed in the EPA Laboratory indicated that distilled water
stored in new, one quart cubitainers did not show any increase in organic carbon after
two weeks exposure.
4.2 Because of the possibility of oxidation or bacterial decomposition of some components of
aqueous samples, the lapse of time between collection of samples and start of analysis
should be kept to a minimum. Also, samples should be kept cool (4°C) and protected
from sunlight and atmospheric oxygen.
4.3 In instances where analysis cannot be performed within two hours (2 hours) from time of
sampling, the sample is acidified (pH < 2) with HC1 or H2SO4.
5. Interferences
5.1 Carbonate and bicarbonate carbon represent an interference under the terms of this test
and must be removed or accounted for in the final calculation.
5.2 This procedure is applicable only to homogeneous samples which can be injected into the
apparatus reproducibly by means of a microliter type syringe or pipette. The openings of
the syringe or pipette limit the maximum size of particles which may be included in the
sample.
6. Apparatus
6.1 Apparatus for blending or homogenizing samples: Generally, a Waring-type blender is
satisfactory.
6.2 Apparatus for total and dissolved organic carbon:
6.2.1 A number of companies manufacture systems for measuring carbonaceous
material in liquid samples. Considerations should be made as to the types of
samples to be analyzed, the expected concentration range, and forms of carbon to
be measured.
6.2.2 No specific analyzer is recommended as superior.
7. Reagents
7.1 Distilled water used in preparation of standards and for dilution of samples should be
ultra pure to reduce the carbon concentration of the blank. Carbon dioxide-free, double
distilled water is recommended. Ion exchanged waters are not recommended because of
the possibilities of contamination with organic materials from the resins.
7.2 Potassium hydrogen phthalate, stock solution, 1000 mg carbon/liter: Dissolve 0.2128 g
of potassium hydrogen phthalate (Primary Standard Grade) in distilled water and dilute
to 100.0 ml.
NOTE 2: Sodium oxalate and acetic acid are not recommended as stock solutions.
7.3 Potassium hydrogen phthalate, standard solutions: Prepare standard solutions from the
stock solution by dilution with distilled water.
7.4 Carbonate-bicarbonate, stock solution, 1000 mg carbon/liter: Weigh 0.3500 g of sodium
bicarbonate and 0.4418 g of sodium carbonate and transfer both to the same 100 ml
volumetric flask. Dissolve with distilled water.
D-419
-------
7.5 Carbonate-bicarbonate, standard solution: Prepare a series of standards similar to step
7.3.
NOTE 3: This standard is not required by some instruments.
7.6 Blank solution: Use the same distilled water (or similar quality water) used for the
preparation of the standard solutions.
8. Procedure
8.1 Follow instrument manufacturer's instructions for calibration, procedure, and
calculations.
8.2 For calibration of the instrument, it is recommended that a series of standards
encompassing the expected concentration range of the samples be used.
9. Precision and Accuracy
9.1 Twenty-eight analysts in twenty-one laboratories analyzed distilled water solutions
containing exact increments of oxidizable organic compounds, with the following results:
Increment as
TOC
mg/liter
4.9
107
Precision as
Standard Deviation
TOC. mg/liter
3.93
8.32
(FWPCA Method Study 3, Demand Analyses)
Bias,
%
Accuracy as
Bias,
mg/liter
+ 15.27
+ 1.01
+0.75
+ 1.08
Bibliography
1. Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Part 31, "Water", Standard D 2574-79, p 469 (1976).
2. Standard Methods for the Examination of Water and Wastewater, 14th Edition, p 532,
Method 505, (1975).
D-420
-------
EPA METHOD
NO. 9060
D-421
-------
METHOD 9060
TOTAL ORGANIC CARBON
1.0 SCOPE AND APPLICATION
1.1 Method 9060 1s used to determine the concentration of organic carbon
in ground water, surface and saline waters, and domestic and industrial
wastes. Some restrictions are noted 1n Sections 2.0 and 3.0.
1.2 Method 9060 1s most applicable to measurement of organic carbon
above 1 mg/L.
2.0 SUMMARY OF METHOD
2.1 Organic carbon 1s measured using a carbonaceous analyzer. This
instrument converts the organic carbon in a sample to carbon dioxide (C02) by
either catalytic combustion or wet chemical oxidation. The C02 formed is then
either measured directly by an infrared detector or converted to methane (CH^.)
and measured by a flame ionization detector. The amount of C02 or CH^ in a
sample is directly proportional to the concentration of carbonaceous material
in the sample.
2.2 Carbonaceous analyzers are capable of measuring all forms of carbon
in a sample. However, because of various properties of carbon-containing
compounds 1n liquid samples, the manner of preliminary sample treatment as
well as the instrument settings will determine which forms of carbon are
actually measured. The forms of carbon that can be measured by Method 9060
are:
1. Soluble, nonvolatile organic carbon: e.g., natural sugars.
2. Soluble, volatile organic carbon: e.g., mercaptans, alkanes, low
molecular weight alcohols.
3. Insoluble, partially volatile carbon: e.g., low molecular weight
oils.
4. Insoluble, particulate carbonaceous materials: e.g., cellulose
fibers.
5. Soluble or insoluble carbonaceous materials adsorbed or entrapped
on Insoluble inorganic suspended matter: e.g., oily matter adsorbed
on silt particles.
2.3 Carbonate and bicarbonate are inorganic forms of carbon and must be
separated from the total organic carbon value. Depending on the instrument
manufacturer's instructions, this separation can be accomplished by either a
simple mathematical subtraction, or by removing the carbonate and bicarbonate
by converting them to C02 with degassing prior to analysis.
9060 D-422
Revision Q
Date September 1986
-------
3.0 INTERFERENCES
3.1 Carbonate and bicarbonate carbon represent an interference under the
terras of this test and must be removed or accounted for in the final calcula-
tion.
3.2 This procedure 1s-applicable only to homogeneous samples which can
be injected into the apparatus reproducibly by means of a microliter-type
syringe or pipet. The openings of the syringe or pipet limit the maximum size
of particle which may be included in the sample.
3.3 Removal of carbonate and bicarbonate by acidification and purging
with nitrogen, or other inert gas, can result in the loss of volatile organic
substances.
4.0 APPARATUS AND MATERIALS
4.1 Apparatus for blending or homogenizing samples: Generally, a
War1 ng-type blender is satisfactory.
4.2 Apparatus for total and dissolved organic carbon;
4.2.1 Several companies manufacture analyzers for measuring
carbonaceous material in liquid samples. The most appropriate system
should be selected based on consideration of the types of samples to be
analyzed, the expected concentration range, and the forms of carbon to be
measured.
4.2.2 No specific analyzer is recommended as superior. If the
technique of chemical oxidation is used, the laboratory must be certain
that the instrument is capable of achieving good carbon recoveries in
samples containing parti culates.
5.0 REAGENTS
5.1 ASTM Type II water (ASTM D1193) : Water should be monitored for
impurities, and should be boiled and cooled to remove
5.2 Potassium hydrogen phthalate, stock solution. 1,000 mg/L carbon:
Dissolve 0.2128 g of potassium hydrogen phthalate (primary standard grade) in
Type II water and dilute to 100.0 ml.
NOTE; Sodium oxalate and acetic acid are not recommended as stock
solutions.
5.3 Potassium hydrogen phthalate, standard solutions; Prepare standard
solutions from the stock solution by dilution with Type II water.
9060
Revision 0
Date September 1986
-------
5.4 Carbonate-bicarbonate, stock solution, 1,000 mg/L carbon: Weigh
0.3500 g of sodium bicarbonate and 0.4418 g of sodium carbonate and transfer
both to the same 100-mL volumetric flask. Dissolve with Type II water.
5.5 Carbonate-bicarbonate, standard solution; Prepare a series of
standards similar to Step 5.3.
NOTE; This standard 1s not required by some instruments.
5.6 Blank solution; Use the same Type II water as was used to prepare
the standard solutions.
6.0 SAMPLE COLLECTION, PRESERVATION, AND HANDLING
6.1 All samples must be collected using a sampling plan that addresses
the considerations discussed in Chapter Nine of this manual.
6.2 Sampling and storage of samples in glass bottles is preferable.
Sampling and storage in plastic bottles such as conventional polyethylene and
cubitainers is permissible if it is established that the containers do not
contribute contaminating organlcs to the samples.
NOTE; A brief study performed in the EPA Laboratory indicated that Type
II water stored 1n new, 1-qt cubital ners did not show any increase
in organic carbon after 2 weeks' exposure.
6.3 Because of the possibility of oxidation or bacterial decomposition
o'f some components of aqueous samples, the time between sample collection and
the start of analysis should be minimized. Also, samples should be kept cool
(4*C) and protected from sunlight and atmospheric oxygen.
6.4 In instances where analysis cannot
time of sampling, the sample Is acidified (pH
be performed within 2 hr from
2} with HC1 or
7.0 PROCEDURE
7.1 Homogenize the sample in a blender.
NOTE: To avoid erroneously high results, inorganic carbon must be
accounted for. The preferred method is to measure total carbon and
inorganic carbon and to obtain the organic carbon by subtraction.
If this 1s not possible, follow Steps 7.2 and 7.3 prior to analysis;
however, volatile organic carbon may be lost.
7.2 Lower the pH of the sample to 2.
7.3 Purge the sample with nitrogen for 10 min.
7.4 Follow instrument manufacturer's. instructions for calibration,
procedure, and calculations.
7.5 For calibration of 'the instrument, a series of standards should be
used that encompasses the expected concentration range of the samples.
9060
D-424
Revision 0
Date Seotember 1986
-------
7.6 Quadruplicate analysis is required. Report both the average and the
range.
8.0 QUALITY CONTROL
8.1 All quality control data should be maintained and available for easy
reference or inspection.
8.2 Employ a minimum of one blank per sample batch to determine 1f
contamination or any memory effects are occurring.
8.3 Verify calibration with an independently prepared check standard
every 15 samples.
8.4 Run one spike duplicate sample for every 10 samples. A duplicate
sample is a sample brought through the whole sample preparation and analytical
process.
9.0 METHOD PERFORMANCE
9.1 Precision and accuracy data are available in Method 415.1 of Methods
for Chemical Analysis of Water and Wastes.
10.0 REFERENCES
1. Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Part 31, "Water," Standard D 2574-79,
p. 469 (1976).
2. Standard Methods for the Examination of Water and Wastewater, 14th ed.,
p. 532, Method 505 (1975).
9060 D-425
Revision
Date September 1986
-------
I.
• I
I)
1 UW
»(. C >
to o-> —
a-- c • «
«» C • 3C
u» o •
• c -• .»
•• OK II C "
t Ml 3-0
C J" • • U
L-«O— •
J W »O 3 C
O» UL OO
•» -c o-«o
•*•* • 1.
N O O •
k. u
+- \.
0 O C
«• O
« -
• nu
^- o •
« • o
C-*
VI V V •
N 3 w
V
w
•
UM
-• «
3 —
OC
o
o
VD
(NJ
o
«o
o
c \
L
\ /
C
• **
•* t
** it •
•SE
^
I».
c
4f
• X
C 0
o
ra
N
i:
c
c-c
0 > •
0
n
N
i!5e
•
-------
EPA METHOD
NO. 415.1M
TOTAL VOLATILE ORGANICS
D-427
-------
ORGANIC CARBON, TOTAL
Method 415.1 (Combustion or Oxidation)
STORET NO. Total 00680
Dissolved 00681
1. Scope and Application
1.1 This method includes the measurement of organic carbon in drinking, surface and saline
waters, domestic and industrial wastes. Exclusions are noted under Definitions and
Interferences.
1.2 The method is most applicable to measurement of organic carbon above 1 mg/1.
2. Summary of Method
2.1 Organic carbon in a sample is converted to carbon dioxide (CO2) by catalytic combustion
or wet chemical oxidation. The CO2 formed can be measured directly by an infrared
detector or converted to methane (CH4) and measured by a flame ionization detector.
The amount of CO2 or CH4 is directly proportional to the concentration of carbonaceous
material in the sample.
3. Definitions
3.1 The carbonaceous analyzer measures all of the carbon in a sample. Because of various
properties of carbon-containing compounds in liquid samples, preliminary treatment of
the sample prior to analysis dictates the definition of the carbon as it is measured. Forms
of carbon that are measured by the method are:-
A) soluble, nonvolatile organic carbon; for instance, natural sugars.
B) soluble, volatile organic carbon; for instance, mercaptans.
C) insoluble, partially volatile carbon; for instance, oils.
D) insoluble, paniculate carbonaceous materials, for instance; cellulose fibers.
E) soluble or insoluble carbonaceous materials adsorbed or entrapped on insoluble
inorganic suspended matter, for instance, oily matter adsorbed on silt particles.
3.2 The final usefulness of the carbon measurement is in assessing the potential oxygen-
demanding load of organic material on a receiving stream. This statement applies
whether the carbon measurement is made on a sewage plant effluent, industrial waste, or
on water taken directly from the stream. In this light, carbonate and bicarbonate carbon
are not a part of the oxygen demand in the stream and therefore should be discounted in
the final calculation or removed prior to analysis. The manner of preliminary treatment
of the sample and instrument settings defines the types of carbon which are measured
Instrument manufacturer's instructions should be followed.
Approved for NPDES
Issued 1971
Editorial revision 1974
D-428
-------
4. Sample Handling and Preservation
4.1 Sampling and storage of samples in glass bottles is preferable. Sampling and storage in
plastic bottles such as conventional polyethylene and cubitainers is permissible if it is
established that the containers do not contribute contaminating organics to the samples.
NOTE 1: A brief study performed in the EPA Laboratory indicated that distilled water
stored in new, one quart cubitainers did not show any increase in organic carbon after
two weeks exposure.
4.2 Because of the possibility of oxidation or bacterial decomposition of some components of
aqueous samples, the lapse of time between collection of samples and start of analysis
should be kept to a minimum. Also, samples should be kept cool (4°C) and protected
from sunlight and atmospheric oxygen.
4.3 In instances where analysis cannot be performed within two hours (2 hours) from time of
sampling, the sample is acidified (pH < 2) with HC1 or H2SO4.
5. Interferences
5.1 Carbonate and bicarbonate carbon represent an interference under the terms of this test
and must be removed or accounted for in the final calculation.
5.2 This procedure is applicable only to homogeneous samples which can be injected into the
apparatus reproducibly by means of a microliter type syringe or pipette. The openings of
the syringe or pipette limit the maximum size of particles which may be included in the
sample.
6. Apparatus
6.1 Apparatus for blending or homogenizing samples: Generally, a Waring-type blender is
satisfactory.
6.2 Apparatus for total and dissolved organic carbon:
6.2.1 A number of companies manufacture systems for measuring carbonaceous
material in liquid samples. Considerations should be made as to the types of
samples to be analyzed, the expected concentration range, and forms of carbon to
be measured.
6.2.2 No specific analyzer is recommended as superior.
7. Reagents
7.1 Distilled water used in preparation of standards and for dilution of samples should be
ultra pure to reduce the carbon concentration of the blank. Carbon dioxide-free, double
distilled water is recommended. Ion exchanged waters are not recommended because of
the possibilities of contamination with organic materials from the resins.
7.2 Potassium hydrogen phthalate, stock solution, 1000 mg carbon/liter: Dissolve 0.2128 g
of potassium hydrogen phthalate (Primary Standard Grade) in distilled water and dilute
to 100.0 ml.
NOTE 2: Sodium oxalate and acetic acid are not recommended as stock solutions.
7.3 Potassium hydrogen phthalate, standard solutions: Prepare standard solutions from the
stock solution by dilution with distilled water.
7.4 Carbonate-bicarbonate, stock solution, 1000 mg carbon/liter: Weigh 0.3500 g of sodium
bicarbonate and 0.4418 g of sodium carbonate and transfer both to the same 100 ml
volumetric flask. Dissolve with distilled water.
D-429
-------
f
7.5 Carbonate-bicarbonate, standard solution: Prepare a series of standards similar to step
7.3.
NOTE 3: This standard is not required by some instruments.
7.6 Blank solution: Use the same distilled water (or similar quality water) used for the
preparation of the standard solutions.
8. Procedure
8.1 Follow instrument manufacturer's instructions for calibration, procedure, and
calculations.
8.2 For calibration of the instrument, it is recommended that a series of standards
encompassing the expected concentration range of the samples be used.
9. Precision and Accuracy
9.1 Twenty-eight analysts in twenty-one laboratories analyzed distilled water solutions
containing exact increments of oxidizable organic compounds, with the following results:
Increment as
TOC
mg/liter
4.9
107
Precision as
Standard Deviation
TOC. mg/liter
3.93
8.32
(FWPCA Method Study 3, Demand Analyses)
Bias,
%
Accuracy as
Bias,
mg/liter.
+15.27
+ 1.01
+0.75
+ 1.08
Bibliography
1. Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Part 31, "Water", Standard D 2574-79, p 469 (1976).
2. Standard Methods for the Examination of Water and Wastewater, 14th Edition, p 532,
Method 505, (1975).
D-430
-------
Tekmar Company^
Telqnar Company"
Comoairv"
LIQUID SAMPLE CONCENTRATOR
MODEL LSC-1
Instruction Manual
SECTION I
SECTION II
SECTION III
SECTION TV
TABLE OF CONTENTS
INTRODUCTION
INSTALLATION
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Utilities Required
Assembly
Interfacing with a G.C.
Interfacing with a Totals Detector
Conditioning Trap .Column
OPERATION
1.
2.
3.
4.
Description of Controls
Operation
Calibration
Trap Column
Page
1
2
2
2
2
3
3
5
5
6
7
8
ILLUSTRATIONS
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
LSC-1
Purge Mode Schematic
Desorb Mode Schematic
Direct Interface to G.C.
Tube-needle Interface to G.C.
Tube-needle Interface to Totals Detector
9
10
10
11
11
11
SECTION V
REPRINTS AND COMPONENT PARTS INFORMATION
D-431
P.O-Box 37202 • Cincinnati, Ohio 45222 • (513) 761-0633 • TELEX NO. 21-1221
-------
Procedure for Purgeable Organic Carbon
-------
JcJqnar Company*
SECTION I INTRODUCTION
The LSC-1 is designed to concentrate volatile organic
contaminants found in fresh and waste water. By
bubbling an inert gas through the aqueous sample,
the volatile organic contaminants exhibiting low
solubility in water will be quantitatively
partitioned into the gas phase. A trap column in
the LSC-1 concentrates the organics from the gas
phase to complete the concentration step. Following
the concentration step (Purge Mode, Figure 2) the
sample is thermally desorbed from the trap column
(Desorb Mode, Figure 3) and transferred via connect-
ing tubing to your measurement device.
The technique will quantitatively remove those
organics exhibiting high volatility (less than
150 C Boiling Point) and low solubility (less than
5%) in water. At solubilities greater than 5% (apx.)
partitioning of the organic compound is not quantita-
tive. In the latter case, quantitative analysis is
possible by relating the amount of sample partitioned
from the aqueous phase to the volume of purge gas
used.
D-433
-------
Company"
SECTION II INSTALLATION
1. Utilities Required:
Power: 110V, 60 Hz, 2A
Gases: Purge gas should be zero grade Helium
or Nitrogen. Connect to Purge Gas on
rear of LSC-1. Set delivery pressure
to 20 psi. A hydrocarbon trap should
be used to scrub the purge gas before
entering the LSC-1.
Desorb gas should be pre-purified grade
Helium or Nitrogen. Connect to Desorb
Gas on rear of LSC-1. Delivery pressure
will be determined by type of interfac-
ing used. (See Section U, 3 for
further details on desorb gas.)
2. Assembly
Except for the sampler, the LSC-1 is completely
assembled. Remove the sampler from its packing
and install as pictured in Figure 1. The sampler
is supported by the 1/4" compression fitting
attached to the front panel bracket. Connect the
purge gas tube (left side of bracket) to the
sampler arm running to the bottom of the frit.
Connect the exit tube (right side of bracket)
to the right arm of the sampler. Reasonable care
should be exercised in attaching the fittings to
avoid breakage of the saapler.
3. Interfacing with a -Gas Chromatograph
Interfacing to a G.C. is best done by using the
G.C. carrier gas as the desorb gas for the LSC-1
(see Figure 4). The output of the G.C. flow
controller is connected directly to the desorb
D-434
-------
Tckmar Company*
gas input of the LSC-1. The trap effluent port on
the LSC-1 is connected directly .to the carrier input
of the G.C. injection port using the 1/8" O.D.
teflon tubing supplied. Using this type of inter-
facing, the G.C. carrier backflushes the LSC-1
trap directly to the G.C. column in Desorb Mode.
In Purge Mode, operation of the G.C. is unaffected.
An alternate means of interfacing to a G.C. is the
tube-needle coupling (see Figure 5). In this case
the trap effluent port of the LSC-1 is connected
to the septa injector of the G.C. with teflon tubing
and needle adaptor (supplied with LSC-1.) Oesorb
gas for the LSC-1 must be supplied at a pressure
greater than the pressure of the carrier gas going
to the G.C. (to prevent G.C. carrier from back-
streaming to the LSC-1 during Desorb Mode.) A flow
rate of 20 cc/min. for the desorb gas is sufficient.
An auxiliary flow controller is required between the
desorb gas tank and the LSC-1 to regulate the desorb
flow.
4. Interfacing with a Totals Detector
Interfacing to a totals detector (specific chlorine,
TOC analyzer, total hydrocarbon analyzer, etc. ) is
usually accomplished using the tube-needle coupling
(Figure 6). However, if the totals detector uses a
carrier gas, that carrier could be used as the desorb
gas for the LSC-1 (Figure 4).
5. Conditioning Trap Column
The trap column in, your LSC-1 was baked out prior to
shipment but should be baked again prior to operation.
Turn on the LSC-1, set the Purge/Desorb valve to
Purge, set the Trap Bake/Operate switch to Trap Bake,
and set the Trap Temperature Control to 250 C.
D-435
-------
Te^rnar Company*
Leave the LSC-1 in this condition overnight for
a thorough cleaning of the trap. This procedure
can be repeated whenever trap contamination is
suspected.
D-436
-------
Company"
SECTION III
1.
OPERATION
Description of Controls
Trap Bake/Operate
Operate:
Trap Bake:
Trap Temperature
Control:
Purge Timer:
Trap oven and fan are controlled by
position of purge/desorb valve.
Purge timer can be set for desired
purge time.
Used for conditioning trapping
column. Fan is off and the oven is
on independent of purge/desorb valve
position. (The purge/desorb valve
should be set in the purge position
during trap bake mode to avoid con-
tamination of the measurement device.
This is a direct set proportional
temperature controller. The red
light below the control blinks when
the controller is proportioning at
the set temperature. The control is
off in purge mode. For all other
instrument settings, the controller
is on. The range is room temperature
to 350°C.
The timer controls a three-way valve
supplying purge gas to the sampler.
The timer can be set from zero to
thirty minutes and is continuously
adjustable. After setting the time,
the timer is started by pressing the
white button in the center of the
D-437
-------
Company*
timer knob. At the end of the pre-set
time the purge valve closes and the timer
re-sets itself. To terminate a run,
rotate the timer knob counter-clockwise
to zero.
Purge/Desorb:
Purge: The flow of purge gas (controlled by
rotameter and purge timer) is directed
to the trap column and to vent. The
desorb gas passes through the valve, by-
passing the trap column enroute to the
measurement device (Figure 2).
Desorb: The sampler is connected to vent and the
desorb gas backflushes the heated trap
column enroute to the measurement device
(Figure 3).
Purge Flow: Flowneter used to establish the flow of
purge gas'to the sampler.
Trap
Effluent: For connection to measurement unit.
In j ection
Port: Located on top of front panel bracket
and uses standard G.C. septa.
2. Operation
Set main power switch to On (no warm-up required) and
set Trap Bake/Operate switch to Operate. Establish
a 40 cc/min. flow rate of purge gas with the flov*neter
(approximately 45 on the flovroeter, but this must be
checked against a bubble type flowneter or similar
calibrating device.) Set the Trap Temperature Control
to 130°C. Fill the 5 ml syringe with sample by remov-
ing the plunger and pouring sample into the barrel to
D-438
-------
Tckpiar Company*
overflowing. Open the valve on the bottom of the
syringe and reinsert the plunger into the syringe
barrel (avoid air bubbles between the liquid and
plunger. ) Using the long needle, the sample is
injected into the purge unit. (If the sample is
not injected immediately/ close the syringe valve
to avoid loss of volatiles.)
Set the purge timer to the required purge time
(typically 11 minutes ) , and press the white button
in the center of the timer knob. Purge gas will
now be bubbling through the sample and will stop
automatically at the end of the pre-set purge time.
During this interval, prepare your measurement
device to receive the sample. The concentrated
sample is transferred to your measurement unit by
turning the Desorb/Purge valve to Desorb. This
backflushes the trap column and turns on the
Temperature Controller, causing a rapid temperature
rise in the trap and thermal desorption. After
three or four minutes, return the system to purge
mode and the LSC-1 is ready to accept a new sample.
As mentioned above, the LSC-1 needs no warm-up.
Indeed, if long delays occur between sample runs,
it would be best to turn off the LSC-1 to a>/cid
needless running of the trap column cooling fan.
3. Calibration
Prepare a solution of your standards in methanol at
a concentration of 1000 times the desired calibration
level. Inject 5 ul of the methanol solution directlv
D-439
-------
Tckgiar Company*
into the 5 ml sample syringe containing organic free
water using the 10 ul syringe supplied with the LSC-1.
The 10 ul syringe needle is run through the valve
attached to the 5 ml sample syringe with the valve in
the open position. After injecting the standard into
the organic free water, withdraw the 10 ul syringe/
close the valve, attach the long needle to the valve
and inject the 5 ml into the purge unit.
4. Trap Column
The trap installed in your LSC-1 contains 2/3 Tenax
and 1/3 Silica Gel Oavisson Grade 15. This is
optimized for trapping organohalides but will also
trap a broad range of organic compounds. A blank.
trap is supplied for making your own trap column if
it is desired to optimize for a particular compound.
The top of the column is identified by two grooves
cut near the top end. An all tenax trap is available
and is identified by one groove cut near the top end.
The trap column is accessible through the rear panel.
CAUTION: Unplug power cord before
i
removing the back panel
or chassis.
The fittings at the top of the trap are finger tight
and utilize teflon ferrules. Remove the 1/16" tube
and fitting from the top of the trap and loosen the
fitting at the base. Lift the trap vertically about
one inch. Swing the bottom of the trap to the rear
of the LSC-1 and the trap and furnace can be removed
through the opening in the rear of the furnace housing.
D-440
-------
s
-------
Purge gas (He or N2) is bubbled through the
sample, partitioning volatile organics into the gas
phase for concentration by the trap column.
Figure 2
D«aortj G*» Ovrt
Desortt Gas In
Purge Mode
(Trap Column 2S'C)
in
Desorfo Mode
The trap column is heated and backflushed with
carrier gas (He orN2) to transfer the concentrated
sample to the measurement device.
Figure 3
Oesorb Gas and Simple Out
DesorfeMode
(Trap Column 125'C)
In
Bake Mode
This is a service mode for cleaning the trap column
at elevated temperature while venting the effluent
to atmosphere.
D-442
-------
LSC-1 Typical Detector Interfacings
LSC1/GC
Direct couple to GC using GC
carrier as LSC-1 input.
Figure 4
Carrier
From Flow Controller
Purge
LSC-1
<3C
Effluent Out Garner Input of Injection Port
LSC-l/GC
Tube-needle coupling to GC
using alternate source of He or
Ni as LSC-1 carrier input.
( Figure 5
Effluent Out
Injection Port
LSC-1/Specific Totals Detector
Tube-needle coupling to totals
detector using alternate source
of He or Ns as LSC-1 carrier
input.
Figure 6
Total Organic Carbon Analyzer
Specific Chlorine Detector
Effluent Out
1 Sample Input
Tekmar Company*
P.O. Box 37202 • Cincinnati, Ohio 45222 • Telephone: 513/781-0633
D-443
-------
xf
xT
xf
o
-------
EPA METHOD
NO. 1010
D-445
-------
METHOD 101C1
PENSKY-MARTENS CLOSED-CUP METHOD
1.0 Scope and Application
1.1 Method 1010 uses the Pensky-Martens closed-cup tester to determine
the flash point of fuel oils, lube oils, suspensions of solids, liquids that
tend to form a surface film under test conditions, and other liquids.
2.0 Summary of Method
2.1 The sample is heated at a slow, constant rate with continual
stirring. A small flame is directed into the cup at regular intervals with
simultaneous interruption of stirring. The flash point is the lowest temper-
ature at which application of the test flame ignites the vapor above the
sample.
3.0 Interferences
3.1 Ambient pressure, sample homogeneity, drafts, and operator bias can
affect flash point values.
4.0 Apparatus
4.1 Pensky-Martens Closed Flash Tester, as described in Annex Al of ASTM
Method D93-77. (Automatic flash point testers are available and may be
advantageous since they save testing time, permit the use of smaller samples,
and exhibit other advantages. If automatic testers are used, the user must be
sure to follow all the manufacturer's instructions for calibrating, adjusting,
and operating the instrument. In any cases of dispute, the flash point as
determined manually shall be considered the referee test.)
4.2 Thermometers: Two standard thermometers shall be used with the
ASTM Pensky-Martens tester.
4.2.1 For tests in which the indicated reading falls within -7* to
-f-110* C (20* to 230* F), inclusive: either (1) an ASTM Pensky-Martens
Low Range or Tag Closed Tester Thermometer having a range from -7* to
+110* C (20* to 230" F) and conforming to the requirements for Thermometers
SC (9F) and as prescribed in ASTM Specification El, or (2) an IP Thermo-
meter 15C (15F) conforming to specifications given in Annex A3 of ASTM
D93-77.
iThis method is based on ASTM Method D93-77. Refer to 093-77 or D93-80
for more information.
D-446
-------
2 / CHARACTERISTICS - Ignitability
4.2.2 For tests in which the indicated reading falls within 110*
to 370* C (230* to 700* F): either (1) an ASTM Pensky-Martens High
Range Thermometer having a range from 90* to 370" C (200* to 700* F) and
conforming to the requirements for Thermometers IOC (10F) as prescribed
in Specification El, or (2) IP Thermometer 16C (16F) conforming to
specifications given in Annex A3 of ASTM D93-77.
5.0 Reagents
5.1 Calcium chloride.
5.2 p-Xylene reference standard.
6.0 Sample Collection, Preservation, and Handling
6.1 All samples must be collected using a sampling plan that addresses
the considerations discussed in Section One of this manual.
6.2 Samples shall not be stored in plastic bottles since volatile
materials may diffuse through the walls of the bottle.
7.0 Procadure
7.1 Preparation of samples: Samples that do not contain volatile
contaminants shall be prepared in the following manner. NOTE: If the sample
is suspected of containing volatile contaminants, the treatment described in
7.1.1 and 7.1.2 should be omitted.
7.1.1 Samples of very viscous materials may be warmed until they
are reasonably fluid before they are tested. However, no sample should
be heated more than is absolutely necessary, and no sample should ever
be heated to a temperature that exceeds 17' C (30* F) below the sample's
expected flash point.
7.1.2 Samples containing dissolved or free water may be dehydrated
with calcium chloride or by filtering through a qualitative filter paper
or a loose plug or dry absorbent cotton. Warming the sample is permitted,
but it shall not be heatad for prolonged periods or above a temperature
of 17* C (30* F) below the sample's expected flash point.
7.2 Routine procedure
7.2.1 Thoroughly clean and dry all parts of the cup and its
accessories before starting the test. Be sure to remove any solvent
that was used to clean the apparatus. Fill the cup with the sample to
D-447
-------
-- 1010 / 3
be tested to the level indicated by the filling mark. Place the lid on
the cup and set the latter in the stove. Be sure to properly engage the
locating or locking device. Insert the thermometer. Light the test
flame and adjust it to a diameter of 5/32 in. (4 mm). Supply the heat
at such a rate that the temperature as indicated by the thermometer
increases 5* to 6* C (9* to 11* F)/min. Turn the stirrer 90 to 120 rpm,
stirring in a downward direction.
7.2.2 If the sample is expected to have a flash point of 110* C
(230* F) or below, apply the test flame when the temperature of the
sample is from 17* C (30* F) to 28* C (50* F) below the expected
flash point and thereafter at a temperature reading that is a multiple
of 1* C (2* F). Apply the test flame by operating the mechanism on the
cover which controls the shutter and test flame burner so-that the flame
is lowered into the vapor space of the cup in 0.5 sec, left in its
lowered position for 1 sec, and quickly raised to its high position.
Do not stir the sample while applying the test flame.
7.2.3 If the sample is expected to have a flash point above 110* C
(230* F), apply the test flame in the manner just described at each
temperature that is a multiple of 2* C (5* F), beginning at a temperature
of 17* C (30* F) to 28* C (50* F) below the expected flash point.
NOTE: When testing materials to determine if volatile contaminants are
>-- present, it is not necessary to adhere to the temperature limits for
•C. initial flame application as stated in 7.2.2 and 7.2.3.
7.2.4 Record as the flash point the temperature read on the
thermometer at the time the test flame application causes a distinct
flash in the interior of the Cup. Do not confuse the true flash point
with the bluish halo that sometimes surrounds the test flame at applica-
tions preceding the one that causes the actual flash. The actual flash
will have occurred when a large flame propagates itself over the surface
of the sample.
7.3 Determination of flash point of suspensions of solids and highly
viscous materials
7.3.1 Bring the material to be tested and the tester to a tempera-
ture of 15* i 5* C (60* + 10* F) or 11* C (20* F) lower than the estimated
flash point, whichever is lower. Turn the stirrer 250+^10 rpm, stirring
in a downward direction. Raise the temperature throughout the duration
of the test at a rate of not less than 1* nor more than 1.5" F (2 to 3* F)/
min. With the exception of these requirements for rates of stirring
and heating, proceed as prescribed in Section 7.2.
7.4 Calculation and report
7.4.1 Observe and record the ambient barometric pressure at the
time of the test. When the pressure differs from 760 mm Hg (101.3 kPa),
v correct the flash point as follows:
D-448
-------
4 / CHARACTERISTICS - Ignitability
(A) Corrected flash point = C + 0.25 (101.3 - p)
(B) Corrected flash point = F + 0.06 (760 - P)
(C) Corrected flash point = C + 0.033 (760 - P)
where:
F = observed flash point, *F
C = observed flash point, *C
P = ambient barometric pressure, mm Hg
p = ambient barometric pressure, kPa.
NOTE: The barometric pressure used in this calculation must be the
ambient pressure for the laboratory at the time of test. Many aneroid
barometers, such as those used at weather stations and airports, are
precorrected to give sea level readings. These must not be used.
7.4.2 Record the corrected flash point to the nearest
0.5* C (or r F).
7.4.3 Report the recorded flash point as the Pensky-Martens Closed
Cup Flash Point ASTM D93 - IP 34, of the sample tested.
7.5 Refer to Method ASTM 093 77 for more details and background
on the Pensky-Marten method.
8.0 Quality Control
8.1 All quality control data should be available for review.
8.2 Duplicates and standard reference materials should be routinely
analyzed.
8.3 The flash point of the p-xylene reference standard must be deter-
mined in duplicate at least once'per sample batch. The average of the two
analyses should be 27' + 0.8* C (81* +. 1.5* F).
D-449
-------
a
.t-
Ul
o
-------
EPA METHOD
NO. 1110
D-451
-------
METHOD 1110
CORROSIVITY TOWARD STEEL
1.0 Introduction
1.1 Method lllQl is used to measure the corrosivity toward steel of
both aqueous and nonaqueous liquid wastes.
2.0 Summary of Method
2.1 This test exposes coupons of SAE Type 1020 steel to the liquid
waste to be evaluated and, by measuring the degree to which the coupon has
been dissolved, determines the corrosivity of the waste.
3.0 Interferences
3.1 In laboratory tests, such as this one, corrosion of duplicate
coupons is usually reproducible to within ^ 10%. However, large differences
in corrosion rates may occasionally occur under conditions where the metal
surfaces become passivated. Therefore, at least duplicate determinations of
corrosion rate should be made.
4.0 Apparatus and Materials
4.1 A versatile and convenient apparatus should be used, consisting of
a kettle or flask of suitable size (usually 500 to 5000 milliliters),
a reflux condenser, a thermowell and temperature regulating device, a heating
device (mantle, hot plate, or bath), and a specimen support system. A
typical resin flask set up for this type test is shown in Figure 1.
4.2 The supporting device and container should not be affected by or
cause contamination of the waste under test.
4.3 The method of supporting the coupons will vary with the apparatus
used for conducting the test but should be designed to insulate the coupons
from each other physically and electrically and to insulate the coupons from
any metallic container or other device used in the test. Some common support
materials include glass, fluorocarbon or coated metal.
^hTs~method is based on NACE Standard TM-01-69 (1972 Revision),
"Laboratory Corrosion Testing of Metals for the Process Industries," National
Association of Corrosion Engineers, 3400 West Loop South, Houston, TX
77027.
D-452
-------
2 / CHARACTERISTICS - Corrosivity
H
Figure 1. Typical resin flask that can be used as a versatile and convenient apparatus to
conduct simple immersion tests. Configuration of the flask top is such that more sophisticated
apparatus can be added as required by the specific test being conducted. A = thermowell, B =
resin flask, C * specimens hung on supporting device, D * gas inlet, E a heating mantle, F a liquid
interface, G = opening in flask for additional apparatus that may be required, and H » reflux
condenser.
D-453
-------
1110 / 3
4.4 The shape and form of the coupon support should ensure free contact
with the waste.
4.5 A circular specimen of SAE 1020 steel of about 3.75 cm (1.5 Inch)
diameter Is a convenient shape for a coupon. With a thickness of approxi-
mately 0.32 cm (0.125 inch) and a 0.80-cra (0.4-1n.) diameter hold for
mounting, these specimens will readily pass through a 45/50 ground glass
joint of a distillation kettle. The total surface area of a circular speci-
men 1s given by the following equation:
A » 3.14/2(D2-d2) + (t)(3.14)(0) + (t)(3.14)(d)
where t * thickness, 0 * diameter of the specimen, and d * diameter of the
mounting hole. If the hole 1s completely covered by the mounting support,
the last term (t)(3.14)(d) 1n the equation 1s omitted.
4.5.1 All coupons should be measured carefully to permit accurate
calculation of the exposed areas. An area calculation accurate to +. 1%
1s usually adequate. ~
4.5.2 More uniform results may be expected 1f a substantial layer
of metal 1s removed from the coupons prior to testing the corrosivity of
the waste. This can be accomplished either by chemical treatment
(pickling), electrolytic removal, or by grinding with a coarse abrasive.
At least 0.254 mm (0.0001 inch) or 2 to 3 rag/cm* should be removed.
Final surface treatment should Include finishing with #120 abrasive
paper or cloth. Final cleaning consists of scrubbing with bleachfree
scouring powder, followed by rinsing in distilled water, then acetone or
methanol, and finally air drying. After final cleaning, the coupon
should be stored 1n a desiccator until used.
4.5.3 The minimum ratio of volume of waste to area of the metal
coupon to be used in this test 1s 40 ml/cm2.
5.0 Reagents
5.1 Sodium hydroxide (20%).
5.2 Zinc dust.
5.3 Concentrated hydrochloric acid.
5.4 Stannous chloride.
5.5 Antimony chloride.
D-454
-------
4 / CHARACTERISTICS - Corrosivity
6.0 Sample Collection. Presentation, and Handling
6.1 All samples should be collected using a sampling plan that addresses
the considerations discussed in Section One of this manual.
7.0 Procedure
7.1 Assemble the test apparatus as described in Section 4.0 above.
7.2 Fill the container with the appropriate amount of waste.
7.3 Begin agitation at a rate sufficient to ensure that the liquid is
kept well mixed and homogeneous.
7.4 Using the heating device bring the temperature of the waste to
55* C (130' F).
7.5 An accurate rate of corrosion is not required but only a
determination as to whether the rate of corrosion is less than or greater
than 6.35 mm per year. A 24-hour test period should be ample to determine
whether or not the rate of corrosion is greater than 6.35 mm per year.
«
7.6 In order to accurately determine the amount of material lost to
corrosion, the coupons have to be cleaned after immersion and prior to
weighing. The cleaning procedure should remove all products of corrosion
while removing a minimum of sound metal. Cleaning methods can be divided
into three general categories: mechanical, chemical and electrolytic.
7.6.1 Mechanical cleaning includes scrubbing, scraping, brushing
and ultrasonic procedures. Scrubbing with a bristle brush and mild
abrasive is the most popular of these methods. The others are used in
cases of heavy corrosion as a first step in removing heavily encrusted
corrosion products- prior to scrubbing. Care should be taken to avoid
removing sound metal.
7.6.2 Chemical cleaning implies the removal of material from the
surface of the coupon by dissolution in an appropriate solvent. Solvents
such as acetone, dlchloromethane, and alcohol are used to remove oil,
grease or resinous materials, and are used prior to immersion to remove
the products of corrosion. Solutions suitable for removing corrosion
from the steel coupon are:
Solution Soaking Time Temperature
20% NaOH + 200 g/1 zinc dust 5 min Boiling
or
Cone. HC1 + 50 g/1 Snd2 + 20 g/1 SbCla Until clean Cold
D-455
-------
1110 / 5
7.6.3 Electrolytic cleaning sheu1 • be preceded by scrubbing to
remove loosely adhering corrosion products. One method of electrolytic
cleaning that can be employed is:
Solution "0 g/1 83804
Anode *.rt>on or lead
Cathode l;eel coupon
Cathode current density .3 amp/cm2 (129 amp/in.2)
Inhibitor i ;c organic inhibitor/liter
Temperature "** C (165* F)
Exposure Period j minutes
NOTE: Precautions must be taken to ensure good electrical contact with
the coupon, to avoid contamination of ths cleaning solution with easily
reducible metal ions, and to ensure thac inhibitor decomposition has not
occurred. Instead of using a proprietary inhibitor, 0.5 g/1 or either
diorthotolyl thiourea or quinolin ethiodide can be used.
7.7 Whatever treatment is employed to clean the coupons, its effect In
removing sound metal should be determined using a blank (i.e., a coupon that
has not been exposed to the waste). The blank should be cleaned along witrt
the test coupon and its waste loss subtracted from that calculated for the
test coupons.
7.8 After corroded specimens have been cleaned and dried, they are
reweighed. The weight loss is employed as the principal measure of corrosfon.
Use of weight loss as a measure of corrosion requires making the assumption
that all weight loss has been due to generalized corrosion and not localized
pitting. In order to determine the corrosion rate for the purpose of this
regulation, the following formula is used:
Corrosion Rate (mmpy) * weight loss x 11.145
area x time
where weight loss is in milligrams, area in square centimeters,
time in hours, and corrosion rate in millimeters per year
(mmpy).
8.0 Quality Control
8.1 All quality control data should b« filed and available for
auditing.
8.2 Duplicate samples should be analyzed on a routine basis.
D-456
-------
HAZARDOUS WASTE CHARACTERISTICS
-REACTIVITY-
(FROM SW 846)
D-457
-------
CHARACTERISTICS - Corrosivity; Reacfvity
2.1.3 Reactivity
Introduction
The regulation in 40 CFR 261.23 defines reactive wastes to include
wastes which have any of the following properties: (1) readily undergo
violent chemical change; (2) react violently or form potentially explosive
mixtures with water; (3) generate toxic fumes when mixed with water or, in
the case of cyanide or sulfide-bearing wastes, when exposed to mild acidic
or basic conditions; (4) explode when subjected to a strong initiating force;
(5) explode at normal temperatures and pressures; or (6) fit within the
Department of Transportation's forbidden explosives, Class A explosives, or
Class B explosives classifications.
This definition is intended to identify wastes which, because of
their extreme instability and tendency to react violently or explode, pose
a problem at all stages of the waste management process. The definition is
to a large extent a paraphrase of the narrative definition employed by the
National Fire Protection Association. The Agency chose to rely on a
descriptive, prose definition of reactivity because the available tests
for measuring the variegated class of effects embraced by the reactivity
definition suffer from a number of deficiencies.
Regulatory Definition
Characteristic of Reactivity Regulation
A solid waste exhibits the characteristic of reactivity if a representa-
tive sample of the waste has any of the following properties:
1. It is normally unstable and readily undergoes violent change
without detonating.
2. It reacts violently with water.
3. It forms potentially explosive mixtures with water.
4. When mixed with water, it generates toxic gases, vapors or fumes
in a quantity sufficient to present a danger to human health or
the environment,
5. It is a cyanide- or sulfide-bearing waste which, when exposed to pH
conditions between 2 and 12.5, can generate toxic gases, vapors,
or fumes in a quantity sufficient to present a danger to human
health or the environment. (Methods 9010 and 9030 can be used to
detect the presence of cyanide and sulfide in wastes.)
6. It is capable of detonation or explosive reaction if it is
subjected to a strong initiating source or if heated under
confinement.
D-458
-------
2 / CHARACTERISTICS - Reactivity
7. It is readily capable of detonation or explosive decomposition or
reaction at standard temperature and pressure.
8. It is a forbidden explosive as defined in 49 CFR 173.51, or a
Class A explosive as defined in 49 CFR 173.53, or a Class B
explosive as defined in 49 CFR 173.88.
9. A solid waste that exhibits the characteristic of reactivity, but
is not listed as a hazardous waste in Subpart D, has the EPA
Hazardous Waste Number of D003.
Definition of Explosive Materials
For purposes of this regulation, a waste is a reactive waste by reason
of explosivity if it meets one or more of the following descriptions:
1. Is explosive and ignites spontaneously or undergoes marked
decomposition when subjected for 48 consecutive hours to a
temperature of 75* C (167* F).
2. Firecrackers, flash crackers, salutes, or similar commercial
devices which produce or are intended to produce an audible
effect, the explosive content of which exceeds 12 grains each in
weight; pest control bombs, the explosive content of which exceeds
18 grains each in weight; and any such devices, without respect to
explosive content, which on functioning are liable to project or
disperse metal, glass or brittle plastic fragments.
3. Fireworks that combine an explosive and a detonator or blasting
cap.
4. Fireworks containing an ammonium salt and a chlorate.
5. Fireworks containing yellow or white phosphorus.
6. Fireworks or firework compositions that ignite spontaneously or
undergo marked decomposition when subjected for 48 consecutive
hours to a temperature of 75* C (167* F).
7. Toy torpedoes, the maximum outside dimension of which exceeds
7/8 inch, or toy torpedoes containing a mixture of potassium
chlorate, black antimony and sulfur with an average weight of
explosive composition in each torpedo exceeding four grains.
8. Toy torpedoes containing a cap composed of a mixture of red
phosphorus and potassium chlorate exceeding an average of one-half
(0.5) grain per cap.
9. Fireworks containing copper sulfate and a chlorate.
D-459
-------
Regulatory Definition / 3
10. Explosives containing an ammonium salt and a chlorate.
11. Liquid nitroglycerin, diethylene glycol dinitrate or other liquid
explosives not authorized.
12. Explosives condemned by the Bureau of Explosives (except properly
packed samples for laboratory examinations).
13. Leaking or damaged packages of explosives.
14. Solid materials which can be caused to deflagrate by contact with
sparks or flame such as produced by safety fuse or an electric
squib, but cannot be detonated (see Note 1) by means of a No. 8
test blasting cap (see Note 2). Example: Black powder and low
explosives.
15. Solid materials which contain a liquid ingredient, and which, when
unconfirmed (see Note 3), can be detonated by means of a No. 8 test
blasting cap (see Note 2); or which can be exploded in at least
50 percent of the trials in the Bureau of Explosives' Impact
Apparatus (see Note 4) under a drop of 4 inches or more, but
cannot be exploded in more than 50 percent of the trials under a
drop of less than 4 inches. Example: High explosives, commercial
dynamite containing a liquid explosive ingredient.
16. Solid materials which contain no liquid ingredient and which can
be detonated, when unconfined (see Note 3), by means of No. 8 test
blasting cap (see Note 2); or which can be exploded in at least
50 percent of the trials in the Bureau of Explosives' Impact
Apparatus (see Note 4) under a drop of 4 inches or more, but
cannot be exploded in more than 50 percent of the trials under a
drop of less than 4 inches. Example: high explosives, commercial
dynamite containing no liquid explosive ingredient, trinitrotoluene,
amatol, tetryl, picric acid, ureanitrate, pentolite, commercial
boosters.
17. Solid materials which can be caused to detonate when unconfined
(see Note 3), by contact with sparks or flame such as produced by
safety fuse or an electric squib; or which can be exploded in the
Bureau of Explosives' Impact Apparatus (see Note 4), in more than
50 percent of the trials under a drop of less than 4 inches.
Example: initiating and priming explosives, lead azide, fulminate
of mercury, high explosives.
18. Liquids which may be detonated separately or when absorbed in
sterile absorbent cotton, by a No. 8 test blasting cap (see Note
2); but which cannot be exploded in the Bureau of Explosives'
Impact Apparatus (see Note 4), by a drop of less than 10 inches.
The liquid must not be significantly more volatile than nitro-
glycerine and must not freeze at temperatures above minus 10" F.
Example: high explosives, desensitized nitroglycerine.
D-460
-------
4 / CHARACTERISTICS - Reactivity
19. Liquids that can be exploded in the Bureau of Explosives' Impact
Apparatus (see Note 4) under a drop of less than 10 inches.
Example: nitroglycerine.
20. Blasting caps, these are small tubes, usually made of an alloy of
either copper or aluminum, or of molded plastic closed at one end
and loaded with a charge of initiating or priming explosives.
Blasting caps (see Note 5) which have been provided with a means
for firing by an electric current, and sealed, are known as
electric blasting caps.
21. Detonating primers which contain a detonator and an additional
charge of explosives, all assembled in a suitable envelope.
22. Detonating fuses, which are used in the military service to
detonate the high explosive bursting charges of projectiles,
mines, bombs, torpedoes, and grenades. In addition to a powerful
detonator, they may contain several ounces of a high explosive,
such as tetryl or dry nitrocellulose, all assembled in a heavy
steel envelope. They may also contain a small amount of radio-
active component. Those that will not cause functioning of other
fuses, explosives, or explosive devices in the same or adjacent
containers are classes as class C explosives and are not reactive
waste.
23. A shaped charge, consisting of a plastic, paper, or other suitable
container comprising a charge of not to exceed 8 ounces of a high
explosive containing no liquid explosive ingredient and with a
hollowed-out portion (cavity) lined with a rigid material.
24. Ammunition or explosive projectiles, either fixed, semi-fixed or
separate components which are made for use in cannon, mortar,
howitzer, recoil less rifle, rocket, or other launching device with
a caliber of 20 mm or larger.
25. Grenades. Grenades, hand or rifle, are small metal or other
containers designed to be thrown by hand or projected from a
rifle. They are filled with an explosive or a liquid, gas, or
solid material such as a tear gas or an incendiary or smoke
producing material and a bursting charge.
26. Explosive bombs. Explosive bombs are metal or other containers
filled with explosives. They are used in warfare and include
airplane bombs and depth bombs.
27. Explosive mines. Explosive mines are metal or composition
containers filled with a high explosive.
28. Explosive torpedoes. Explosive torpedoes, such as those used in
warfare, are metal devices containing a means of propulsion and a
quantity of high explosives.
D-461
-------
Regulatory Definition / 5
29. Rocket ammunition. Rocket ammunition (including guided missiles)
is ammunition designed for launching from a tube, launcher, rails,
trough, or other launching device, in which the propel 1 ant
material is a solid propel!ant explosive. It consists of an
igniter, rocket motor, and projectile (warhead) either fused or
unfused, containing high explosives or chemicals.
30. Chemical ammunition. Chemical ammunition used in warfare is all
kinds of explosive chemical projectiles, shells, bombs, grenades,
etc., loaded with tear, or other gas, smoke or incendiary agent,
also such miscellaneous apparatus as cloud-gas cylinders, smoke
generators, etc.,.that may be utilized to project chemicals.
31. Boosters, bursters, and supplementary charges. Boosters and
supplementary charges consist of a casing containing a high
explosive and are used to increase the intensity of explosion of
the detonator of a detonating fuse. Bursters consist of a casing
containing a high explosive and are used to rupture a projectile
or bomb to permit release of its contents.
32. Jet thrust units or other rocket motors containing a mixture of
chemicals capable of burning rapidly and producing considerable
pressure.
33. Propellant mixtures (i.e., any chemical mixtures which are
designed to function by rapid combustion with little or no smoke).
NOTE 1: The detonation test is performed by placing the sample in an open-end
fiber tube which is set on the end of a lead block approximately 1-1/2 in.
in diameter and 4 in. high which, in turn, is placed on a solid base. A
steel plate may be placed between the fiber tube and the lead block.
NOTE 2: A No. 8 test blasting cap is one containing two grams of a mixture
of 80% mercury fulminate and 20% potassium chlorate, or a cap of equivalent
strength.
NOTE 3: "Unconfined" as used in this section does not exclude the use of a
paper or soft fiber tube wrapping to facilitate tests.
NOTE 4: The Bureau of Explosives' Impact Apparatus is a testing device
designed so that a guided 8-1 b weight may be dropped from predetermined
heights so as to impact specific quantities of liquid or solid materials
under fixed conditions. Detailed prints of the apparatus may be obtained
from the Bureau of Explosives, Association of American Railroads, Operations
and Maintenance Dept., Bureau of Explosives, American Railroad Building,
Washington, D.C. 20036; 202-293-4048. The procedures for operating this
apparatus are described in the following paragraphs.
Method for Testing Liquids. The anvil is inserted in the receptable in
the anvil housing.A new cup is dropped into the cup-positioning block.
One drop of the sample liquid (about 0.01 g) is dropped into the cup
B-462
-------
6 / CHARACTERISTICS - Reactivity; EP Toxicity
from a pipette and the cup is revolved until an even film forms on base.
The top striker and the main striker are inserted as far as possible
into the upper housing. The upper housing is then placed over the
cup-positioning block so that the end of the main striker goes into the
brass cup. When the upper housing is removed from the cup-positioning
block, the brass cup is picked up on the end of the main striker. When
the two housings are screwed together, the brass cup automatically rests
firmly on the anvil.
An 8-1b drop weight is dropped from predetermined heights until consistent
failure results using the new sample portion and cup each time. An
explosion is evidenced by flame or flame and noise, but in either event
the brass cup will be belled out or bulged.
After making the drop, the drop weight is raised, the test assembly
removed, and appropriate solvent is poured into the top end. The two
housings are then separated, the striker removed, and the brass cup
removed from the striker end.
All solvent is removed carefully and thoroughly before preparations are
started for next drop and the apparatus cooled and cleaned. The test is
then repeated in the same manner, but with a filter paper disc in the
base of the cup under the composition being tested.
Method for Testing Solids. The die is placed in the anvil assembly and
a small amount (about 0.01 g)1 to make a thin film is placed into the
die assembly. The steel striker pellet (plug) is inserted carefully and
then the striker (plunger). The assembly is then placed in the apparatus
and the drop weight allowed to rest on the striker top to effect even
distribution of the explosive.
The 8-1b drop weight is then dropped on the striker from predetermined
heights until consistent failure results (i.e., explosion, etc.) using a
new sample portion each time.
The die assembly is removed carefully and the striker removed. A few
drops of appropriate solvent are poured into the die assembly before it
is disassembled.
All parts are cleaned and dried carefully before each test.
NOTE 5: Blasting caps, blasting caps with safety fuse, or electric blasting
caps in quantities of 1,000 or less are classified as class 0 explosives and
not subject to regulation as a reactive waste.
is suggested that a tiny spoon be devised to measure the proper
amount of test sample, since this is much more convenient and safer than
other methods of measuring the sample.
D-463
-------